350im English (Revised2) - 1

User Manual
Chapter 1 Preface
This CNC system is a mid-range embedded CNC system developed by our company for miller and
processing center.
The system comprehensively utilizes modern computer technology. System movement control kernel
and PLC program are based on unique and reliable real-time control engine subsystem RTAI which makes
the system independent from the management and deployment of the operating system so as to ensure the
rigidness of the CNC system. Taking high-performance, low-power industrial ARM microprocessor as the
hardware core, it uses super large scale field programmable integrated circuit, 6-layered printed-circuit
board (PCB), 100MB flash for the user to storage a large amount of programs, and 8-inch true color LCD
screen for better human-machine interface to make the most of the system.
Note to the attention:1. “Attention” means that the operators shall be cautious during operation or
configuration of related functions or failure or inexecution may occur.
2. “Special Attention” means that the operators shall be especially cautious during operation or
configuration of related functions or failures of the machine and/or accidents may occur.
Special Tips: 1. The system has parameters backup which enables the storage of all the parameters of
machine tool and the system, and PLC files into the computer after the completion of
commissioning. It is easy to make commissioning in batch and enables rapid recovery
after the replacement of the faulted system (for detailed operation method see Section
3.4).
2. This manual is corresponding to the system version: V350.14.01 FPGA1003[linux2.6]
Attention: For the first time using the CNC system, please read the manual
carefully to make the most of the system.
Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 1

Http://www.sotengcnc.com Email:market@sotengcnc.com
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Chapter 2 System Technical Features
2.1 System Structure

 32-bit high-performance low-power industrial ARM microprocessor
 128MB memory
 100MB user storage space
 800x600 8-inch true color LCD display
 Main and secondary touch and film control panel
 High anti-interference SMPS
 USB portable disk drive interface
 RS232 interface
 Programmable I/O 48x32
 Spindle servo speed regulation/spindle variable frequency speed regulation
 Manual pulse generator
2.2 Technical Parameters

 Controllable coordinate axis: X, Y, Z, A, and B axis
 Linked axis: arc 2-3 axes, straight line 2-5 axes.
 Pulse equivalent: 0.001mm for X, Y, Z, A, and B axis
 Max. speed: max. 60000mm/min for X, Y, Z, A, and B axis
 Cutting speed: 1-20000mm/min
 Min. input unit: 0.001mm
 Programming size range: ± 99999.999mm
 Capable of managing 99 tools
 Controllable carousel or turning type automatic tool changer (ATC)
 Program code: conforming to ISO-840
 Programming coordinate system definition: conforming to ISO-841
 MTBF: more than 5000 hours
 Casing protection grade conforming to IP54
Note: In terms of controlled axis and linkage, system standard configuration is 3 axes, and the fourth and fifth axis is for
special order. The content relating to the fourth and fifth axis function is for the special order.
2.3 System Functions

2.3.1 Self-diagnosis Function:
Full diagnosis of CPU, memory, LCD, I/O interface, parameter status, coordinate, the processing
procedures and so on at each start or reset. Real-time diagnosis of power supply, spindle, spacing, and
input-output port during the operation of the system.
2.3.2 Compensation Function:
 Automatic backlash compensation
 Automatic tool length compensation
 Automatic tool radius compensation
 Automatic tool radius offset and automatic sharp-angle transition
 Automatic lead screw pitch error compensation
2.3.3 Abundant Command System:
 Scaling commands.
Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 2
User Manual
 Mirror processing commands.
 A variety of tool offset commands
 Program management commands such as program loops, jumps, program calls and different end
treatment methods, and macro definitions.
 A variety of fixed-point commands: Starting point, set points, etc.
 Linear interpolation, arc interpolation, spiral-line interpolation commands.
 Program management commands such as program loops, program calls, program transfer and
different end treatment methods.
 52 workpiece coordinate systems and 4 reference points.
2.3.4 Full Chinese Menu Operation, Full-screen Editing:
The user operation is simple, intuitive and convenient.
2.3.5 Abundant Error-checking Function:
The nature of the errors in various operations can be pointed out and correction can be given.
2.3.6 Program Exchange between CNC System and IBM/PC Compatible Computers
Auxiliary CAD/CAM/CAPP programs made by PC compatible computer based on the rich software
resources can be transferred to the system for processing via communication interface (USB U disk
interface, RS232 interface). As well, the program can be transferred to the PC via the communication
interfaces.
2.4 System Operating Conditions

2.4.1 Power Supply:
AC 220V (+10%/-15%) Frequency 50Hz±2%, power: ≥ 200W.
Note: Isolation transformer must be used for power supply, the primary 380V input.
2.4.2 Climate Conditions:
Operating conditions: Temperature 0 ~ 45 ℃, relative humidity 30-95%.
Storage conditions: Temperature-20～55℃, relative humidity less than 93%（40℃）.
Atmospheric pressure: 86-106kpa.
2.4.3 Operating Environment:
Free of excessive dust, acid and alkali corrosive gas and explosive gas, no strong electromagnetic
interference.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Chapter 3 Operating commands
3.1 Distribution of Panel and Switch
Figure 3.1 Distribution of Panel

Table 3.1 Description of Switches:
Switch Function and Purpose
Emergency stop Immediately stop the drive and the motor and shut the spindle,
(yellow/red) cooling liquid, etc., waiting for lifting the button to reset and initialize.
Program Run Run automatic processing program, and the light is on at the same
(green button) time.
Press once during automatic continuous operation for a pause, and
Program stop
press again in the pause state to stop the program. It is used for
(red button)
stopping the current action in manual mode.
Spindle ratio switch It can adjust speed of spindle during operation in real time
Spindle feeding In program running or manual mode, it can real-time adjust feed
ratio switch speed of each shaft
Table 3.2 Description of Buttons:
Keyboard Type Function and Purpose
C H R T A X Y Z L I J K S F M G D P N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . - : Used for preparing
Letter keys commands and parameters of program. The number keys are used
Number keys for inputting processing data, parameter values and choosing
submenu
↑、↓、→、←:Used for moving the cursor, inputting data or selecting
menu and so on.
Del:Delete one character after the cursor at a time.
Edit keys PgUp、PgDn:Turn pages up or down.
Alt:Alteration key. It is used for switching coordinates during manual
and automatic states.
Back:Delete one character before the cursor at a time.
SPC:Space key.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 4
User Manual
Home:Move the cursor to the beginning of the line in program editing
mode, and move the cursor to the first parameter in parameter menu.
End:Move the cursor to the end of the line in program editing mode,
and move the cursor to the last parameter in parameter menu.
“Esc” :Return to the higher level of menu or suspend an operation.
“Enter”:Used for confirming submenu selection and starting a
newline in edit mode.
“Shift” :Input a shift key.
" " displays coordinate position screen. The position screen can
display relative coordinates, workpiece coordinate, and
comprehensive coordinate; and tool setting, base point of tool setting,
coordinate setting, coordinate selection can be also made.
" " program interface. Under the program interface, the

following operations can be performed: create and search, copy,
rename, information, open USB flash drive and execute a program.
" "tool compensation interface. Under tool compensation

interface, radius compensation, length compensation, reset all, reset
current, tool setting, and setting can be made.
" "Alarm history interface. In alarm interface, I/O, ladder

Function keys diagram, alarm display, ladder diagram editing, edit configuration
can be made.
“ ”parameters interface. In the parameters interface, there are

user parameters, system parameters, coordinate system, and
passwords, etc.
“ ”diagnosis interface. In diagnosis interface, I/O, ladder

diagram, alarm display, ladder diagram editing, edit configuration
can be made.
"MDI" enters into MDI function interface
" " is used to manually choose incremental gear, the handwheel
ratio adjustment
" " is used for switching the single or continuous processing of the
program
" " are used for controlling the positive

and negative rotation, stop and inching of spindle
" " for the start and stop of coolant
" " for loosening and tightening tools of spindle
Control keys " " for positive and negative rotation of the disk of ATC
" " for the start and stop of lubrication
" " for feed rate adjustment
“ ”for spindle speed adjustment
" " for safe exit of the system
Used for the feed of X, Y, Z, 4 coordinate
Feed keys +X +Y +Z +4 –X –Y –Z –4
axis
Used in manual mode for the fast
Speed up key
feeding each axis
Customkeys K1、K2、. . . K8 For custom control
For switching menu and selecting
Softkeys F1、F2、. . . F8
function

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
3.2 Operating Interface

The entire system adopts multilevel menu full screen operation, which is intuitive, convenient, and
complete. System enters into the main interface after boot as shown in the following figure:
Figure 3.2 Operating Interface

The display areas of system main interface (as shown in Figure 3.2) are defined as follows:
1. Title bar: To display the current work status; to display the name of program chosen to be run or
current running. The "LIONSHIAABB.NC" is the program name.
2. Tool status bar: To display information of tools. In the Figure 3.2, the T01 is the tool number on the
current spindle; H0 is the number of compensation of current tool along H length used by the current tool;
D1 is the number of compensation of current tool along D radius used by the current tool; 04 is the number
of current tool seat in the ATC, i.e. the tool seat number of the changing position; T04 is the tool number in
the current tool seat.
3. G code display bar: To display the G status of the executing program or the coordinate system status
under non-automatic state. Such as: G53 is for machine tool coordinate system....
4. Coordinate display bar: To display dynamic state of coordinate, that is, the currently selected
coordinate (it may be machine coordinate or that of workpiece). The circles after the coordinates (X, Z, C, A)
each represent an indicator light, which is used for indicating the state of return reference point of each
coordinate. If it shows green, then the coordinate axis returned the machine reference zero, or vice verse.
Therefore, during and prior to automatic operation, it must be ensured that the return to zero indicator
lights for each axis are green.
Attention: If a particular axis returned to zero, the green light will go out if there is a driving alarm on the axis.
5. The current imperial/metric status display.
6. M code display bar: To display the effectiveness of commonly-used M code, where green light means
effective, and red light means ineffective.
7. Program display bar: To display the content of the to-be-run or the running program, and program
execution progress (progress bar display).
8. Spindle rotating speed bar: To display the current instructed speed, ratio and the actual running
speed and speed ratio of the spindle.
9. To display the ratio of the actual spindle and feed speed to the maximum speed set in parameter
settings. Green part indicates that the actual running speed is under 60% of the maximum running speed,
which is in safe area; yellow part indicates that the actual running speed is 60%-100% of the maximum

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 6
User Manual
running speed, which is in alert area; the red part indicates that the actual running speed is more than
100% of the maximum running speed, which is in danger area.
10. Manual/automatic status bar: To display whether the system is in manual or automatic mode and
continuous, incremental and handwheel status under manual mode and related information.
11. Information bar: To display information related to system and machine tool; current data and time.
Such as alarm, soft limit, etc.
12. Menu display bar: To display the function menu. Press corresponding function key (F) to switch.
13. Current command F velocity display.
14. Current running actual F velocity display.
15. The current feed ratio display.
16. The current fast ratio display.
17. Actual rotating speed, the angle of current spindle.
18. The processing time display bar: To display the current elapsed time of the running program.
19. The processed number of workpiece display bar: To display the number of the cycle of current
program, that is how many pieces of the workpieces have been processed.
System menu structure:
This system adopts multilevel menu with the specific distribution as follows:
Figure 3.3 Menu Distribution

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Press function keys "Position", "Program", "Tool compensation", "Alarm", "Parameters", and
"Diagnosis" on the panel will show the interface as per Figure 3.3. The interface can be switched by F
softkey corresponding to the above menu. Press "ESC" key to return.
Dialog data input:
In system, data are mostly input by dialogues. When inputting data in the dialog, the system directly
replaces the data. That is to say, the existing data in the dialog is replaced by the new data. After input the
data, press "Enter" button to confirm and exit. Press "Esc" button to cancel the data entry and exit at any
time during data input.
Figure 3.4 Data Input Dialogue

Note: There is "F1-Clear, F8-Zero" on the top of the dialog, indicating press "F1" to clear the dialogue,
press "F8" to reset the dialogue to zero, which made data input convenient.
3.3 Tools
Press "Tool compensation" key to enter tool parameters configuration interface. The menu includes six
functions such as "Radius compensation", "Length compensation", "Reset all", "Reset current", "Tool seat
table", and "Set".
"Radius compensation" is used for setting tool radius compensation value.
"Length compensation" is for setting tool length compensation value.
"Reset all " can reset the tool length and radius compensation values.
"Reset current" can reset tool length or the radius compensation value to zero at the current cursor.
"Tool setting": Used for setting the current tool coordinate values.
"Tool seat table" is used for setting and observing the correspondence of tool seat and the tool.
"Setting" is used for setting the total number of tool managed by the current equipment (up to 99 tools).
3.3.1 Setting of Tool Radius Compensation Value
Press "Tool compensation" to enter into tool parameters interface. Press "Radius compensation" soft
key to enter into tool radius compensation parameter configuration interface. As shown in Figure 3.5, there
are three groups of compensation value for each tool. Move up and down the cursor keys to choose
corresponding tool number, then press "Enter" to pop up dialog, as shown in Figure 3.5.
Figure 3.3 Menu Distribution

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 8
User Manual
As shown in the above figure, press "↑", "↓" button in the edit box in the dialog to choose D1 or D2 or
D3. The value may be either positive or negative. The input method of value is absolute input mode. When
the tool radius compensation value is negative, it is equivalent to a swap between G41 and G42 function.
After the input, press Enter to save the tool radius compensation value and return; Press Esc to cancel and
return.
3.3.2 Setting of Tool Length Compensation Value
Press "Length compensation" to enter into tool length compensation parameters interface. As shown
in Figure 3.6, there are four groups of compensation value for each tool. Move up and down the cursor keys
to choose corresponding tool number, then press "Enter" to pop up dialog, as shown in Figure 3.6.
3.6 Setting of Tool Length Compensation

As shown in the above figure, press "↑", "↓" button in the edit box in the dialog to choose H1 or H2 or
H3 or H4. After the input, press Enter to save the tool radius compensation value and return; Press Esc to
cancel and return.
Press "ALT" key to switch between "Length compensation" and "Cumulative compensation" in tool
compensation interface. After the measurement of tool setting or manually reset tool compensation value,
the cumulative compensation value changes to zero.
Figure 3.7 Wear Setting

When manually increasing tool compensation value, the input value will be added to "Cumulated
compensation" value. So, the cumulated compensation value is used for displaying the total
manually-modified feed quantity of tool compensation after measuring.
Special Attention: 1. Length compensation value can be positive or negative.
2. Tool length compensation value shall be input incrementally.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Note to tool setting: Under the main interface and the system is in manual mode, press "Base point for
tool setting" to set the base point for tool setting, and the system will take the current Z axis coordinate as
the base point. After changed the tool, press "Tool setting" to automatically memorize the tool setting, that
is to say, after operation as prompted, the system will automatically take the difference between Z axis
coordinate and the base point as the corresponding length compensation value of the corresponding tool,
and store it in the system.
3.3.3 Tool Setting
Press "OFFSET" to enter into tool length compensation parameters interface. As shown in Figure 3.45,
there are four groups of compensation value for each tool. Move up and down cursor keys to choose
corresponding tool number, then press "Enter" to pop up a dialog, as shown in Figure 3.8, input the
corresponding tool number in the dialog, and press Enter key to complete the setting of length
compensation of the tool.
Figure 3.8 Setting of Length Compensation

3.3.4 Settings of Tool Seat Table
Under the tool parameters interface, press the "Toolseat" soft key to enter the tool seat table
parameters setting interface, which is used for setting and observing the correspondence of the tool seats
and the tools. As shown in Figure 3.45, the tool seat number is on the left, and corresponding tool number
in the ATC is on the right. Move up and down the cursor keys to choose corresponding tool number, then
press "Enter" to pop up dialog, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3.9 Settings of Tool Seat Table

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 10
User Manual
As shown, "ToolSeat 00" represents the tool seat of the spindle. Tool seat table is usually set when the
tool is installed for the first time. It is also need to check the settings of the tool seat for the corresponding
tools in case of unexpected power outage during tool change or in normal operation of machine tool (while
tool is being changed). Due to the nature of the tool change, when system controls "carousel" tool changer,
the correspondence between tool seat and the tool is fixed. However, when the system controls
"mechanical arm" tool changer, the correspondence between tool seat and the tool will be altered along
with the process of tool change.
As shown in the above figure, in the "Tool seat table" parameters interface, there is an "Initialization"
soft key, which is used to set the default corresponding relationship between tool seat and the tool (Figure
3.9, under normal circumstances, initialization of the corresponding relationship between tool seat and the
tool shall be made prior to the first installment of the tool, and then settings shall be made.
3.3.5 Setting the Number of Tools
Under the tool parameters interface, press the "Set" soft key to enter into the tool count parameters
setting interface, which is used for setting the total number of the tools currently managed by the
equipment (up to 99 tools), i.e. the capacity of the ATC. As shown in Figure 3.10
Figure 3.10 Setting the Number of Tools
3.4 Program
The programs in the system are managed by files. The system has NAND FLASH, which provides
100MB of space to store processing program. And the user program can be password-protected. Program
editor uses full screen operation mode.
On the panel, press the "Program" function key to pop up the program interface, as shown in Figure
3.11:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 3.11 Selection of Program

As shown in Figure 3.11: There are names of the programs and folders in the middle of the screen, and
the current selected program is highlighted. Move the cursor key or press PgUp and PgDn keys to select
program. After selected the program, press "Enter" to edit the current program or go into the appropriate
folder. The bottom of the screen displays the path of the program. /NC is the default path for the system
program, and new folders are under it. At the bottom of the screen there are 8 function keys such as
"New/Seek", "Copy", "Rename", "Previous level", "Information", "Open USB disk drive", "Execution", and
“Return". Corresponding function can be made by pressing the keys.
3.4.1 Create and Find
After pressing "New/Seek" soft key, dialog as shown in Figure 3.12 pops up, asking to input the name
of the file or folder to be created or searched.
Figure 3.12 New/Search

In this system, the program name can be numbers, letters (case insensitive) or other symbols (but
should not contain / \ : *? "< > | and space), and the length is unlimited. In the above dialog, press Enter
after input the filename. If the filename is already being used, the file with that name will be found and
highlighted. If the filename does not exist in the system, then create a new file with that name and highlight
it as current program. And press Enter to enter into edit mode to edit it.
Note: To create new folder or find a folder, add "[" symbol to the input name of folder. If the name is already being used,
the folder with that name will be found and highlighted. If the folder name does not exist in the system, then create
a new folder with that name and highlight it. And press Enter to go into the folder.
3.4.2 Copy
The operation Copy is to copy the current program files or folders to another file or folder. Move the
cursor up and down to select the program files or folders to be copied, and press Enter to show the pop-up
dialog as Figure 3.13 requiring to enter the new name of the file or folder.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 12
User Manual
Figure 3.13 Copy

In Figure 3.13, if the typed filename already exists, dialog as shown in Figure 3.14 will prompt user to
override the program file or folder. If there is no such file name or folder name, the file or folder will be
highlighted as the current program file or program folder.
Figure 3.14
3.4.3 Rename
It is used for renaming the existing program file or folder for ease of management. Press function keys
to show dialogs (as Figure 3.15), requiring to type new name of program file or folder.
Figure 3.15 Rename

If the typed filename already exists, dialog as shown in Figure 3.16 will prompt user to override the
program file or folder. If it does not exist, then the selected program file or folder will be renamed as the
typed name.
Figure 3.16
3.4.4 Delete
Under the program interface, move the cursor up and down to select the program files or folders to be
deleted and then press "Del" key to delete the currently selected program file or folder.
Under the program directory interface press "E" can eliminate all programs in the system, that is to
format the storage disk. This operation shall not be performed in general condition.
Attention: After deleting the program file or folder in the system, it will be unable to restore, please be
sure when operating.
3.4.5 Information
Under the program interface, move the cursor up and down to select the corresponding program files
and press "Information" key, then the pop-up dialog as shown in Figure 3.17 will show information about
the currently selected program files. The operator can easily understand the program status. Such as file
size, and the remaining space of the system.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 3.17 Information

Note: It is important to note that only the remaining space of the system is shown for folders.
3.4.6 USB Copy Program
The system is able to exchange the program with PC or other system by USB flash drive via USB port.
The system is compatible with 80% of USB flash drives on the market without installing drivers. But, USB
memory device used by MP3 or other devices is not supported. When copying the files in the USB flash
drive into the system, the file name in lower case letters will be automatically converted to uppercase. The
hidden files will not be copied when copying all the files from or to the system to or from USB flash drive.
When inserted the USB flash drive into the USB interface, under the program interface press "Open
USB flash drive" soft key to enter the management interface of USB flash drive, as shown in Figure 3.18:
Figure 3.18
As shown in Figure 3.18: The files of USB disk are displayed in the middle of the screen. All the
contents of the USB disk are shown in the area. Move the cursor up and down to select file or folder to be
operated. The bottom of the screen displays the path. /USB is the default path for the USB disk, and it will
extend when opening the folders in USB disk.
Under the USB flash drive interface, press "Execute" soft key to return the system program interface.
If dialog shown as in Figure 3.19 pops up after inserted the USB flash drive, the system cannot
recognize the USB flash drive. Please restart the system. If, after restart, the system can't recognize the USB
flash drive, please replace a new USB flash drive and then do it again.
Figure 3.19
To copy program file or folder in the USB flash drive to the system: After inserted the USB flash drive,
press the corresponding "Open USB flash drive" function key to show the program files in that USB flash
drive. Press "↑" and "↓" keys to move the cursor to select to the program file or folder to be copied to the
system, and then press "Copy to the system" soft key at this time, and a dialog prompting you to enter the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 14
User Manual
filename will pop up. Type the program file or folder name and press Enter.
Figure 3.20
override the program file or folder. If there is no such file name or folder name, the screen returns to
system program. The file or folder will be highlighted as the current program file or program folder.
Figure 3.21
To copy program file or folder in the system to the USB flash drive: Under the system program
interface, press "↑" and "↓" key to move the cursor to select the program files or filename to be copied.
Press the corresponding function key "Open USB flash drive" to enter the USB disk interface, then press the
corresponding function key "Copy to USB flash drive" to show a pop-up dialog, and then type the file name,
press Enter.
Figure 3.22
override the program file or folder. If there is no such file name or folder name, the screen returns to
system program. The file or folder will be highlighted as the current program file or program folder.
Figure 3.23
Note: Prior to eject USB flash drive, it must be returned to the interface displaying system program file directory, or the
data copied into the USB flash drive will be lost.
Import (upgrade and update) and export (backup) of parameter files and system software by USB
In the system, the transmission of parameter files and system software can be made through the
communication interface, so as to achieve the purpose of upgrading, updating or backup. The specific
operation method is as follows:
Import (upgrade and update) of parameter files and system software by USB :
Insert the USB disk into the system USB interface, press "Program" on the panel to enter the program
interface, press the "Open USB flash disk" (F6) soft key, then the program file in the USB displays. By
pressing the cursor keys to move up and down to select the file you want to import to the system, press the
"Import parameters" (F2) soft key to bring up the dialog box as shown below, press the "Enter" key to

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
confirm. After the success of the import, press "Eject USB flash drive" soft key to eject the USB flash drive.
Restart the system.
Figure 3.24 Import Parameter

Export (backup) of parameter files and system software by USB flash drive
Insert the USB disk into the system USB interface, press "Program" on the panel to enter the program
interface, press the "Open USB flash disk" (F6) soft key, then the program file in the USB displays. Press up
and down cursor to select the filename to be exported, and press Enter to open. Press "Export parameters"
pops up a dialog requiring enter the password of the machine tool manufacturer, and press "Enter" to show
dialog as shown in Figure 3.25, press Enter to confirm to export the parameter files and system software to
USB flash drive. After the success of the export, press "Eject USB flash drive" soft key to eject the USB flash
drive.
Figure 3.25 Export Parameter

Attention: 1. The system will automatically export all the parameter files and system software to
USB flash drive, and during the import, the files under the selected folders will be
imported to the system and override the existing files in the system.
2. Space shall not be used in the name of the folder when using USB flash drive.
Check the system current software version number
In the No. 9 parameter of the password parameter interface, the system current software version
number can be viewed. System current software version number is shown as below V350.14.01
FPGA1003[linux2.6].
3.4.7 RS232 Serial Transmission of Program
In addition to USB flash drive, the program can also be transmitted via RS232 serial port. Under the
program selection interface, press R key to receive program, press T key to send current program:
Then the program transmission will be made according to the prompt of the screen.
Port After connected the PC to the system with RS232 communication cable, the file can be transferred
after setting the serial port number and the transmission rate in the system.
Transferring program from PC to the system: Run the dedicated communication software for the
system in PC , as shown in Figure 3.26.
Figure 3.26

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 16
User Manual
After setting the serial port number and the transmission rate in the Configuration pane in Figure 3.26,
click the button "Send CNC program files" and select the files to be send, and then click the button "Open".
Now the PC is ready for sending files;
Under the "Program" interface of the system, press "R" key, the system shows the dialog as in Figure
3.27.
Figure 3.27
Type the name of program file in the above figure, and after confirmed the PC starts to send program
files, and system starts to receive files, as shown in Figure 3.28.
Figure 3.28
The file will be highlighted as the current program file upon the completion of the transmission.
Transferring program from the system to PC: Press "↑" and "↓" to move the cursor to select the
program files to be sent under the "Program" interface of the system, and then press "T" key, and now the
system is ready to send, as shown in Figure 3.29:
Figure 3.29
Run the dedicated communication software for the system in PC , as shown in the following figure.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 3.30
After setting the serial port number and the transmission rate in the Configuration pane in the above
figure, click the button "Receive CNC program files", and enter the file name, and click "Save", and then the
system starts to send the program file and the PC will put the received files into the specified path.
Attention: 1. The dedicated communication software shall be used on user's PC to transmit the programs.
2. Special attention should be paid that the transmission rate of the PC and CNC system shall be
consistent, otherwise it is unable to transfer.
3. The serial port numbers that connected to device shall be consistent. It is highly recommended
to use communication isolation module produced by our company for the system in order to
prevent the serial port from damage. The RS232 port baud rate shall not be higher than
38.4Kpbs when using communication isolation module.
4. The length of RS232 communication cable shall not be greater than 10m.
5. Communication software is in the attached CD. Directly copy it to computer's hard drive to run.
There is no need to install.
3.4.8 Edit
Select a program with cursor in the Program interface and then press Enter key to enter to the edit
mode of the program. The system program editor has small and large font types, which can be switched by
"ALT" key. As shown in Figure 3.31, it is small font type.
Figure 3.31 Edit

Edit interface is mainly used for preparing, inserting, modifying, and deleting program, and other
functions. Select the program name and press Enter to enter full-screen edit mode.
In the Edit interface, input can be made with graphic dialog. But you need to import the corresponding
parameter configuration file cncsystemcn.cfg and pictures.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 18
User Manual
Figure 3.32 Graphic Processing command Selection Dialogue

As shown in the above figure, in the Edit interface press Graph dialog (F5) button to pop up a graphic
dialog, and enter the corresponding graphical dialogue command such as input "84" to pop up G84 dialog as
below. You just input corresponding processing data.
Figure 3.33 G84 Right-handed Tapping Commands Dialog

In Edit mode, the name of the program file that is currently edited is displayed at the top left. The total
number of lines of the program file and the line number at which the cursor is currently located are
displayed at the top right. In the middle there is the content of the program file under edit. Below there are
operation commands menu that is arranged in two screens, including "Compile", "First and End Line",
"TeachIn", "Position", "Graph", "Delete line", ">>", "Insert", "Block delete", "Block copy", "Sort the line
number", "Search”, “Replace", "Replace all", "<<", and "Insert". Press ">>" and "<<" to switch between the
two screens, as shown in Figure 3.34.
Figure 3.34
Under the program directory interface press "S (P)" to enter the program template interface. Program

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
templates can automatically generate processing program with macro program.
In edit mode, operation method is as follows:
1) Place the cursor: To change the cursor position
"↑↓" keys to move up or down one line.
"→←" keys to move left or right one character at a time.
"PgUp, PgDn" to turn a page up/down.
"Enter" to go to the beginning of the next line.
Press the "Position" soft key and enter the line number to directly position to the specified line.
When the positioned program line exceeds the display page, the page will be automatically changed to
accommodate the program line.
Press "Home" and "End" to move to the beginning of a line or the end of a line.
Press "FrELine" to directly position to the starting line or the end line of the program.
2) Delete: Press "Del" to delete the character after the cursor at a time.
3）Backspace: Press "Back" to delete the character before the cursor at a time.
4）Space: Press "Spc" key to insert a space before the cursor.
5）Shift key: Press "Shift" key and then press character keys to insert the shifted characters.
6）Delete line: Press "Delete line" soft key to delete the current line where the cursor is located.
7）Block operation: Including functions such as block copy and block delete:
Copy block: This operation can copy a block in the editor to the end of the line where the cursor is as
following.
In edit mode, move the cursor to the corresponding position. Press "Block copy" soft key in the second
screen of the menu, and the system shows the dialog as shown in Figure 3.35.
Figure 3.35
Input the starting and the ending line number of the block to be copied in the above dialog, and then
press Enter as shown in Figure 3.35:
Figure 3.36
Input the number of the ending line of the block to be copied in the above dialog, and then press Enter
to copy the selected program block to the end of the line where the cursor is.
Note: 1. The input line number must be the actual number of the line rather than the line number specified by the
starting N of
the program line.
If there is only one line to be copied, just set the starting line number and the ending line number as the same.
Delete block: Delete the program block from the line where the cursor is as the starting line to the
specified line number as following.
Move the cursor to the starting line of the block to be deleted. In the first screen of the menu, press
"Delete" soft key, the system shows a dialog as shown in Figure 3.37.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 20
User Manual
Figure 3.37
Input the number of the ending line of the block to be deleted in the above dialog, and then press Enter
to delete the selected program block.
Note: 1. The input line number must be the actual number of the line rather than the line number specified by the
starting N of the program line.
8）Compile:
The program (source code) written by the user with ISO code according to the programing method
specified by the CNC system cannot be run directly in the system. It must be converted to machine code
(object program) which can be executed by the system. The compilation function is to translate the source
code to machine code program.
"Compile": Compile CNC processing program and compile macro.
For compilation process has strict grammar check, it can be used for checking errors. The program
can be modified in time in case of grammar error. If the program has no error, the compiler will show "OK,
compiled!" after compilation as shown in figure below:
Figure 3.38
If there is any error, the line number and the nature of the error will be shown as below. Press Enter to
move the cursor automatically to the program line with error:
Figure 3.39
When the system is in automatic mode, the system will automatically make implicit compilation to the
source program. If the compiled program has any error, the system will show the error message.
9) Find: Look up the specified string after the cursor.
10) Replace: Replace the specified string after the cursor for one time.
11) Replace all: Replace the specified string from the current cursor line to the end of the program, as
follows:
Move the cursor to the starting line from which the replacement takes place. In the second screen of
the menu, press "Replace all" soft key, the system shows a dialog as shown in Figure 3.40.
Figure 3.40
Enter the characters to be replaced in the above dialog, and press Enter as shown in the figure below:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 3.41
Enter the character you want to replace in the above dialog, and press Enter to replace the specified
string from the current cursor line to the end of the program.
Note: Press the "Emergency stop" to stop the ongoing "Find", "Replace", "Replace all" operations.
12) Sort line number: Rearrange the line numbers of the current program under edit according to
decimal system. In the system, there is no strict requirement for line number. It may be 1-4 digits, or
increased from any number, or even none.
13) Exit: Press "Esc" or "Return" key to return to the main interface of file management. The system
will prompt to save the program upon exit.
Special Attention: In case of unexpected power outage in the process of program editing, the program
files will not be saved. If you want to save the program during editing, then press
Compile key to save the program.
3.4.9 Selection of Processing Program
Processing program shall be selected in the "Program" interface prior to the automatic processing. The
operation method is as follows: Press "↑" and "↓" to select program in "Program" interface, and then press
"Execute program" soft key. Now the processing program has been selected (it can be observed by the
status bar at the top right corner of the screen).
Special Attention: If you want to choose a processing program, it must be done according to the above
method, otherwise it will execute the program of the last time. To prevent accident,
please be sure to check the name of the current program to be executed prior to
automatic operation.
3.4.10 Switching Program Folder Path
In the system, program files are usually stored in the default root directory/tmp/NC, and new folders
may be create under it. Press "Previous level" to return to the root directory from folders.
3.5 Manual
Manual refers to the manual operation. In the panel, press the "Manual" key to enter manual mode as
shown in figure below:
Figure 3.42 Manual Mode

As shown in the above in manual mode, there are several ways such as manual continuous, manual

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 22
User Manual
incremental and manual pulse to operate the table, and the corresponding ratio adjustment can be
performed. Other auxiliary operations also can be made, and its status can be shown through the system
interface.
3.5.1 Continuous Mode
In manual mode, press the "Manual Continuous" soft keys to enter manual continuous mode. The
status bar of manual and automatic mode is shown as shown in Figure 3.43:
Figure 3.43
Manual continuous operation is based on key press time. Press the key to feed, and lift the key to stop
feeding. Use "+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z, +4, -4" keys on the panel to feed in the specified axis and the direction.
Feeding speed is the manual speed multiplied by the feed ratio in the parameter settings.
When the feeding exceeds the hard limit on both positive and negative directions of the running axis,
the feeding stops, and the system will show that feeding cannot continue due to the limit, only feeding on
reverse direction can be made.
During manual continuous operation, press the multi-axis feed button at the same time to manually
feed multi-axis.
3.5.2 Incremental
In manual mode, press the "Manual Incremental" soft keys to enter manual incremental mode. The
status bar of manual and automatic mode is shown as shown in Figure 3.43:
Figure 3.44
Incremental mode means to use "+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z, +4, -4" keys on the panel to feed with an
incremental value in the specified axis and the direction. Feeding speed is the manual speed multiplied by
the feed ratio in the parameter settings.
The incremental value can be switched by . Implementation methods is: Cycling within "increasing
1.0mm, increasing 0.1mm, increasing 0.01mm, increasing 0.001mm". At the same time, when in the
incremental mode, press "I" button will popup dialog as shown in Figure 3.45 to set any incremental value. I
value will be shown in manual status bar.
Figure 3.45 Set up any incremental value

When the feeding exceeds the hard limit on both positive and negative directions of the running axis,
the feeding stops, and the system will show that feeding cannot continue due to the limit, only feeding on
reverse direction can be made.
3.5.3 Manual Pulse Mode
In manual mode, press the "Manual Pulse" soft keys to enter manual pulse mode. The status bar of
manual and automatic mode is shown as shown in figure below:
Figure 3.46

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
In manual pulse mode, the X, Y, Z and the fourth or the fifth axis can be chosen as the current axis, and
the ratio X1, X10, and X100 can be chosen. The information is displayed in manual status bar, as shown in
Figure 3.46.
Pressing corresponding letter key (X, Y, Z, A, and B) to select axis in panel manual pulse mode. Pressing
repeatedly to switch among X1, X10, and X100 to choose the ratio. Select the current axis and ratio with
corresponding switch on the hand box for handheld manual pulse mode. It is shall be noted that the
confirmation button on the left side of the hand box shall be pressed after switching the gear or the manual
pulse is not permitted to operate (for the sake of safety).
3.5.4 Quick Adjustment of Feed Speed in Manual and Incremental Mode
Under manual and incremental mode, feed speed can be adjusted quickly. Press 0 key to set the rate of
F30, and press 1 key to set the rate of F60. That is to say, 0-9 respectively corresponds to different rates, as
the following table:
Panel key F speed
0 30
1 60
2 120
3 250
4 500
5 1000
6 1500
7 2000
8 2500
9 3000
3.5.5 Back to Reference Point
With base point switch:
Back to the reference point operation is to feed each coordinate axis one by one to the base point
switch on the machine tool. For example, when the feeding axis back to reference point method is set to 0 in
parameters interface, and when the coordinate axis detects the base point signal and returns to detect zero
pulse signal, the machine tool coordinate data will be automatically set to the first reference point data in
the parameters of reference point. Upon reconnecting the CNC system after CNC machine tool power off,
and cancelled overrun alarm and released the Emergency stop button, back to reference point operation
shall be made again to establish correct machine tool coordinate system.
Without base point switch:
It can be determined by setting to float zero. By enabling the user parameter NO. 54 float zero point
parameters, and setting up the float zero values of NO.55 X axis, NO.56 Y(C) axis, NO.57 Z axis, NO.58 fourth
axis, and NO.59 fifth axis to determine the zero point of machine tool.
Float zero setup steps are as follows:
1.Enable the user parameter NO. 54 to set up the axis for which the float zero point will be
enabled. For example: Set to 4 to enable X axis.
2. Move the X axis to the specified location for setting the zero point.
3.Press "Parameter" button to enter user parameter. Press Enter after choosing NO. 55, the setting
dialog for X axis float zero point for the machine tool pops up. Input the needed machine tool
coordinate values in the dialog.
If set to 0, that is to say, the machine tool coordinate of the current X axis is the zero point of the X
axis. Every time the machine tool returns back to the reference point to the current position.
If set to 15, that is to say, the machine tool coordinate of current X axis is 15.000, and the distance
to the zero point is 15mm.
Similarly, the setting method of float zero point for other axis is as same as the one for X axis.
When in manual mode, press the "F6" (Back to reference point) button to show the dialog as shown in
Figure 3.47 asking which axis will be returned to the reference point.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 24
User Manual
Input X or Y or Z or A or B in Figure 3.47, and press the Enter key. Only the corresponding axis will go
back to the reference point. Or, input 0, and press the Enter key, the axis will go back to the reference point
by the order of Z→X→Y→A→B one by one. If it is successful to go back to the reference point, the circle in
front of the axis coordinate will go green; otherwise the back to reference point operation fails.
Figure 3.47
The order of the automatic back to reference point, running speed of back to reference point, running
direction, detection method, offset can be set by the parameter settings. In the process of returning back to
the reference point, press "Stop" button to stop returning back to reference point.
Attention: 1. During returning back to reference point, the system may prompt as shown in Figure
3.48. It means failure to detect the zero pulse for returning back to reference point. Just
perform Back to the reference point operation at this time. If it occurs repeatedly during
operation, the parameters may be set incorrectly (reverse speed is too fast) or the circuit is
failed. Please check.
2. The precondition for spindle to return to the reference point is that there must be encoder
signal feedback for the spindle. The precision of returning back to reference point is
dependent on the execution method and the speed. When the spindle returns back to the
reference point with position control mode, the precision is high, while the precision is low
with speed control mode, and it is only for reference . At the same time the higher the speed
is, the lower the precision is.
Figure 3.48
Special Attention:
1. After each startup, the system must conduct a back to reference point operation to ensure the processing
precision of the machine tool. After startup due to accident or abnormal power shutdown, the system also
must conduct a back to reference point operation, otherwise it may cause failure.
2. When the system is configured to absolute encoder motor, the system does not need to return back to the
reference point. The system will read coordinates from drive upon startup. If it reads successfully then the
returning back zero mark is valid.
3.5.6 Automatic Centering Function:
This system has automatic centering function. It can determine the midpoint of a straight line (parallel
to the coordinate axis) on G17 plane under the workpiece coordinate system by two points, and determine
the center of a circle by three points. This function is mainly used for setting up the zero point of workpiece
coordinate system. The operation method is as follows:
Illustration 1 Illustration 2
Figure 3.49
To determine the midpoint of a straight line by two points (as shown in Illustration 1):
Firstly select the workpiece coordinate system, then move the coordinates to A point, and press the C
key to show pop-up dialog as shown in Figure 3.50.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 3.50
After input 1, press Enter to determine the coordinate of point P1 , then move the coordinate to point B,
press C key to show pop-up dialog as shown in Figure 3.51 (Please note that the "Set Point" has been set as
point P1).
Figure 3.51
After input 2, press Enter to determine the coordinate of point P2 , then press C key to show pop-up
dialog as shown in Figure 3.52 (Please note that the "Set Point" has been set as point P1,P2).
Figure 3.52
At this time, input X (straight line paralleling to the X axis) then press Enter, the system automatically
set the zero point of X axis in current workpiece coordinate system as the midpoint of the line. The
coordinate value of the current X axis is set to an offset value, taking zero point of X axis in the workpiece
coordinate system as a benchmark.
To determine the center of a circle by three points (as shown in Illustration 2):
Firstly select the workpiece coordinate system, then move the coordinates to A point, and press the C
key to show pop-up dialog as shown in Figure 3.87.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 26
User Manual
Figure 3.53
After input 1, press Enter to determine the coordinate of point P1 , then move the coordinate to point B,
press C key to show pop-up dialog as shown in the figure (Please note that the "Set Point" has been set as
point P1).
Figure 3.54
After input 2, press Enter to determine the coordinate of point P2 , then move the coordinate to point
C, press C key to show pop-up dialog as shown in the figure (Please note that the "Set Point" has been set as
point P1 and P2).
Figure 3.55
After input 3, press Enter to determine the coordinate of point P3 , then press C key to show pop-up
dialog as shown in the figure (Please note that the "Set Point" has been set as point P1 , P2 and P3).

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
At this time, input R, then press Enter, the system automatically set the zero point of X and Y axis in
current workpiece coordinate system as the center of circle. The coordinate values of the current X and Y
axis are set to an offset value, taking zero point of the workpiece coordinate system as a benchmark.
Note: 1. To cancel the operation during any of the above steps, input 0 in the dialog and press Enter.
2. The operation is to set up the zero points of X and Y axis for the workpiece coordinate system, thus it shall not be
operated under the machine tool coordinate system.
3.5.7 Return to Workpiece Coordinate G17 Plane Zero with One Key:
For the convenience of operation, this system can realize returning the current workpiece coordinate
G17 plane (X and Y axis) zero with one key, as follows:
Under the workpiece coordinate system in manual mode, press the Home button to show the dialog as
shown in the figure below:
Figure 3.57
In Figure 3.57, after pressing Enter, the X and Y axis will be returned to the zero point of the workpiece
coordinate system with speed G00.
Special Attention: During returning to zero with one key, the Z axis must be placed in the place that
spindle and worktable, namely the objects of the surface, are not interfering with each
other, otherwise accident may occur.
3.5.8 "Reset" Key Setting.
The reset operation is a soft reset. It is used for performing the following operations:
Stopping the current running program; stopping spindle, cooling down, and lubricate; clearing the
positive and negative hard limit M16~M25 for XYZAB; clearing the driving alarm and lubrication and
cooling alarm M32~M36, M39, M44~M47 for XYZAB; clearing customized alarm M80~M95; clearing
machine tool exception M12, prohibiting program M03, prohibiting feeding M00, and clearing prohibiting
feeding axis M128~M132.
3.5.9 Following Operations Can Be Made in Manual Mode:
1）Manual spindle state control:
Press to start the spindle in clockwise rotation, displaying M03.
Press to start the spindle in counterclockwise rotation, displaying M04.
Press to stop the spindle, displaying M05. When the spindle stops, press it for one time to power
up the spindle motor, and press it again to power down the spindle motor.
Press to jog the spindle in clockwise rotation, displaying M03.
Press to jog the spindle in counterclockwise rotation, displaying M04.

2） Manual coolant state control:
Press to switch the coolant from a closed state (M09) to open state (M08). If the coolant
3) Manual fixture control
Press to loosen or tighten the tool. Press down to loosen, and lift to tighten the tool.
4) Manual tool magazine rotation control

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 28
User Manual
Press to rotate tool magazine for selecting the tool position in tool seat.
5) Lubrication switch
Press to switch the lubricant from a closed state to open state. If the lubricant is in open state,
press it to close.
6) Feed speed adjustment control:
Feed speed adjustment ratio is controlled by range switch or key. Rotate clockwise one scale or press
"+" key to increase 10% ratio, and rotate counterclockwise one scale or press "-" key to decrease 10%.
There are 16 scales from a range of 5%~150%. Adjustment value is displayed on spindle rotational speed
bar as shown in Figure 3.58:
Figure 3.58
7）Spindle speed adjustment control:

Spindle speed adjustment ratio is controlled by range switch or key. Rotate clockwise one scale or
press "+" key to increase 10% ratio, and rotate counterclockwise one scale or press "-" key to decrease 10%.
There are 16 scales from a range of 5%~150%. Adjustment value is displayed on feed speed bar as shown
in Figure 3.59:
Figure 3.59
8) Press the "Stop" button: To stop the current manual operation.
9) Press "F" button, dialog box pops up for modifying the manual feed speed to set the running speed
of each axis in manual mode. As shown in Figure 3.60:
Figure 3.60 Modify the Manual Feed Speed

10) Press "S" button, dialog box pops up for modifying the manual spindle rotational speed to set the
rotational speed of the spindle in manual mode. As shown in figure below:
Figure 3.61 Modify Manual Spindle Rotation Speed

11) Press "Tool Setting Base Point" to set tool setting base point with tool length compensation.
Usually the first tool will be set during tool setting. As shown in figure below:
Figure 3.62 Setting of Tool Setting Base Point with Tool Length Compensation
12) Press "Tool Setting" to automatically calculate and save tool length compensation value. Set
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
difference of every tool at length direction to compensate base point, by pressing the up and down keys to
input compensation value to H1 - H4. As shown in figure below:
Figure 3.62
3.6 Automatic
Press "Automatic" key on the panel to enter automatic mode. During automatic running, the system
will compile the current program. If there is any error in the program, the system will show the error
message. Press the soft key to enter program management.
Press "Run" button: To execute the program.
Press the "Stop" button: If the program is in continuous running, press once is to pause the program,
and during the pause press "Stop" again to stop immediately. At this time, press "Run" to continue to run. If
the program is in step running, press it once to stop the program.
Note: After the program complete or go into manual mode, the current spindle rotational speed will be
switched to manual spindle rotational speed.
3.6.1 Coordinates
The operation status of coordinate is to track and display the processing track with coordinates. It
shows the current position of a tool. There are two coordinate status: Workpiece coordinate display mode
and comprehensive coordinate display mode. Two coordinate modes can be switched by pressing "Alt" or
"Display Switch" (F3). Comprehensive coordinate interface is as follows:
Figure 3.64 Comprehensive Coordinate Interface

Four coordinate systems including relative coordinates, workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates,
and remaining coordinates are shown in comprehensive coordinates interface. Additionally, SP, S, F, L, R
values are shown. SP stands for spindle angle. S stands for the actual rotational speed of the spindle. F
stands for the command speed of each axis. L stands for the length compensation value of current tool. R
stands for radius compensation value of current tool.
3.6.2 Drawing
Drawing mode is to track and display the processing track with graphics. The system will
automatically calculate the maximum display effort for different processing programs and different starting
points of processing. The operator can use the cursor keys to move and rotate the graphics, and the PgUp

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 30
User Manual
and PgDn to zoom in or out the graphics, the cursor key to rotate the graphics. The system will
automatically save the current state of the graphics. Press the "HOME" key to return to the initial state of
the graphics. Press "X, Y, Z, Alt" keys to choose plane XOY, YOZ, and ZOX respectively, or three-dimensional
graphics display mode. And, the entire tool track drawing can be previewed prior to processing.
Coordinates/graphics can be switched when the program running, paused, or stopped.
3.6.3 Continuous
Continuous running status refers to that the program is continuously executed one segment line after
another by pressing "Run" button.
3.6.4 Single Segment
Single Segment mode means that the program will be paused after the running of the current line, and
waiting for keystroke. Single segment/continuous mode can be switched when the program is running,
paused, and stopped. Press , or press "Single Segment" (F1), and "Continuous" (F2) to switch between
single segment and continuous mode.
3.6.5 Simulation
In the automatic interface, press "Simulation" (F6) to enter simulation mode, in which the program
simulates the tracking of the tool center with track drawings or coordinates. All the mechanical actions
(including machine tool feeding and auxiliary functions) will not be performed during simulation mode.
After pressing "Run" button, the automatic real-time dynamics will display the current actual shape of
workpiece, and the workpiece is free to rotate, zoom in and out and track graphics mode and the coordinate
mode can be switched with each other.
3.6.6 Keep Feeding
When the program is paused during automatic continuous mode or the program is stopped during
single segment mode, press "Manual" softy to enter manual mode for operations such as manual
continuous, manual incremental, and manual pulse. After cancelled the "Manual", press "Run", the system
will automatically return to the breakpoint of the program with default speed G01/G02/G03 specified in
parameter "Speed", and then continue the program. The return order for axes is: If Z axis is moving toward
positive direction, then Z axis will be returned at first. If Z axis is moving toward negative direction, then
the Z axis will be returned at the last. Other axes will be returned with the order X->Y->A axis.
3.6.7 Handwheel Triggering for Automatic Operation
When running the program, the first machining parts is for trial. The parts can be processed by
triggering manual pulse generator for safety. Real-time control can be made for each axis.
In Automatic Mode, press F8 (Handwheel Simulation) to enter into handwheel processing mode. When
rotating the handwheel, the machine tools processes according to the program. When the handwheel is
stopped rotating, the feeding is also stopped. Rotate the handwheel for processing again.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 3.66 Handwheel Operation Mode

To exit manual pulse trigger mode, press F8 (Handwheel Simulation) to exit handwheel operation. To
exit the program running, press twice the ESC to show following dialog, and press Enter to exit.
Figure 3.68 Exit Program Run

Attention: In the automatic operation mode of handwheel, the handwheel is only used for triggering. The
running speed of each axis is determined by the program itself.
3.6.8 DNC Function
In the system, the user storage space is 100M. When the processing program is more than 32M or free
storage space is less than the size of the program, DNC function is needed for processing. In this system, the
DNC function can be realized by using RS232 and USB interface.
Description of RS232-DNC:
1. connect the computer to the system with a dedicated communication cable, and set up
corresponding communication interface and rate on the system.
2. Run the dedicated communication software for the system on the PC to set up
corresponding communication interface and rate. Click the "Send CNC program files",
and choose the processing program files for online processing to send the program.
3, Go to the program files directory interface in the CNC system, press the "D" key to enter
the online processing state. At this time, "RS232-DNC" will be displayed on the upper right
corner of the interface, as shown in Figure 3.69. In the automatic mode, press run button for
on-line processing.
Figure 3.69
Note: To stop the system in the process of online processing, just press the Stop key.
To cancel online processing state: Enter to program file directory, elect the system program files to be
executed, and press F7 to cancel the online processing state.
Attention: 1. When using serial port to send files, the baud rate is dependent on the
operating environment (communication cable length, the onsite
environment). In order to improve reliability, it is recommended to use a
medium frequency (no higher than 38400).
2. Communication cable length shall not be more than 10 meters, and 、
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 32
User Manual
communication isolation plate shall be used.
3. The dedicated communication software shall be used on user's PC to
transmit the programs. Special attention should be paid that the
transmission rate of the PC and CNC system shall be consistent, otherwise it
is unable to transfer.
4. Communication software is in the attached CD. Directly copy it to
computer's
hard drive to run. There is no need to install.
Description of USB-DNC:
USB-DNC is realized through USB flash drive which is plugged in the system, and from which the
program is selected for execution.
open the USB flash drive under the program interface, select the corresponding program, and press the
program execution soft key to return to the automatic mode, and press Run to execute the program.
Attention: Please do not unplug the USB flash drive during USB-DNC or failure of processing will happen.
After the completion of the USB-DNC, return from the USB interface to system program
interface.
3.7 MDI Mode

Pressing down "MDI" key on the panel, MDI dialog pops out, as shown below:
Figure 3.70
Enter the code as required, and press "Run" button. The system will immediately execute the program.
To pause an MDI program, use "Pause" button. Press the ESC key to exit the MDI function.
Attention: When using MDI function, if there is no G53, G54-G59, G54.1-G54.48 in the MDI program code,
it means that the MDI program is running in the current workpiece coordinate system (G53,
G54-G59, G54.1-G54.48).
For example: given the current coordinate system is G55:
After input X50Z67F400 in the MDI dialog, press run, then the system will move to coordinate point
X50Z67 in the workpiece coordinate system G55 at the speed of F400.
3.8 Running Program from an Actual Line

The System has a function to run a program from a certain line. Under main interface, press the "N"
key to show a dialog box, and enter in the edit box the actual starting line number. Then press Enter to
confirm. The cursor will go to the previous line of the starting line. When pressing the Run button, it
executes from the input actual line number. Press the "ESC" key to return to the beginning of the program.
Note: When processing from actual line number, the default line number is the line number of the last paused program
line. It is convenient for user.
Special Attention: The line number is the actual line number of the program instead of the line

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
number
specified by N address mark. System runs to the starting position of the specified line automatically
with the default speed G01/G02/ G03 in "Speed" parameter, and then runs the program
normally.
3.9 Running Program from a Marked Line

The System has a function to run a program from a marked line. Under main interface, press the "M"
key to show a dialog box, and enter in the edit box the marked line number. Then press Enter to confirm.
The cursor will go to the previous line of the marked line. When pressing the Run button, it begins to run
from the input marked line. Press the "ESC" key to return to the beginning of the program.
Special Attention: The line number is the line number specified by the N address mark of the program.
It may
not be the actual line number. System runs to the starting position of the specified line automatically
with the
default speed G01/G02/ G03 in "Speed" parameter, and then runs the program normally.
3.10 Run from a Tool Number

The System has a function to run a program from a tool. Under main interface, press the "G" key to
show a dialog box, and enter in the edit box the starting tool number. Then press Enter to confirm. The
cursor will go to the previous line of the line at which current tool is. When pressing the Run button, it
begins to run from the line at which the input tool number is located. Press the "ESC" key to return to the
beginning of the program.
Attention: System runs to the starting position of the specified line automatically with the default speed
G01/G02/ G03 in "Speed" parameter, and then runs the program normally.
3.11 Set Coordinates/Select Coordinates

Select coordinate system:
Under manual or automatic interface, press "Select coordinate" (F8) soft key to show following dialog.
Enter 53 in the dialog for G53 coordinate system, and enter 54 for G54 coordinate system. Enter 53~59 for
G53~G59 coordinate system, and enter 54.1~54.48 for G54.1~G54.48 coordinate system. And then press
"Enter" to confirm. The corresponding coordinate system state is displayed in the G code display area in the
upper right corner of the system interface, as shown in below:
Figure 3.71 Select Coordinate System Dialog
Figure 3.72
Set coordinates:
It is used for setting the value of the workpiece coordinates or relative coordinates. The workpiece
coordinates can be set under workpiece coordinates display mode, and the relative coordinates can be set
under comprehensive coordinates display mode. The relative coordinates can also be set while the program
is running. Pressing "Set coordinates" to complete the operation in corresponding interface as prompt, as

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 34
User Manual
shown in figure below.
Figure 3.73 Graphic Display for Setting G54 Coordinate System

Under the workpiece coordinate display mode, set the coordinate values of G54 workpiece coordinate
system. Press up and down arrow key to select which axis to be set.
Under the comprehensive coordinate display mode, set the coordinate values of the relative coordinate
system as shown in Figure 3.74 below. Press up and down arrow key to select which axis to be set.
Figure 3.74 Set Relative Coordinate System

Attention: Machine tool coordinates (G53) shall not be set.
3.12 High Volume Mold Processing Program

Because this system uses a 100MB flash memory device, the length of CNC program is unlimited,
especially suitable for mold processing. Except for cycle commands such as G22, other commands can be
used for program that exceeds 3000 segments. The system will dynamically preload and process 1000
segments of program for scheduling while the program is running, and in this way the processing progress
is in succession.
For high volume program with more than 600000 segments, it'd better to press "C" in "Program"
interface to "compile" the program and to check if there is any grammatical errors in the program prior to
the first running of the program.
Attention: In the system program file editor can only open a maximum of 600000 line. If a program file has
more than 600000 lines, the program editor cannot compile and save the file, otherwise the part
after 600000 lines will be lost.
3.13 Tool Changing and Tool Setting

When the machine tool is configured with ATC, tool changing and tool setting are involved.
Attention: Prior to use the ATC, set parameter to determine the type of ATC and the related parameters that
matches the machine tool, such as: Spindle orientation, tool change point location and so on.
3.13.1 Operation of ATC Action

For machine tool with ATC, the custom K key has following definitions:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
K3 to set the number of current tool seat;
K4 is spindle orientation (K4 indicator on at the completion of spindle orientation);
K5 is Z axis return to tool change point (K5 indicator on at the completion of returning to tool change
point).
K8 to power down the spindle and feed. (K8 indicator off when spindle and feed drive power is turned
off)
The definition of M command for turning type ATC:
Custom M code:
M41 is tool seat down.
M43 is tool seat up;
M36 for tool changing at single segment running. Run one step at each operation; (i.e., single step
operation at tool changing actions such as tool seat down, spindle manual fix tool, tool switching, spindle
manual return to base point, tool seat up).
M57 is spindle manual rotate on step with any condition.
Special Attention:
1. M57 command does not check condition. Please pay special attention during use, otherwise may
cause safety accidents.
The definition of M command for carousel ATC:
M41 for ATC forward;
M43 for ATC backward;
2. When using M41 for ATC forward, note to check the location of Z axis in order to avoid accidents.
3.13.2 Tool Change
Special Attention: Prior to execute tool change command, the action of retiring to base point of
machine tool
must be made, otherwise it may cause accident.
Tool change for turning type ATC:
M06：To change the tool on the current tool seat to the spindle.
M06 Txx ：To change the tool on the current tool seat to the spindle, and turn the Txx in the command
to the current tool change position for next tool change.(Changing the tool before selecting the tool)
M16 Txx ：To turn Txx to the current tool change position, and then change the tool of the current tool
seat to the spindle. (Changing the tool before selecting the tool, i.e. change the Txx tool to the spindle)
Tool change for carousel ATC:
Txx ： To change the Txx tool in the command to the spindle (Return the tool on the spindle to the
corresponding tool seat at first, and then change Txx to the spindle. If T00 is on the spindle, then directly
change Txx to the spindle).
Note: Supersynchronous drive for positioning may be configured to synchronize spindle orientation and the action of
returning coordinate axis to tool change point prior to the tool change.
3.13.3 Tool Setting
After using multiple tools in the same processing program, tool setting must be made. The tool setting
means that the system automatically establishes difference of length (Z axis dimension) between tools so as
to compensate during automatic tool change.
Note to tool setting: Under the main interface and the system is in manual mode, press "Base point for
tool setting" to set the base point for tool setting, and the system will take the current Z axis coordinate as
the base point. After changed the tool, press "Tool setting" to automatically memorize the tool setting, that
is to say, after operation as prompted, the system will automatically take the difference between Z axis
coordinate and the base point as the corresponding length compensation value of the corresponding tool,
and store it in the system as length compensation for corresponding tool. If there is any tool setting error
after comparing with the processing dimension, length compensation can be adjusted to settle it.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 36
User Manual
For example: Now there are three tools T01, T02, and T03 to be set.
Steps: 1. Change T01 tool to the spindle, and start the spindle. In manual mode, move Z axis to make the
tool to approach the surface of the workpiece (assuming the current coordinate value is -150) as shown in
Figure 3.75. At this time, press "Tool setting base point" to set the workpiece surface as the base point for
tool setting (that is to say, taking the coordinate value -150 as the base point for tool setting).At the same
time, the parameter H1 of length compensation of T01 will be automatically set to 0 by the system.
Figure 3.75
2. Stop the spindle, and change to tool T02, and start the spindle. In manual mode, move Z axis to make
the tool to approach the surface of the workpiece (assuming the current coordinate value is -135 as shown
in Figure 3.76. Press "Tool Setting" and make operation as required to automatically set the tool with the
memory). The parameter Hx of length compensation of T02 will be automatically set to 15 (-135~-150) by
the system.
Note: Hx refers to any one from H1~H4, which is determined by selection after pressing "Tool Setting". It is usually H1.
Figure 3.76
3. Stop the spindle, and change to tool T03, and start the spindle. In manual mode, move Z axis to make
the tool to approach the surface of the workpiece (assuming the current coordinate value is -165 as shown
in Figure 3.77. Press "Tool Setting" and make operation as required to automatically set the tool with the
memory). The parameter Hx of length compensation of T03 will be automatically set to -15 (-165~-150) by
the system.
Note: Hx refers to any one from H1~H4, which is determined by selection after pressing "Tool Setting". It is usually H1.
Figure 3.77
4. Completion of tool setting.
Special Attention: After setting the tool, the system will automatically memorize the length
compensation. Length compensation command shall be used for compensation during the
processing.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
3.14 Exit the System

To exit the system after the operation is completed, follow these steps: Under interfaces other than
"Automatic"→press " " key→press "Enter" to confirm→Exit the system.
Attention: 1, If you do not exit the system according to the above steps, it is a non-normal exit which will
cause
loss of current coordinates. Failure may be caused at next start.
2, After each startup, the system must conduct a back to reference point operation to ensure the
processing precision of the machine tool. After startup due to accident or abnormal power
shutdown, the system also must conduct a back to reference point operation, otherwise it
may cause failure.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 38
User Manual
Chapter 4 Programming
Programming is a process to describe the process path, and its auxiliary actions according to the
drawings and the requirements of processing technology with the language of CNC system.
4.1 Basic Concepts

Program segment: (program line) it is a full command line composed of commands and data.
Program: a set of program segments organized according to the logic structure of processing for
processing the workpiece.
Machine tool coordinate system: a coordinate system established with the zero point of the machine
tool as origin. Miller coordinate axes and its direction follow the provisions of "ISO841". The basic method
for determining stipulated in the standard, namely: the Cartesian coordinates determined by the right-hand
rule is the standard coordinates for programming. for the machine tools on which the tools are rotated
(such as miller), Z axis is parallel to the spindle, X axis is usually horizontal and parallel to workpiece fixing
surface, Y axis is determined by right-hand rule, A axis is rotating axis or auxiliary axis paralleling to X axis,
B axis is rotating axis or auxiliary axis paralleling to Y axis, and C axis is rotating axis or auxiliary axis
paralleling to Z axis. The direction in which the movement of each axis increases the dimension of
workpiece is the positive direction for each axis. When workpiece coordinate system is not set, the machine
tool coordinate system is used as the workpiece coordinate system.
Figure 4.1 Machine Tool Coordinate Axes and the Directions

Workpiece coordinate system: The coordinate system used in machining is known as the workpiece
coordinate system, which is set by CNC in advance. The workpiece coordinate system can be changed by
moving its origin.
The workpiece coordinate system can be set up by using one of three ways:
1. Using G92
Assign a value after the G92 in the program to set workpiece coordinate system.
2. Automatic setting
When performing a manual return to reference point, machine tool coordinate system is automatically
set as the workpiece coordinate system.
3. Using G54 to G59
Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set by using the coordinate system in parameter settings.
The above method must be used during the establishment of the workpiece coordinate system with
absolute value command
Local coordinate system: When programming in the workpiece coordinate system, a child coordinate
system can be set up for the workpiece coordinate system for the ease of programming. Such child
coordinate system is called the local coordinate system.
Absolute programming: A programming method for the coordinate data that is determined by the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
established absolute coordinate system as reference. It is set by using "G90".
Relative programming (incremental program): Refers to the distance and direction from the end point
to the starting point of the operation. It is set by using "G91".
Modal command: Refers to the commands that have reserved function in program. It is not only works
in the program line, but also works in the program lines behind. It will works until other modal command
in its group replaced it.
Multiple modal commands may be present in the same operation type, such as M03 (clockwise
rotation of spindle), M04 (counterclockwise rotation of spindle), M05 (spindle stop), which are modal and
used for controlling the spindle, and the modal commands with same type are categorized in one modal
group in command system. Only one of them can be used at any time. And there must be one of them, so
that there is an initial state. The modal command selected initially is called modal initial state. For example,
in above modal group, the modal initial state is M05.
Suspend mode (breaking mode): Refers to the commands which can change modal commands to
modal initial state or break the modal. Such as M20 (program end command) meaning the end of the run,
and return back to the start state, and change all modal commands to modal initial state.
Non-modal command: Refers to the commands which does not have reserved function and only works
in it program line.
4.2 General Expression of Program

％04，N04，G02，T02，H02，D02，M02，S04，F04，X-043，Y-043，Z-043，A-043，I-043，J-043，
K-043，L04，P4，R043。
Note 1: Address identifier followed by a "-", meaning the data can be used with "-" symbol (positive
symbol is omitted).
Note 2: 0 before number indicating the data can be written by only valid data bit.
Note 3: Number represents digit. When it is two digits, the high-order digit indicates the maximum
digit of the integral number, and low-order digit indicates the maximum digit behind decimal point.
4.3 Description of Program commands

4.3.1 The Function and Meaning of Address Identifier and Data Range
Function Address Identifier Meaning Data Range
The file name of the processing
File No. ％ 0-9、A-Z
file
The serial number of the program
Program segment No. N 0000-9999
segment
Specify the content and method of
Preparation function G 00-999
the command execution
Auxiliary function M Auxiliary operation command 00-9999
Cutting tool selection T The tool No., 01-99

The serial number of the length
Tool compensation HD compensation, radius 1- 4
compensation parameters
Spindle rotation speed; spindle
Spindle function S SP 00-99999
positioning
0.01-20000mm/m
Cutting speed F Specify cutting speed per minute
in
X Y Z A Respectively coordinate values of
Coordinate 99999.999mm
（B/C/U/V/W） X, Y, Z, and the fourth axes
Coordinates of center of Respectively incremental values
IJK 99999.999mm
circle of center of X, Y, and Z axes

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 40
User Manual
Stepping length R Arc radius 0.001-999.999mm
Delay time P Specify the delay time 0.001-999.999s

The entrance program file name
Program entrance P 0000-9999
which is called
Specify the number of cycles or
The number of repeats L number of calls of the 1-9999
subprogram
4.3.2 G, M Function commands:
Table 1 G command Code and Function
G-code groups function
G00 Positioning(rapid traverse)
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 01 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G33 Threading
G04 00 Dwell
G05 3-Point Arc Interpolation
G06 3D Arc command G06X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ F__
G15 Polar coordinates command cancel
17
G16 Polar coordinates command:
G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp:Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp:Z axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 Input in inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G28/G281/
Automatic return to reference position
G282/G283
G30/G301/
2nd ,3rd ,4th reference position return
G302/G303
G26 ZXY axes return to program original point
G261 X axis return to program initial point
G262 Y axis return to program initial point
G263 Z axis return to program initial point
G264 00 A axis return to program initial point
G265 B axis return to program initial point
G25 Memorize current point coordinate X,Y,Z
G61 Return to G25 memorized point coordinate X,Y,Z
G611 Return to G25 memorized point coordinate X
G612 Return to G25 memorized point coordinate Y
G613 Return to G25 memorized point coordinate Z
G614 Return to G25 memorized point coordinate 4th-axis
G615 Return to G25 memorized point coordinate 5th-axis
G40 Cancel tool radius compensation
G41 07 Cutter radius compensation: left
G42 Cutter radius compensation: right
G43 Tool length compensation+
08
G44 Tool length compensation-
G45 Tool offset : increase
G46 00 Tool offset : decrease
G47 Tool offset : double increase

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
G48 Tool offset : double decrease
G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G37 Scaling cancel
11
G36 Scaling
G12 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G11 programmable mirror image
G52 00 Local coordinate system setting
G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G56 14 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
G60 Accurate positioning
15
G64 Continual path working
G68 Coordinate system rotation mode on
16
G69 Coordinate system rotation mode off
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Left-handed tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
Canned cycle cancel
G80
External operated function cancel
Drilling cycle or boring cycle
G81
09 External operation function
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 Incremental programming
G92 00 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed
G94 Feed per minute
05
G95 Feed per revolution
G98 Canned cycle: return to initial level
10
G99 Canned cycle: return to R point level
G22 Program cycle command
19
G800 Program cycle command cancel
G65 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G101—G170 12 70 user-defined macros
G102 Circular Porous drilling cycle
G103 Circular Porous right-handed tapping cycle
G104 Circular Porous left-handed tapping drilling cycle
Table 2 M Codes and Functions
M Codes Description of Functions
M02 End of the program, automatic running stops (default is M02).

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 42
User Manual
M30 End of the program, shut down spindle and cooling.
M00 Pause program, press run to continue.
End of the program, automatically repeat the program according to the number of
runs set by parameter for the burn-in of the machine.
When using M20 command to make the program to run automatically in cycle for n
times:
M20
If the program line starts with symbol [, it will be executed during the first
execution of the program, otherwise it will not be executed.
If the program line starts with symbol ], it will be executed during the last
execution of the program, otherwise it will not be executed.
M03 Spindle is started up with clockwise rotation
M04 Spindle is started up with counterclockwise rotation.
M05 Shut down the spindle
M06/M16 Tool change
M08 Open coolant
M09 Close coolant
M10 Tighten the tool
M11 Loosen the tool
M24 Blowing off
M25 Blowing on
M32 Open the lubrication
M33 Close the lubrication
M41 User-defined on
M42 User-defined off
M43 User-defined on
M45 User-defined on
M47 User-defined on
M49 User-defined on
M51 User-defined on
M53 User-defined on
M55 User-defined on
M57 User-defined on
M61 Spindle high (first) gear switch
M62 Spindle low (second) gear switch
M63 Spindle third gear switch
M64 Spindle fourth gear switch
M65 Spindle switched to the 5th gear
M97 P Unconditional jump to the line number specified by P; P4 indicates the entrance line
number using 4 fields of number designation program transferring main program.
M98 P Unconditional call subprogram command. Any number of characters (less than 100)
of P field. Specify the path and name of subprogram called by the program.
M99 In main program, M99 without P command is equivalent to M02, and equivalent to
M97 when being with P command. That is to say, M99 and M02 have the same
function. M99P_ and M97P_ have the same function to jump to the marked line
number specified by P.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
M880-M889 ProgramUser0—ProgramUser9：:
User-defined control programs: ProgramUser0—ProgramUser9
M317 Reset the workpiece coordinates of X axis
M318 Reset the workpiece coordinates of Y axis
M319 Reset the workpiece coordinates of Z axis
M320 Reset all the workpiece coordinates of X, Y, Z, A, B axis
M417 Reset the machine tool coordinates of X axis
M418 Reset the machine tool coordinates of Y axis
M419 Reset the machine tool coordinates of Z axis
M420 Reset all the machine tool coordinates of X, Y, Z, A, B axis
4.3.3 F Function
The cutting feed speed of the system is indicated by F field. It is modal. The actual running speed is
specified speed multiplied by speed adjustment ratio.
Feed speed for linear interpolation G01, and arc interpolation G02 and G03 is commanded by
numerical value behind F code. In cutting feed, the program segments are executed consecutively, so the
change of feed speed is minimum feed speed.
It can be specified in following two ways:
1. Feed per minute G94
Specify tool feed per minute (mm/min) after F.
2. Feed per revolution G95
Specify the tool feeding amount per revolution of the spindle (mm/rev) after F. After specified G94
(feeding way per minute), the feeding amount of the tool per minute is directly specified by the numerical
value behind F.G94 is modal code. Once G94 is specified, it will be effective till G95 feed per revolution is
specified. When power on, set to feeding per minute.
Ratio can be applied to feed per minute by using switch on the panel of machine tool. The ratio is from
5% to 150% with an interval of 10%. Ratio cannot be applied to the thread cutting commands.
Figure 4.2 Feed per Minute

After specified G95 feed per revolution, the numerical value after F directly specifies the feeding
amount per revolution of tool on spindle.G95 is modal code. Once G95 is specified, it will be effective till
G94 feed per minute is specified. Ratio can be applied to feed per minute by using the switch on the
machine tool operation panel. The ratio is from 5% to 150% with an interval of 10%. Ratio cannot be
applied to the thread cutting commands. When the spindle speed is low, feed speed fluctuations may occur.
The lower spindle speed, the more frequently the feed speed fluctuations occur.
When axis parameter No. 101 is set to check spindle path, and axis parameter No. 100 is set with
encoder pulse, feeding amount per revolution is determined by the actual rotating speed of spindle.
Otherwise, feeding amount per revolution is determined according to the instructed rotating speed of
spindle.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 44
User Manual
Figure 4.3 Feeding Amount per Revolution

4.3.4 T/H/D Function:
The T/H/D function of this system is a modal function that calls parameter to compensate the tool
radius or length, and invoked with number in the program.
Among them, T01 to T99 are the number of tool. There are four edges for each tool. H1 to H4 is the
number of parameter of tool length compensation. D1 to D3 is the number of parameter of tool radius
compensation.
4.3.5 S Function:
S function controls the spindle speed. All the machine tools that are equipped with variable-frequency
governor for speed control of spindle can use this feature. In the program, S field is used for stepless speed
regulation. Providing 0~10V analog voltage control signal, S function is a modal command. When a value is
specified, code signal and the gating signal are sent to machine tool to control spindle rotation speed. The
speed of spindle can be directly specified by 5 digits value (r/min) at the most after address S.
4.4 Preparation Function

4.4.1 Coordinate System Setup command (G92)
It is used for setting the workpiece coordinate system.
command format: G92 X- Y- Z- (Modal upon set)
Description: G92 command does not make action, and is only used for setting the workpiece
coordinate system. The X, Y, and Z fields refer to the coordinates of the point on the tool (such as tool nose)
in the specified workpiece coordinate system. If G92 is used for setting coordinate system during tool
length offset, coordinates without offset will be used for setting the tool radius compensation being
temporarily deleted by G92.
Example:
Figure 4.4
Example 3 N0000 G92 X65.2 Y100 Z28
It means to establish workpiece coordinate system, and current coordinates of X＝65.2, Y＝100, Z＝28.
4.4.2 commands for Selecting Coordinate
System(G53/G54/G55/G56/G57/G58/G59/G54.1～G54.48）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Used for selecting the workpiece coordinate system, or machine tool coordinate system.
command format:
G53（G54/G55/G56/G57/G58/G59/G54.1～G54.48）(modal after setting)
G53 machine tool coordinate system
G54 workpiece coordinate system 1
G54.1~G54.48 48 additional workpiece coordinate systems.
G53 machine tool coordinate system is the coordinate system determined by the first reference point
of machine tool (that is, the machine zero point). The coordinates of the first reference point in the machine
tool coordinate system can be set in the reference point parameter. If the coordinates are changed, manual
return to reference point shall be made. G53 is the default coordinate system.
Offset of workpiece coordinate systems G54/G55/G56/G57/G58/G59/ G54.1～G54.48 in the machine
tool coordinate system are determined by the settings in coordinate system parameters.
Example 1:
G01 X34
G54 X78
The first section means to move to the coordinate point X34 of the machine tool coordinate system
along straight line G01, and the second section means to move to coordinate point X78 of the workpiece
coordinate system G54 along straight line G01.
Example 2:
G01 G56 Y64
G57
G00 Z178
The first section means to the coordinate point Y64 of the workpiece coordinate system G56 along
straight line G01, and the second section means to select workpiece coordinate system G57, while the third
section means to move to coordinate point Z178 of the workpiece coordinate system G57 along straight line
G00. Example:
Figure 4.5
4.4.3 Local Coordinate System command (G52)
When programming in the workpiece coordinate system, a child coordinate system can be set up for
the workpiece coordinate system for the ease of programming. Such child coordinate system is called the
local coordinate system.
command format: G52 X- Y- Z-; Setting the local coordinate system.
(modal after setting)
G52 U- V- W- ; Specify the origin of local coordinate
system in an incremental manner, i.e.
incremental offset at the origin of the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 46
User Manual
existing local coordinate system.
G52 X0（Y0 Z0）; To cancel local coordinate system.
command G52 can be used for setting local coordinate system in machine tool coordinate system (G53)
or the workpiece coordinate system (G54~G59). The origin of local coordinates is set on the position
specified by X- Y- Z- in the machine tool coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system.
When local coordinate system is set, the posterior movement with absolute value G90 command is
coordinate values in the local coordinate system. Using G52 to specify the new zero point can change the
location of the local coordinate system. In order to cancel the local coordinate system and specify
coordinate values in the workpiece coordinate system, the zero of the local coordinate system and the zero
of the workpiece coordinate system should be made consistent.
Local coordinate system does not change workpiece coordinate system and machine tool coordinate
system. When using G92 command to set workpiece coordinate system, if coordinate values of all axes are
not commanded, the local coordinate system of the axis without specified coordinate value will not be
cancelled and remain the same. After G52 program segment, movement command is specified in absolute
value manner.
Figure 4.6
For example: processing 5 same workpieces on one workpiece:
G22 L5
X50 Z60 ;Processing workpiece
......
G52 U-40V-40 ;Every time the XY axis relatively offset 40 mm
G800
G52 X0 Y0;To cancel local coordinate system
G0 Z100
M02
4.4.4 Programming command（G90/G91）
There are two ways to command the movement of the tool: The absolute value command and
incremental value command. In the absolute value command, program the coordinate value of the end
point, and in the incremental value command, program the movement distance. G90 and G91 are used
respectively for specifying absolute value programming or incremental value programming is used in
coordinate word.
command format:G90（modal, initial state）;Absolute coordinate programming.

G91（modal）; Incremental coordinate programming.
Example:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 4.7
In the above example: In the first line, G90 command specifies to use absolute value programming, and
the X axis moves to the absolute coordinate 40mm, and Y axis moves to absolute coordinate 70mm.
In the second line, G91 command specifies to use relative programming, indicating X axis moves 60mm
to negative direction from the current position , and Y axis move 40mm to positive direction.
4.4.5 plane Selection command （G17/G18/G19）
command format:G17（modal, initial state）; Specifies XY place
G18 （modal） ;Specifies ZX place
G19 （modal） ;Specifies YZ place
Example:
To specify plane for arc interpolation.
Description: This command does not produce movement.
4.4.6 Fast Positioning command （G00）
The tool moves with fast speed to the position in the workpiece coordinate system specified by
absolute value command or incremental value command.
To program the coordinate value of the end point with absolute value programming;
To program the distance of tool movement with incremental value programming.
command format: G00 X- Y- Z- A-（modal, initial state）
Description: X, Y, Z, A coordinate words indicating the operating axis. The data indicate the movement
amount and direction. Incremental programming or absolute programming can be used.
G00 runs positioning to the positioning point according to spatial line path.
Running speed calls the speed value in "Parameters".
Attention: When performing G00 command, the user parameter NO. 52 is to set G00 linkage straight axis is resultant
speed or each axis runs independently with G00 speed. If resultant speed, the resultant path is straight line,
and if independent run, the path is not linear.
4.4.7 Linear Interpolation command (G01)
Interpolation cutting for single axis or two, three, four axes linkage.
command format: G01 X- Y- Z- A- F-（modal）
Description: X, Y, Z, A refer to the running axis. The data indicate the feeding amount and direction.
Incremental programming or absolute programming can be used. Interpolation speed is specified by F field
in the program.
Tool moves to the specified position along straight line with the feeding speed specified by F. The
feeding speed specified by F is valid till there is a new speed is specified. There is no need to specify F for
each program segment. The feeding speed instructed by F code is measured by straight line path. If F code
does not instruct, the feeding speed will be deemed as zero.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 48
User Manual
The feeding speed of the axis of revolution is instructed by unit of degree/minute. When linear
interpolation is made to the straight axis (such as X, Y, or Z) and axis of revolution, the speed of F (mm/min)
is the tangent feeding speed in the rectangular coordinate system.
The acquisition of the feeding speed for axis of revolution: The necessary time is calculated and
assigned at first, and then the unit of axis feeding speed is changed to degree/minute.
4.4.8 Arc Interpolation command （G02/G03）
Arc interpolation cutting for G02 clockwise or G03 counterclockwise direction on specified plane.
Command format:：G17 ；XY plane（modal）
G18 ；ZX plane（modal）
G19 ；YZ plane（modal）
G177 ；XA plane（modal）
G188 ；ZA plane（modal）
G199 ；YA plane（modal）
Description: Interpolation plane must be explicit for arc interpolation, coordinate words X, Y, Z is the
end coordinates (incremental or absolute programming) of the arc, and I, J, K are incremental coordinates
from starting point to the center of the circle on X, Y, Z axis. That is to say, starting point is zero, circle in the
positive direction of the starting point is positive, and in the negative direction of the starting point is
negative. I, J, K are coordinates describing the center of circle. R programming can be used instead of I, J, K.
When the arc is larger than 180 degrees, R uses negative value, and for full circle, R programming cannot be
used.
The direction of the arc is set in the right-hand rectangular coordinate system from the positive
direction perpendicular to the circular interpolation plane to negative direction.
Clockwise or counterclockwise directions in different arc interpolation plane are shown as in Figure
4.8
Y X Z
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02
0 X 0 Z 0 Y
G17 G18 G19

Figure 4.8
For the center position of the arc specified by address I, J, K, the value after I, J, K is the vector
component from starting point to the center of arc. I, J, K must be specified as positive or negative according
to its direction. I, J, K may be omitted. When omitted, the end point is identical to the starting point, and the
center specified by I, J, K is a 360 degree full circle, and no matter it is G90 or G91, it is always represented
as incremental value as following:
Figure 4.9
Arc interpolation speed is specified by F field in the program.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Attention: I, J, K and R are non-modal commands.
G177/G188/G199 are plane selection commands, among them G177 selects XA plane; G188 selects ZA
plane; and G199 selects YA plane. G177/G188/G199 are modal commands. When A axis arc interpolation is
not used, G17 (or G18/G19) plane shall be returned to.
IJ is used for specifying center of circle in XA plane (I corresponds to X axis, and J corresponds to A
axis). KI is used for specifying the center of circle in ZA plane (K corresponds to Z axis, and I corresponds to
A axis). JK is used for specifying the center of circle in YA plane (J corresponds to Y axis, and K corresponds
to A axis). R can be used for specifying the radius for each plane. When the arc is larger than 180 degrees,
negative value is used for representing R, and R shall not be used for programming for full circle.
Clockwise or counterclockwise directions in different arc interpolation plane are shown as in figure
below
A A A
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02
0 X 0 Z 0 Y
G177 G188 G199
figure 4.10
Attention: 1. When using A axis arc interpolation command, A axis must be set up as straight axis.
2.When using A axis arc interpolation command, G41/G42 tool radius compensation cannot be used.
Example:
1) Absolute programming
N0000 G92 X200 Y40 Z0 Set up the absolute coordinates of the tool start point
N0010 G90 G03 X160 Y40 I-20 J0 Counterclockwise arc
N0020 G02 X120 Y40 R20 Clockwise arc
N0030 G02 X120 Y40 I20 J0 Full circle
N0040 G26 M02 Return to starting point and finish
2) Relative programming
N0000 G91 G17 G03 X-40 Y0 R20 Counterclockwise arc
F300
N0010 G02 X-40 Y0 R20 Clockwise arc
N0020 G02 X0 Y0 I20 J0 Full circle
N0030 G26 M02 Return to starting point and finish
Two programming methods have the same effect.
4.4.9 Helix Interpolation command （G02/G03）
Spiral-line interpolation in spiral movement can order 1 other axis of circular interpolation axes in
synchronous movement. command method is simply to add a moving axis other than circular interpolation
axis. F command specifies the feeding speed along the arc. Thus feeding speed of straight axis is:
Command format:
G17 ;XY plane, K specifies screw pitch (modal)
G18 ;ZX plane, J specifies screw pitch (modal)
G19 ;YZ plane, I specifies screw pitch (modal)
G177 ;XA plane, K specifies screw pitch (modal)
G188 ;ZA plane, J specifies screw pitch (modal)
G199 ;YA plane, I specifies screw pitch (modal)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 50
User Manual
Tool radius compensation is made only for arc. Tool offset and tool length compensation cannot not be
instructed in program segments that instruct spiral-line interpolation.
Example:
Figure 4.11
G90G17G54
G01X20Y0Z0F200
G03X0Y20R20Z15F150
……
Tool radius compensation is made only for arc. Tool offset and tool length compensation cannot not be
instructed in program segments that instruct spiral-line interpolation.
Figure 4.12
G54G0X50Y10Z0
G02X50Z0I-25K0Y-80J10F500
G0X60
Y20
M30
4.4.10 Delay commands（G04）
To delay a certain period of time for executing other actions for the purpose of processing technology
during processing.
command format: G04 P－
The unit of value after P is second, indicating the time length of delay. Time range is 0.001-999.999s
Example:
G92X0Y0Z0
M03S600
G90G01G43H01Z20F200
Z-10
G04P5
G49G0Z20
M05M30
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
4.4.11 Arc Interpolation G05 command:
command format:
G05 X(U)__ Z(W)__ I__ K__ F__ (when in G18 plane)
G05 X__ Y__ I__ J__ F__ (when in G17 plane)
G05 Y__ Z__ J__ K__ F__ (when in G19 plane)
Function of code: G5 function can be used if the center and the radius of the arc are unknown
but the coordinates of three points on the outline of the arc. The direction of the arc is determined
by the midpoint between the starting point and the end point.
Code description: G05 is modal G code.
I ： The relative coordinates value (X direction) of the midpoint of arc relate to the starting
point (indicated by radius value, with direction).
J: The relative coordinates value (Y direction, with direction) of the midpoint of arc relate to
the starting point
K: The relative coordinates value (Z direction, with direction) of the midpoint of arc relate to
the starting point
Figure 4.13
Attention: 1) Midpoint: Refers to any point on the circular arc other than the starting point and
end point.
2) When the given three points are collinear, the system will sound alarm.
3) If I is omitted, it deems that I=0, if K is omitted, it deems that K=0, and if J is omitted, it deems that J=0. If I,
J, and K are all omitted, the system will sound alarm.
4) I, J, and K are similar to the meaning of the displacement value I, J, and K of the center coordinates
relative to the starting point coordinates in G02/G03 code.
5) G05 cannot be used for processing full circle.
For example:
Figure 4.14
G54G0X-10Y-20Z30
M06T1
G42X0Y0G1F200
Z-1
X70
Y32
G05 X47Y55I-3.44J13.8F100
G01X10

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 52
User Manual
G05X0Y45I-8.93J-7.1
G01Y0
G40X-10Y-20
G0Z20
M30
4.4.12 Three-dimensional Space Circular Arc command G06
Function of code: Three-dimensional circular arc command G06 function can be used if the center and
radius of the three-dimensional arc are unknown, but coordinates of three points on the outline of the arc;
The direction of the arc can be determined by the position of the midpoint between the starting point
and the end point.
Command format
G06 X__ Y__ Z__ I__ J__ K__ F__ ；modal
I :The relative coordinates value of the midpoint of arc relate to the starting point (indicated by radius value of X
axis, with direction).
J : The relative coordinates value of the midpoint of arc relate to the starting point(Y axis, with direction).
K: The relative coordinates value of the midpoint of arc relate to the starting point(Z axis, with direction)
Attention:
1) Midpoint: Refers to any point on the circular arc other than the starting point and end point.
2) When the given three points are collinear, the system will sound alarm.
3) If I is omitted, it deems that I=0, if K is omitted, it deems that K=0, and if J is omitted, it deems that J=0. If I, J, and K are
all omitted, the system will sound alarm.
4) I, J, and K are similar to the meaning of the displacement value I, J, and K of the center coordinates relative to the
starting point coordinates in G02/G03 code.
5) G06 cannot be used for processing full circle.
Sample program:
G0 X10 Y28 Z10
G06 X30 Y98 Z10 I5 J-6 K-5
X130 Y198 Z120 I55 J-86 K-65
G0X0Z0
M02
4.4.13 Mirror Processing command (G11/G12)
It is used for machining symmetrical workpiece, decreasing the amount of programming.
command format:G11 X_ Y_（Z_ X_）（Y_ Z_）（modal）；Specify the symmetrical
feeding of straight line with XYZ.
G12（modal, initial state）；Cancel the mirror processing.
Description: Mirror processing made symmetrical feeding possible by changing axis feeding direction.
The axis whose direction will be changed is specified by the address identifier of the current interpolated
plane G17 (X_ Y_); G18 (Z_ X_); G19 (Y_ Z_). The value after X_, Y_, and Z_ is the coordinates under the
current workpiece coordinate system.
In programmable mirror mode, the returning to reference point commands G27, G28, G29 and G30 etc.,
and commands to change coordinate system G52 to G59, G92 etc. are not allowed to appear. If any one of
these G codes, it must be specified after programmable mirror mode is cancelled.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 4.15
Example for mirroring program
Subprogram
%9000
G00 G90 X60.0 Y60.0；
G01 X100.0 F100；
G01 Y100.0；
G01 X60.0 Y60.0；
M99；
Main program
N10 G00 G90；
N20 M98 P%9000；
N30 G11 X50.0
N40 M98 P%9000；
N50 G11 X50.0 Y50.0
N60 M98 P%9000；
N70 G11 Y50.0
N80 M98 P%9000；
N90 G12；
4.4.14 Scaling commands (G36/G37）
Shrink or enlarge the workpiece by the ratio when the processing program is not changed. The shape
of the programming is zoomed in and out (scaling). X_, Y_ and Z_ are used for specifying the center of scaling.
If an axis is not specified, scaling will not be performed to the axis. The value after X_, Y_, and Z_ is the
coordinates under the current workpiece coordinate system.
command format：G36 X_Y_Z_R_ （modal）；Perform scaling
G37（modal, initial state）；Cancellation of scaling
Description: The data after address identifier R is the ratio coefficient.
As shown in Figure 4.16, when P1', P2', P3', and P4' need to be enlarged to P1P2P3P4, R=P0P4'/P0P4.
When P1P2P3P4 need to shrink to P1', P2', P3', and P4', R=P0P4/P0P4'. That is: R<1 for enlarging the
graphics, and R>1 for shrinking the graphics. The default value is 1. Here it is:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 54
User Manual
Figure 4.16
Example:
Figure 4.17
Example for scaling program
Subprogram
D01
G54G90G0X0Y0Z50
G01Z-5F500
X100
Y50
X0
Y0
G0Z30
M99
Main program
N5 G54G90G0X0Y0Z50
N10 M03S800
N20 G36X50Y25R2
N30 M98 PD01
N40 G37
N50 M98 PD01
N60 G36X50Y25R0.5
N70 M98 PD01
N80 G37
N90 G0Z50
N100 M05
N110 M30
Scaling is invalid for the values of tool radius compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 4.18
4.4.15 Coordinate System Rotating commands (G68 / G69)
Programmed shape can be rotated. This rotating command can be used for rotating the workpiece by a
specific angle. In addition, if the shape of the workpiece is composed of many of the same graphics, the
graphics unit can be programmed into a subprogram, which can be called by rotating command in the main
program. Programming can be simplified in this way to save storage space.
Command format:
G68 X- Y- R- (modal); Performing coordinate system rotating
G68 Z- X- R- (modal); Performing coordinate system rotating
G68 Y- Z- R- (modal); Performing coordinate system rotating
G69(modal, initial state); Cancellation of coordinate system rotation
Description:
(G17)X-Y- or (G18) Z-X- or (G19) Y-Z- after G68 specify the center of rotation
The data after address identifier R is the angle of rotation. The value after X_, Y_, and Z_ is the
coordinates under the current workpiece coordinate system.
R is the angle of rotation with unit of "°". When R is positive value, it indicates counterclockwise
rotation. When R is negative value, it indicates clockwise rotation. Here it is:
Figure 4.19
Plane selection code (G17G18 or G19) shall be specified prior to the program segment of the rotation
code G68 of coordinate system. Plane selection code shall not be specified in the rotation mode of
coordinate system. The code G69 that cancels the rotation of coordinate system must be in an individual
program segment. The tool radius compensation, tool length compensation, tool offset and other
compensations shall be operated after the rotation of coordinate system.
In the rotation mode of coordinate system, G codes related to returning to reference point (G28, G30,
and so on) and G codes related to coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92, and so on) shall not be specified. If
these G coded are needed, they must be instructed after the rotation mode of coordinate system is cancelled.
The first movement command after the cancellation command of coordinate system rotation must be
specified with absolute value. If incremental value is used, there will be no correct movement.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 56
User Manual
Example 1:
Figure 4.20
N1 G92 X-500Y-500F2000 G17；
N2 G68 X700Y300R60；
N3 G90 G01 X0 Y0 F2000；
N4 G91 X1000
N5 G02 Y1000 R1000
N6 G03X-1000I-500J-500；
N7 G01Y-1000
N8 G69
G90 X-500Y-500
M02；
Example 2:
Figure 4.21
SS (Name of subprogram)
G01Z-5F150
G01G42D01X30F200
X80
Y30
X30Y0
G0G40X0Y0
Z20
M99
DD5 (main program)

G54G0X0Y0Z50
M98PSS

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
G68X0Y0R60
M98PSS
G68X0Y0R120
M98PSS
G68X0Y0R-135
M98PSS
G69
G0X0Y0Z50
M05
M30
4.4.16 Reference Point
commands(G28/G281/G282/G283/G30/G301/G302/G303/G304/G305）
Returning to reference point refers to the cutting tool moves to the reference point along the specified
axis automatically.
G28X-Y-Z-A-B-；ZXYAB axis return to the first reference point.
G281 ；Only X axis returns to the first reference point.
G282 ；Only Y axis returns to the first reference point.
G283 ；Only Z axis returns to the first reference point.
G284 ；The fourth axis returns to the first reference point.
G285 ；The fifth axis returns to the first reference point.
G30 P2 ；XYZAB axis return to the second reference point (P2 can be omitted).
G30 P3 ；XYZAB axis return to the third reference point
G30 P4 ；XYZAB axis return to the fourth reference point
G301 P2 ；Only X axis returns to the second reference point (P2 can be omitted).
G301 P3 ；Only X axis returns to the third reference point.
G301 P4 ；Only X axis returns to the fourth reference point.
G302 P2 ；Only Y axis returns to the second reference point(P2 can be omitted).
G302 P3 ；Only Y axis returns to the third reference point.
G302 P4 ；Only Y axis returns to the fourth reference point.
G303 P2 ；Only Z axis returns to the second reference point(P2 can be omitted).
G303 P3 ；Only Z axis returns to the third reference point.
G303 P4 ；Only Z axis returns to the fourth reference point.
G304 P2 ； The fourth axis returns to the second reference point(P2 can be
omitted).
G304 P3 ；The fourth axis returns to the third reference point.
G304 P4 ；The fourth axis returns to the fourth reference point.
G305 P2 ；The fifth axis returns to the second reference point(P2 can be omitted).
G305 P3 ；The fifth axis returns to the third reference point.
G305 P4 ；The fifth axis returns to the fourth reference point.
Description: Only when G28 command line has corresponding coordinate axis commands, the axis will
be back to zero. The sequence of returning to the first reference point G28 is Z->X->Y and related signal will
be detected: reference point switch, motor zero pulse, and so on.
For example:
G28 X12Y5 indicates that X and Y axis run to coordinate point X12Y5, and then X and Y axis return to
zero point. The sequence of returning to the zero shall be conform to the parameter value.
When returning to 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point G30, each axis returns as follows: If Z axis is
moving toward positive direction, then Z axis will be returned at first. If Z axis is moving toward negative
direction, then the Z axis will be returned at the last. Other axes will be returned with the order X->Y->A
axis.
Tool radius compensation and tool length compensation should be cleared prior to execute the
command.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 58
User Manual
4.4.17 Tool Length Compensation commands （G43/G44/G49）
This function can be used for compensating the difference between the length of the tool programmed
and the length of the tool that is actually in use without modifying the program. Use G43 or G44 to specify
offset direction. Select the tool length offset value with the input corresponding address number H code
from the offset table.
The following two methods of tool offset can be used according to the tool length offset axis:
Tool length offset A: To compensate tool length difference along the Z axis.
Tool length offset B: To compensate tool length difference along the X (G19) Y (G18) or Z (G17) axis.
Tool offset method can be set in comprehensive parameter NO. 4.
Command format:
G43 H－；Add a tool length compensation parameter value.
G44 H－；Subtract a tool length compensation parameter value.
G49 or H0 ；Cancellation of tool length compensation.
Description: Tool length compensation is to add or subtract tool length compensation parameter values,
which are called by H function, on the Z axis or other axis. Call number is H1 - H4. The compensation data in
the parameter takes the tool position without compensation as the starting point.
Here it is:
Figure 4.22
For example:
N0000 G43 H2 X10 (H2 value is 5)
N0010 G44 H3 X20 (H3 value is 10)
The tool extends for 5 during the execution of the first program, and retracts for 10 during the
execution of the second G44. G49 has no parameters, and returns to the position that is before the
compensation.
4.4.18 Increasing or Decreasing Tool Radius commands(G45/G46/G47/G48)
For the processing of workpiece such as grooves, the program shall be prepared according to the
dimension specified in the workpiece drawing, and one of the commands of this group shall be added to the
command line. In this way, products that conform to the dimension specified in drawings can be processed
when tool radius is different.
Command format:
G45 T- D- ；Add one tool offset.
G46 T- D- ；Subtract one tool offset.
G47 T- D- ；Add two tool offsets.
G48 T- D- ；Subtract two tool offsets.
Description: commands for adding and subtracting tool radius add or subtract one or two tool radius
parameter values that are called by T number during execution. They shall be used together with G00, G01,
G02, G03 commands on XY (G17), ZX (G18), YZ (G19) plane. It cannot be used with tool radius
compensation commands (G41, G42).
For G00 and G01, add or subtract one or two tool radius at the direction of the given axis.
For G02 and G03, add or subtract one or two tool radius at the direction of arc radius.
G45/G46/G47/G48 are non-modal commands.
For example, in Figure 4.23

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Y L 150 K
J
I H
60
60
120
C D
60 60
30
G
60
A B E F
F X
0
Figure 4.23
The program is as follows:
N0000 G01 Z-20 F400 G91 ；Tool plunges at Z
N0010 G46 T01 X55 Y55 D01 ；Position to A point. X and Y axis are subtracted one tool radius (T01)
N0020 G47 G01 X60 F200 ；Add two tool radius for A-B X axis
N0030 Y60 ；B-C length unchanged
N0040 G48 X60 ；Subtract two tool radius for C-D X axis
N0050 Y-60 ；D-E length unchanged
N0060 G45 X30 ；Add one tool radius for E-F-X axis
N0070 G45 G03 X30 Y30 R30 ；Add one tool radius for F-G counterclockwise circle radius
N0080 G45 G01 Y60 ；Add one tool radius for G-H-Y axis
N0090 G46 X0 ； Move one tool radius at H-I X axis negative direction
N0100 G46 G02 X-30 Y30 R30 ；I-J reduce one tool radius for clockwise radius
N0110 G45 G01 Y0 ；Move one tool radius at J-K Y axis positive direction
N0120 G47 X-150 ； Add two tool radius for K-L X axis
N0130 G47 Y-120 ； Add two tool radius for L-M Y axis
N0140 G46 X-55 Y-55 ；M-N ,X and Y axis are subtracted one tool radius
N0150 G26 ；Program returns to starting point and finish
N0151 M02
The addition (+) and subtracting (-) in above example and the sign of tool radius is addition of same
sign and subtraction of different sign. The coordinate axis value can be zero. At this time, it is used for
specifying coordinate axis, and the length of running is one or two radius. The direction is determined by
adding or subtracting command and the sign of the radius.
4.4.19 Tool Radius Compensation commands （G40/G41/G42）
When the tool moves, tool path can offset one tool radius. In order to offset one tool radius, CNC firstly
establishes an offset vector with length equal to the tool radius, namely the tool start point. The offset
vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail end of the vector is on the workpiece and the head is
pointing to the tool center. If linear interpolation or circular arc interpolation is specified after the tool start,
the tool path can be offset by the length of the offset vector during processing. At the end of the processing,
to make the tool return to the starting position, the tool radius compensation mode must be cancelled.
Here it is:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 60
User Manual
Figure 4.24
Command format:
G40(modal, initial state); Cancellation of tool radius compensation.
G41 T- D-(modal); Tool radius compensation in which tool offset at the left side of the workpiece.
G42 T- D-(modal); Too radius compensation in which tool offset at the right side of the workpiece.
Description: The left or right side in the G41/G42 means the tool is at the left or right side of the
workpiece along the cutting direction. The tool radius value is called by T1-T99. Offset is executed from the
program line at which G41/G42 is located. The system will automatically produce transition line for
pointed angles to make transition from tool radius offset vector at the end of the previous program segment
to the tool radius offset vector at the beginning of the next program segment. Tool vector is a method to
describe the data and direction of tool offset. Its radius vector is the tool radius. Its direction is in the radius
direction for circular arc. Its direction is in perpendicular direction for straight line.
The establishment and cancellation of tool radius C compensation fall into A type and B type, which
can be set in comprehensive parameter No. 31, No. 32. For details see the following figure.
Note: 1. The establishment and cancellation of tool radius compensation must be made in a straight line.
2. During G41/G42 tool radius compensation, coordinates is displayed as coordinates plus radius compensation
value.
For example:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
G54 X0 Y0 Z0 ；Specify the absolute coordinates, and position the tool at the
starting position X0 Y0 Z0
G90 G17 G00 G41 T15 D2 X250.0 Y550.0 ；Start the tool with tool radius compensation. Offset the tool
to the right side of the programmed path with the distance
specified by edge No. D2 of tool T15.
G01 Y900.0 F150 ；Processing from P1 to P2
X450.0 ；Processing from P2 to P3
G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 R650.0 ；Processing from P3 to P4
G02 X900.0 R-250.0 ；Processing from P4 to P5
G03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0 ；Processing from P5 to P6
G01 X1150.0 ；Processing from P6 to P7
Y550.0 ；Processing from P7 to P8
X700.0 Y650.0 ；Processing from P8 to P9
X250.0 Y550.0 ；Processing from P9 to P1
G00 G40 X0 Y0 ；Cancel offset mode, the tool returns
to the starting position X0, Y0, Z0
4.4.20 Program Loop commands（G22--G800）
It is used for preparing a processing program which has repetitive motion and movement direction.
command format:G22 L- ；The loop body begins
：
：；The loop body
：
G800 ；End of the loop body
Description: G22 and G800 must be used in pairs in the program. Nesting can be made between G22
and G800. Fixed cycle and compound cycle commands can be contained. It can be called by subprogram.
The number of cycles is designated by L field. G22 and G800 commands are independent. Write the loop
body that is composed of program segments to be repeated between G22 and G800. The program of the
loop body will be repeated during operation.
For example:
Figure 4.26
The program is as follows:
N0000 G17 G90 X0 Y0 F250 M03 ；Set the start state of the program running
N0001 G91 G01 Z-10
0010 G22 L4 ；The loop body begins, and specify the loop body to run four times
N0020 G01 X20 ；The loop body content: A-B straight line
N0030 G03 X10 I5 J0 Y0 ；B-C counterclockwise semicircle
N0040 G800 ；End of the loop
N0050 G01 X20 ；D-E straight line
N0060 Y-30 ；E-F straight line
N0080 G22 L4 ；The loop body begins, and specify the loop body to run four times
N0090 G01 X-20 ；F-G straight line
N0100 G03 X-10 I-5 ；G-H counterclockwise arc

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 62
User Manual
N0110 G800 ；End of the loop
N0120 G01 X-20 ；I-J straight line
N0130 G01 Y30 ；Cancel the mirror
N0140 G12 ；J-A straight line
N0150 G26 ；Return to starting point of program
N0160 M02 ；End of the program
4.4.21 Accurate Positioning/Continuous Path Processing (G60/G64)
According to the requirement of the processing technology, the G60/G64 commands can be used for
specifying the link among program segments.
command format:
G60 ；Accurate positioning (modal)
G64 ；Continuous path processing（modal, initial state）
4.4.22 Fixed Cycle Macro Definition commands(G73,G74,G76,G80～G89)
Fixed cycle enables frequently-used processing operation to be instructed in single program segment
with G function, otherwise, multiple program segments are required. And fixed cycle can shorten the
program to save memory, and make the programming easier.
Fixed Cycle Table:
Feeding Action at
G Code Return Application
Manner Bottom of Hole
Intermittent Fast deep hole drilling
G73 None Fast moving
feeding cycle
Stop - the
Cutting spindle is Cutting Left-handed tapping
G74
feeding turned feeding cycle
positively
Cutting Spindle
G76 Fast moving Fine boring cycle
feeding orientation stop
Cutting
G80 None None Cancel Fixed Cycle
feeding
Cutting Drilling cycle, spot
feeding drilling cycle
Drilling cycle,
Cutting
G82 Stop tool Fast moving counterbore drilling
feeding
cycle
Intermittent Deep hole drilling
feeding cycle
Stop - the
Cutting spindle is Cutting
G84 Tapping cycle
feeding turned feeding
negatively
Cutting Cutting
G85 None Boring cycle
feeding feeding
Cutting
G86 The spindle stop Fast moving Boring cycle
feeding
The spindle is
Cutting
G87 turned Fast moving Back boring cycle
feeding
negatively
Cutting Cutting
G89 Stop tool Boring cycle
feeding feeding
Fixed cycle consists of six actions in sequence
Action 1: positioning of X axis and Y axis
Action 2: fast moving to R point
Action 3: hole processing
Action 4: action at bottom of hole
Action 5: return to R point
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Action 6: fast moving to starting point
Here it is:
Figure 4.27
The influence of movement distance along the borehole axis on G90 and G91 is as follows:
Figure 4.28
After the tool reaches the hole bottom, the tool can return to the plane of R point or starting point. It is
specified by G98 and G99. The figure below indicates the tool movement when instructing G98 or G99.
Under normal circumstances, G99 is used in the first drilling and G98 is used in the last drilling, even
though the plane of starting position in G99 mode is unchanged during drilling.
Figure 4.29
The number of repeats is specified in L for repeating the drilling at the same position. L is only valid
within program segment in which it is specified. The maximum number of repeats L=9999. The default is
L=1;

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 64
User Manual
Positioning plane is determined by G17 (XY)/G18 (ZX)/G19 (YZ).
4.4.22.1 Fast Deep Hole Drilling Cycle(G73)
The cycle performs fast deep hole drilling. It performs intermittent and cutting feeding to the bottom
of hole, and removes scissel chips at the same time.
Command format: G73 X-Y-Z-R-Q-F-L- ；
X-Y-：Hole position data
Z-：The distance from the R point to the bottom of the hole (G91) or coordinates
(G90)
R-：The distance from the starting point to R point (G91) or coordinates (G90)
Q-：The cutting depth at a time
F-：Cutting speed
L-：The number of repeats
Here it is:
Figure 4.30
Description: Fast deep hole drilling cycle uses intermittent feeding along Z axis. During this cycle,
scissel chips can be easily removed from the hole, and smaller returning value can be set. This allows to
perform drilling effectively. In the user parameter NO. 3, set the tool return amount d for tool to move back
fast.
Prior to specify G73, rotate the spindle with auxiliary function (M codes).
When the tool length offset (G43, G44 or G49) is specified in the fixed cycle, and offset is added during
positioning to R point, tool radius offset is ignored.
Example:
M3 S2000 ；Spindle starts to rotate
G90 G99 G73 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-100 Q15 F120；Positioning, drilling hole 1, and then returning to R
point
Y-550 ；Positioning, drilling hole 2, and then returning to R point
X1000 ；Positioning, drilling hole 4, and then returning to R point
G98 Y-750 ；Positioning, drilling hole 6, then return to the initial position plan
G80
M5 ；Spindle stops rotating
4.4.22.2 Left-handed Cut Type Deep Hole Tapping Cycle(G74)
Spindle drive must have position servo control function.
The cycle executes left-handed tapping. In left-hand tapping cycle, after the spindle is fed
counterclockwise Q at every tapping, the spindle clockwise returns a distance of d, and then feed again.
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
When arriving at the hole bottom, spindle rotate clockwise to exit.
Command format：G7４ X-Y-Z-R-Ｐ-K（E）-Q-S-L- ；
X-Y-: Hole position data
Z-: The distance from the R point to the bottom of the hole (G91) or coordinates (G90)
R-: The distance from the starting point to R point (G91) or coordinates (G90)
Q-: Depth of each cutting; Q field is modal. Program it to Q0 to cancel.
P-: The pause time, the unit is in seconds (time range is 0 to 8s). P is modal. Program it
to P0 to cancel.
K（E）-: The metric (or British) lead of screw thread
S-: Spindle rotating speed
L-: The number of repeats
Note: 1. If do not specify a Q address word or write Q0, it is not cut type rigid tapping cycle. Q address word is non-modal.
2. If there is no R address word, then R point coordinates is the current Z axis coordinates position during execution; if
there is no Z address word, then Z point coordinate is the current Z axis coordinate position during execution.
Note: 1. Pause is ineffective when rigid tapping G84/G74
2. When rigid tapping G84/G74, spindle and feed axis ratio switch are invalid.
Cut type deep hole rigid tapping cycle is divided into two types (it can be set in the user parameter NO.
8):
1) High-speed chip removal:
After each tapping feed Q, return a distance d (via the user parameter NO. 9), and feed again.
2). Normal chip removal:
After each tapping feed Q, return to R plane and then feed again.
Here it is:
Figure 4.31
Description: The speed of coordinate axis is determined by the rotating speed of spindle and the screw
pitch during processing screw, and is independent from feeding speed F. The system automatically limit the
speed of coordinate axis within the maximum feed speed.
Spindle ratio switch and feeding axis ratio switch are invalid during processing screw with tracking
mode.
Lead of screw thread K shall be specified in each screw processing program segment, otherwise
compilation cannot be complete.
Spindle counterclockwise rotates to make tapping. When arriving at the bottom of the hole, rotate
clockwise in order to return the spindle. The cycle processes a left-hand thread. For tracking mode tapping,
during left-handed tapping, the feeding is paused while the machine tool is not stopped until the return
action completes.
Prior to specify G74, use auxiliary function M codes to rotate the spindle counterclockwise. When the
spindle is in pulse control mode, it is no need to rotate the spindle with auxiliary function M code.
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 66
User Manual
Example:
M4 S100 ；Spindle starts to rotate (when the spindle is in pulse control mode, M3/M4 may not be
needed)
G90 G99 G74 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-100 Q7 K5 S100
；Positioning, tapping hole 1, and then returning to R point
Y-550 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 2 and then returning to R point
X1000 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 4 and then returning to R point
G98 Y-750 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 6, and then return to the initial position plane
G80
4.4.22.3 Fine Boring Cycle (G76)
Because the spindle needs directional stop function, so the spindle must have positioning function.
Fine boring cycle bores fine holes. The spindle stops when reaching the bottom of the hole. The cutting
tool leaves the processed surface of workpiece and return according to the direction specified in user
parameter No. 5.
Command format
G76 X-Y-Z-R-Q-Ｐ-F-L- ；
Z-：The distance from the R point to the bottom of the hole (G91) or coordinates (G90)
Q-：Offset of bottom of hole
P-：The pause time, the unit is in seconds (time range is 0 to 8s). P is modal. Program it to P0 to
cancel.
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.32
Description: Spindle stops at the fixed rotating position when reaching the bottom of the hole, and the
tool moves back along the opposite direction of the tip. This manner ensures the processing surface intact,
realizing precision and effective boring.
Note: Spindle orientation angle and the returning direction of tool can be set in the user parameter NO.
7
Prior to specify G76, rotate the spindle with auxiliary function M codes.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Example:
G90 G99 G76 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-100 Q5
；Positioning, boring hole 1, then return to R point; Positioning hole bottom and move
5mm
Y-550 ；Positioning, boring hole2, then return to R point;
Y-750 ；Positioning, boring hole 3, then return to R point;
X1000 ； Positioning, boring hole 4, then return to R point;
Y-550 ；Positioning, boring hole 5, then return to R point;
G98 Y-750 ；Positioning, boring hole 6, and then return to the initial position plane
G80
4.4.22.4 Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling Cycle(G81)
The cycle is used for normal drilling, cutting feed is executed to the bottom of hole. Then, cutting tool
returns back fast from bottom of the hole.
Command format：
G81 X-Y-Z-R-F-L- ；
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.33
Description: After positioned along X and Y axis, fast move to R point, drilling from R point to Z point,
and return the tool fast.
Example:
G90 G99 G81 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-100 F120
；Positioning, drilling hole 1, and then returning to R point
Y-550 ； Positioning, drilling hole 2, and then returning to R point
G98 Y-750 ；Positioning, drilling hole 6, and then return to the initial position plane

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 68
User Manual
G80
4.4.22.5 Drilling Cycle, Counterbore Drilling Cycle(G82)
The cycle is used for normal drilling, cutting feed is not stopped until executed to the bottom of hole.
Then, cutting tool returns back fast from bottom of the hole.
Command format:
G82 X-Y-Z-R-Ｐ-F-L- ；
Z- ： The distance from the R point to the bottom of the hole (G91) or coordinates
(G90)
P-：The pause time at the bottom of hole, the unit is in seconds (time range is 0 to 8s).
P is modal. Program it to P0 to cancel.
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.34
Description: After positioned along X and Y axis, fast move to R point, drill from R point to Z point.
Execution is paused when the tool reaching the bottom of hole. And then return the tool fast.
Example:
G90 G99 G82 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-100 P8 F120
G98 Y-750 ；Positioning, drilling hole 6, then return to the initial position plane,
G80
4.4.22.6 Chip Removal and Drilling Cycle(G83)
Intermittent cutting feed is performed to the bottom of hole, and the scissel chips is removed during
drilling.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Command format：
G83 X-Y-Z-R-Q-F-L- ；
Q-：The cutting depth of cutting feed at a time
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.35
Description: Q means cutting depth for each cutting feed. It must be specified with incremental values.
During the second and later cutting feed, fast movement shall be made to the d point at which the previous
drilling was ended prior to execute the cutting feed. The cutting feed d is set in user parameter No. 4. It
must be specified as positive value in Q, and negative sign will be ignored.
Example:
G90 G99 G83 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-100 Q15 F120
G98 Y-750 ；Positioning, drilling hole 6, then return to the initial position plane
G80
4.4.22.7 Right-handed Cut Type Deep Hole Tapping Cycle
Spindle drive must have position servo control function.
The cycle executes left-handed tapping. In left-hand tapping cycle, after the spindle is fed clockwise Q
at every tapping, the spindle counterclockwise returns a distance of d (set by user parameter NO. 9), and
then feed again. When arriving at the hole bottom, spindle rotate counterclockwise to exit.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 70
User Manual
Command format：
G84 X-Y-Z-R-Ｐ-Q-K（E）-L- ；
Q-：Depth of each cutting; Q field is modal. Program it to Q0 to cancel.
P- ： The pause time, the unit is in seconds (time range is 0 to 8s). P is modal. Program it to P0 to
cancel.
K-/E-：Lead of screw thread
S-：Spindle rotating speed
L-： The number of repeats
Note: 1. If do not specify a Q address word or write Q0, it is not cut type rigid tapping cycle. Q address word is non-modal.
2. If there is no R address word, then R point coordinates is the current Z axis coordinates position during execution; if
there is no Z address word, then Z point coordinate is the current Z axis coordinate position during execution.
Attention: 1. Pause is ineffective when rigid tapping G84/G74
2. When rigid tapping G84/G74, spindle and feed axis ratio switch are invalid.
Cut type deep hole rigid tapping cycle is divided into two types (it can be set in the user parameter NO.
8):
1) High-speed chip removal:
After each tapping feed Q, return a distance d (via the user parameter NO.9), and feed again.
2). Normal chip removal:
After each tapping feed Q, return to R plane and then feed again.
Here it is:
Figure 4.36
Description: The speed of coordinate axis is determined by the rotating speed of spindle and the screw
Spindle ratio switch and feeding axis ratio switch are invalid during processing screw with tracking
mode by the spindle.
Lead of screw thread K shall be specified in each screw processing program segment, otherwise
Spindle clockwise rotates to make tapping. When arrived at the bottom of the hole, the spindle rotates
in the opposite direction in order to return back. This process generates threads. For tracking mode of
spindle, during tapping, the feeding is paused while the machine tool is not stopped until the return action
completes.
Prior to specify G84, rotate the spindle with auxiliary function M codes. When the spindle is in pulse
control mode, it is no need to rotate the spindle with auxiliary function M code.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Example:
M3 S100 ；Spindle starts to rotate (when the spindle is in pulse control mode,
M3/M4 may not be needed)
90 G99 G84 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-120 P3 K5 Q6 S100
；Positioning, tapping hole 1, and then returning to R point
Y-550 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 2, and then returning to R point
-750 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 3, and then returning to R point
X1000 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 4, and then returning to R point
Y-550 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 5, and then returning to R point
G98 Y-750 K5 ；Positioning, tapping hole 6, and then return to the initial position plane
G80
4.4.22.8 Fine Boring Cycle(G85)
The cycle is used for boring holes.
Command format：
G85 X-Y-Z-R-F-L- ；
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.37
Description: After positioned along X and Y axis, fast move to R point, bore from R point to Z point.
When reached the bottom of hole, cutting feed is executed, and then return to R point.
Example:
G90 G99 G85 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-120 F120
X1000. ；Positioning, drilling hole 4, and then returning to R point
Y-550. ；Positioning, drilling hole 5, and then returning to R point
G98 Y-750. ；Positioning, drilling hole 6,and then return to the initial position plane
G80

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 72
User Manual
4.4.22.9 Boring Cycle (G86)
The cycle is used for boring holes.
Command format：
G86 X-Y-Z-R-P-F-L- ；
X-Y-： Hole position data
P-：The pause time at the bottom of hole, the unit is in seconds (time range is 0 to 8s).
P is modal. Program it to P0 to cancel.
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.38
Description: After positioned along X and Y axis, fast move to R point, bore from R point to Z point.
When the spindle stops in the hole bottom, tool moves back fast.
Example:
G90 G99 G86 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-100 F120
G98 Y-750 ；Positioning, drilling hole 6,and then return to the initial position plane
G80
4.4.22.10 Boring Cycle, Back Boring Cycle （G87）
Because the spindle needs directional stop function, so the spindle must have positioning function.
The cycle performs precision boring. Only G98 is used, and G99 is not used.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Command format：
G87 X-Y-Z-R-Q-P-F-L- ；
Q-：Tool offset
P-：The pause time, the unit is in seconds (time range is 0 to 8s).。P is modal. Program it
to P0 to cancel.
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.39
Description: After positioned along X axis and Y axis, spindle stops at fixed rotation position. The tool
moves fast at the opposite direction of the tip (specified in user parameter No. 6) and positioned at R point
in the bottom of hole. Then, the cutting tool moves in the direction of the tip and the spindle rotates
positively. Bore the hole to Z point along the positive direction of Z axis. At the Z point, spindle stopped
again at the fixed position of rotation, and the tool moves in the opposite direction of the tip. Then, the
cutting tool returns to the initial position, and the cutting tool moves in the direction of the tip and the
spindle rotates positively. The next program segment is executed.
Example:
G90 G99 G87 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-120 Q5 P2 F120
；Positioning, boring 1 hole, then orienting at initial position prior to offset
5mm, and stop at the Z point for 1 second
Y-550 ；Positioning, boring hole 2, and then returning to R point
X1000 ；Positioning, boring hole 4, and then returning to R point
G80 ；
4.4.22.11 Boring Cycle （G89）
The cycle performs boring.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 74
User Manual
Command format：
G89 X-Y-Z-R-P-F-L- ；
P-：The pause time, the unit is in seconds (time range is 0 to 8s). P is modal. Program it to P0
to cancel.
F-：Cutting speed
Here it is:
Figure 4.40
Description: This cycle is as same as G85 except that it will pause in the bottom of hole.
Example:
G90 G99 G89 X300. Y-250. Z-150. R-120. P4 F120.
；Positioning, boring hole 1, and then returning to R point and pause in bottom of hole for 1
second
G80
4.4.22.12 Cancel Fixed Cycle(G80)
This command cancels fixed cycle.
Command format：G80 ；
Description: Cancel all fixed cycle, and carry out the normal operation. R point and Z point will be
cancelled as well. This means that, in incremental mode, R=0 and Z=0, and other drilling data will be
cancelled as well.
Example:
G90 G99 G89 X300 Y-250 Z-150 R-120 P6 F120
；Positioning, boring hole 1, and then returning to R point

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
G80
G28 ；Return to the reference point to cancel fixed cycle
4.4.23 Polar Coordinates commands(G15/G16)
Polar coordinates can be input with polar coordinates radius and angle with coordinate value. The
positive of the angle is the counterclockwise direction of the 1st axis of the selected plane, and the negative
is clockwise direction. Radius can use the absolute value commands or incremental value command (G90
and G91), and angle uses absolute value.
Command format：
G15 command for cancelling polar coordinates:
（G17/G18/G19）（G90/G91） G16 IP- ；Polar coordinates command
Description:
1.G17/G18/G19 specifies the plane selection for polar commands.
2. G90 specifies the zero point of workpiece coordinate system as the origin of polar coordinate system and
measures radius from this point.
3. G91 specifies the current position as the origin of polar coordinate system and measure the radius from
this point.
4. IP- specifies the axis address and its values of selected plane for polar coordinate system
Polar coordinate radius of the 1st axis of the plane
Polar angle of the 2nd axis of the plane
5. Specify the zero point of workpiece coordinate system as the origin of polar coordinate system:
Radius is specified with absolute value command (distance from zero point to programmed point). Zero
point of workpiece coordinate system is set as the origin of polar coordinate system. When local coordinate
system G52 is used, the origin of local coordinate system becomes the center of polar coordinates. The
angle is in absolute value. See figure shown below:
Figure 4.41
6. Set the current position as the origin of the polar coordinates system:
Radius is specified with incremental value command (distance from current position to programmed point).
The current position is set as the origin of the polar coordinates system. Angle is in absolute value. See
figure as below:
Figure 4.42

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 76
User Manual
Example:
Figure 4.43
G17 G90 G16；Specify polar coordinate command and select XY plane. Specify the zero point of workpiece
coordinate system as the origin of polar coordinate system
G81 X100.0 Y30.0 Z-20.0 R-5.0 F200.0；Specify the distance as 100mm and the angle as 30 degree
Y150.0 ；Specify the distance as 100mm and the angle as 150 degree
Y270.0 ；Specify the distance as 100mm and the angle as 270 degree
G15 G80 ；command for canceling polar coordinates
4.4.24 Metric/British System Conversion commands(G20/G21)
Metric/British system conversion commands can select to input with metric or British system.
Command format：
G20 ； Inch input;
G21 ； Millimeter input
Description: This G code shall be located at the beginning of the program prior to set coordinate
system with separate program segment. After specified the G code that converts British/metric system, the
unit of input data is switched to minimum British or metric input incremental unit. The unit for angle is
kept unchanged. After the conversion of British/metric system, the following unit system will be changed:
 Feeding speed specified by F code
 Position command
 The workpiece zero offset value
 Tool compensation value
 Scale base of manual pulse generator
 Distance of movement in incremental feeding
4.4.25 Thread Processing command (G33)
Thread processing command can cut cylindrical internal and external thread with constant lead. The
spindle must have position detection and feedback device or the spindle must have position servo control
function.
Command format：
G33 Z_ K_ ； Modal command
K： Lead；

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 4.44
Description:
1).G33 is modal until it is replaced by other commands in G group (G0, G1, G2 and G3, etc.).
2). Right-hand and left-hand thread is determined by the spindle rotation direction M03/M04 (M03 -
right-handed, and M04 - left-handed). The rotating speed of spindle is programmed in address S.
3). In G33, the speed of coordinate axis is determined by the rotating speed of spindle and the screw
4）.Spindle ratio switch and feeding axis ratio switch are invalid during processing screw with tracking
mode.
5).Lead of screw thread K shall be specified in each screw processing program segment, otherwise
6).When it is position servo control mode, lead of screw thread K is negative, indicating the spindle
rotates inversely.
7).When processing the thread in tracking mode, the pause function is invalid.
8.Continuous thread G33 can be cut off by G04 command.
For example:
G54G0X50Y30Z10
M03S500
G33Z-35K5
G04 P2
G33Z0K5
G0Z30
M30
Example: Tapping of internal thread with pitch of 0.8mm. Hole has been prefabricated.
N10 G54 G0 G90 X10 Y10 Z5 S600 M3 ；Go back to the starting point, the
spindle rotates in right-handed
direction
N20 G33 Z-25 K0.8 ；Tapping screw thread, the end
point is -25mm
N30 Z5 K0.8 M4 ；Retrieving the tool, and the spindle
rotates in left-handed direction
N40 G0 X… Y… Z…
When in position servo control mode:
N10 G54 G0 G90 X10 Y10 Z5 S600 M3
N20 G33 Z-25 K0.8
N30 Z5 K-0.8
N40 G0 X… Y… Z…

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 78
User Manual
4.4.26 commands for Returning to Starting Point of Program(G26/G261～G265)
The commands are used for returning to starting point of program.
Command format：
G26 ；ZXY all return to starting point of program.
G261 ；X returns to starting point of program.
G262 ；Y returns to starting point of program.
G263 ；Z returns to starting point of program.
G264 ：The fourth axis returns to starting point of program.
G265 ：The fifth axis returns to starting point of program.
Description: G26 automatically returns in a manner of three-axis linkage.
4.4.27 Spindle Positioning (SP)
Prerequisites: The spindle must have a position feedback device or pulse control mode.
The spindle can be positioned to a certain angular position with SP function. Positioning error range
can be set in axis parameter NO. 103.
The determination of the direction of positioning falls in two types:
1) When the spindle positioning adopts position feedback mode, and positioning the spindle from
rotating state (M03/M04), positioning direction remains unchanged. When positioning in static state,
positioning is made according to short offset, and the direction is from starting point to the end point.
2) When the spindle positioning adopts pulse interpolation control mode, positioning direction is set
in the axis parameter NO. 109. There are two ways: Positive and negative direction.
Format: SP－ ; Absolute position: 0-360 degrees
Example:
N10 SP14.3 The spindle positioned to 14.3 degrees
…
N80 G0 X89 Z300 SP25.6 Spindle positioned to 25.6 degrees at first, and then do coordinates movement
N81 X200 Z300
4.4.28 Automatic Chamfer I and Fillet R Functions:
Milling machine is G17 plane by default.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Command format for G17 plane:
G01(G00) X(U) I Automatic chamfer. The next program segment that includes coordinate axis
must be G01(G00) Y(V).
G01(G00) Y(V) I Automatic chamfer.The next program segment that includes coordinate axis
must be G01(G00) X(U).
G01(G00) X(U) R Automatic fillet.The next program segment that includes coordinate axis must
be G01(G00) Y(V).
G01(G00) Y(V) R Automatic fillet.The next program segment that includes coordinate axis must
be G01(G00) X(U).

G01(G00) X(U) I Automatic chamfer. The next program segment that includes coordinate
axis must be G01(G00) Z(W).
G01(G00) Z(W) I Automatic chamfer. The next program segment that includes coordinate
axis must beG01(G00) X(U).
G01(G00) X(U) R Automatic fillet.The next program segment that includes coordinate
G01(G00) Z(W) R Automatic fillet.The next program segment that includes coordinate
axis must be G01(G00) X(U).

G01(G00) Y(V) I Automatic chamfer. The next program segment that includes coordinate
G01(G00) Z(W) I Automatic chamfer. The next program segment that includes coordinate
axis must be G01(G00) Y(V).
G01(G00) Y(V) R Automatic fillet.The next program segment that includes coordinate
G01(G00) Z(W) R Automatic fillet.The next program segment that includes coordinate
axis must be G01(G00) Y(V).
Attention: Address I and R are specified with radius mode. The moving distance of the straight line and the next straight line
must be greater than the width I of chamfer or radius R of fillet, or the system will automatically reduce the width I
of chamfer or radius R of fillet to the minimum moving distance of the straight line and the next straight line.
For example:
Figure 4.45
G54G0X-50Y-50Z20
M03S500
G01G42D01X0Y0F200
G01Z-5
X94.5
X100I4
Y34
Y40R6
X42
X47R5

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 80
User Manual
Y65
Y70I3
X15
X0Y40
Y0
G0X-50Y-50G40
Z50
M05M30
For example: 2
Figure 4.51
G0G54X0Y0Z20
M03S500
G01Z-1F500
G1Y50F100
Y60R10
X30
X35R5
Y45
G01Y0X0
G0Z30
M05
M30
4.4.29 Custom G Code G101--G170
Users can customize 70 G code. Each G code corresponds to a macro program ProgramGxxx. Users can
edit the macro programs corresponding to G101-G170 codes. And G100 can be used for setting parameters
for G101-G170.
4.4.29.1 Function Definition of G102 command: Multihole drilling cycle of circular arc mode.
Command format：
G102 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ii Aa Bb Hh Ff;
X: Absolute value or incremental value of X coordinate of center of circle
Y: Absolute value or incremental value of Y coordinate of center of circle
Z: Depth of hole
R: Fast approaching point coordinates
F:Cutting feed speed
I: Circle radius
A: The angle of the first hole
B: Incremental angle (negative value is clockwise)
H: Number of holes
Note: The macro program ProgramG102 must be imported into the system.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
For example:
Figure 4.46
G54G0Z50
M03S500
G102X0Y0Z-10R5I50A20B36H6F200
G0Z50
M05M30
4.4.29.2 Function Definition of G103 command: Multihole right-handed tapping drilling cycle of
circular arc mode.
Command format
G103 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ii Aa Bb Hh Kk Ss;
Z: Depth of hole
K: Pitch
S: Tapping spindle rotating speed
I: Circle radius
H: Number of holes
For example:
Figure 4.47
G54G0Z30
M03S500
G103X0Y0Z-10R5I50A20B36H6K5S300
G0Z50
M05
M30

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 82
User Manual
4.4.29.3 Function Definition of G104 command: Multihole left-handed tapping drilling cycle of
circular arc mode.
Command Format:
G104 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ii Aa Bb Hh Kk Ss;
Z: Depth of hole
K: Pitch
S: Tapping spindle rotating speed
I: Circle radius
H: Number of holes
For example:
Figure 4.48
G54G0Z50
M04S400
G104X0Y0Z-10R5I50A20B36H6K5S200
G0Z50
M05
M30
4.4.30 G31 and G311 commands
During the execution of the code, if the external jump signal X has been input, the execution of this
code line will be interrupted to executed the next program segment.
Command Format：G31 X_ Z_ F_ P_；Jump
G311 X_ Z_ F_ P_ ；Jump
Attention: The number before the last four digits after P command means the number of the line to which the
program will jump (for example, in P201012: 20 indicates the number of the line to be jumped to, and 1012
indicates X12 valid jump).The data after P is the number of the input point X00-X39. Adding 1000 to
indicate to jump when detected the input point as valid, and adding 2000 to indicate to jump when detected
the input point as invalid.
G311 command is similar to G31 command. The only difference is that when there is no signal detected,
G311 will sound alarm.
For example 1:
N100 T0102
N240 G0X50Z10
.......
N328 G01X40Z-30F200

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
…….
G31 P3281019; When X19 has signal, jump to the line N328 to process.
…….
As shown below:
G31X100F100P1019:Indicating when detecting X19 has signal, the program will be stopped
immediately to jump to next program line. When detecting X19 has no signal, the
next program line will be executed after the execution of this program segment
completed.
G311P1019X100F100:Indicating when detecting X19 has signal, the program will be stopped
immediately to jump to next program line. When detecting X19 has no signal, the
next program line will be executed after the execution of this program segment
completed, and alarm will be sounded.
4.4.31 Memory Coordinate and Return Memory Coordinate commands
(G25/G61/G611-G615)
Command Format：
G25 ；Memorize the current X, Y, Z, A, B coordinates.
G61 ；Return to the X, Y, Z axis coordinates of the G25 memory point.
G611 ； Return to the X axis coordinates of the G25 memory point.
G612 ； Return to the Y axis coordinates of the G25 memory point.
G613 ； Return to the Z axis coordinates of the G25 memory point.
G614 ； Return to the fourth axis coordinates of the G25 memory point.
G615 ； Return to the fifth axis coordinates of the G25 memory point.
4.4.32 Angle of Straight Line Function (J or A)
Code format:
G17 plane:
G01(G00) X(U) J(or,A) ；Specify angle and the X axis coordinate
G01(G00) Y(V) J(or,A) ；Specify angle and the Y axis coordinate
G18 plane:
G01(G00) X(U) J(or,A)；Specify angle and the X axis coordinate
G01(G00) Z(W) J(or,A)；Specify angle and the Z axis coordinate
G19 plane:
G01(G00) Y(V) J(or,A)；Specify angle and the Y axis coordinate
G01(G00) Z(W) J(or,A)；Specify angle and the Z axis coordinate
For example: The angle of straight line is executed as following.
Figure 4.49
G17G54G0X0Y0Z30G90M03S500
G01Z-2F200
G01X20I35

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 84
User Manual
G01Y49.004I45
G01X80I15
G01Y100
X0
Y0
G0Z20
M05M30
4.4.33 Rough Indexing of Spindle
Rough indexing for the spindle by precisely controlling the rotating time of spindle in analogue control
mode:
M7053 Pxxx ；The spindle automatically stops after a period of automatic positive rotation. The time of
positive rotation is specified by parameter P with unit of millisecond.
M7054 Pxxx ；The spindle automatically stops after a period of automatic negative rotation. The time
of negative rotation is specified by parameter P with unit of millisecond.
Timing precision can achieve millisecond level.
For example: M7053 P3000; indicates the spindle stops after positively rotating for 3 seconds.
4.4.34 commands Waiting for an Auxiliary Relay to Become Valid M1xxx or Invalid
M2xxx
M1xxx：Indicating to proceed to next program after the auxiliary relay is valid, for example:
M1049：Indicating to proceed the next program after the auxiliary relay M49 is valid, or the system is
in waiting status.
M2xxx：Indicating to proceed to next program after the auxiliary relay is invalid, for example:
M2049：Indicating to proceed the next program after the auxiliary relay M49 is invalid, or the system is
in waiting status.
Attention: There must be 4-digit number after this command.
4.4.35 commands Making an Auxiliary Relay to Be Valid M3xxxor Invalid M4xxx

M3xxx ：Making auxiliary relay valid.
For example: M3049 indicates to proceed to next program after the auxiliary relay m49 is valid.
M4xxx ：Indicating to proceed to next program after the auxiliary relay is invalid.
For example: M4049 indicates to proceed to next program after the auxiliary relay M49 is invalid.
Attention: There must be 4-digit number after this command.
4.4.36 Direct Output Point and Auxiliary Relay Output in NC Program

Format：OUT+（-）Y（M）**+（-）Y（M）**+（-）Y（M）**+（-）Y（M）**
Description: "OUT" refers to output, "+" refers to effective, "-" refers to invalid.
For example: OUT+Y5-Y7+Y9+Y11-Y15 refers to make Y5, Y9, Y11 output valid, and make Y7, Y15
output invalid.
For example: OUT+M12-M13+Y14+Y8-Y16 refers to make M12, Y14, Y8 output valid, and make M13,
Y16 output invalid.
4.4.37 Conditional Transfer Function
M1xxx Pxx refers to execute in sequence when the auxiliary relay is valid, or jump to the marked line
specified by P if invalid.
For example: M1049 P52 refers to execute in sequence when auxiliary relay M49 is valid, or jump to
the program line that has N52 if invalid.
M2xxx Pxx refers to execute in sequence when the auxiliary relay is invalid, or jump to the marked line
specified by P if valid.
For example: M2049 P52 refers to execute in sequence when auxiliary relay M49 is invalid, or jump to
the program line that has N52 if valid.
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Attention: There must be 4-digit number after this M command.
4.4.38 Commands Waiting for Valid/Invalid Input Point
WAT+Xxx；Waiting for the X input point is valid
WAT+Yxx；Waiting for Y output point is valid
WAT+Mxx；Waiting for the M input point is valid
WAT-Xxx；Waiting for the X input point is invalid
WAT-Yxx；Waiting for the Y input point is invalid
WAT-Mxx；Waiting for the M input point is invalid
For example: command WAT+X13 is waiting for valid input point X13, and WAT+Y15 is waiting for
valid output point Y15. WAT-X13 is waiting for invalid input point X13, and WAT-M75 is waiting for invalid
auxiliary relay M75.
Attention: The command is a high-speed detection.
4.4.39 System Control Program commands
4.4.39.1 Move Coordinate Axis ：MOVE
For example:
Format:MOVE( Parameter G, Parameter F, Parameter X, Parameter Y, Parameter Z,
Parameter A, Parameter B, Parameter W)
Parameter G: the first parameter is G90 or G9, indicating relative or absolute.
Parameter F: specifies the speed.
Parameter X, Y, Z, A, B: refers to machine tool coordinate values of X, Y, Z, A and B axis.
Parameter W: specifies to stop running when an input signal satisfies the conditions,
such as: W+5 indicates that operation will be stopped when input point X5 is valid.
MOVE(G90,F8000,X-100);// X axis moves to machine tool coordinate X-100mm.
MOVE(G91,F8000,Z-100);// Z axis moves -100mm.
MOVE(G91,F8000,Y-300,W-8);// Y axis moves -300mm, but operation is stopped when input point
X8 is invalid.
Macro variable # can be used for specifying the values of parameters F and XYZAB.
For example: MOVE(G91,F#231,Y#240,W+2);//Y axis moves #240mm with speed of #231, but the
operation is stopped when the input point X2 is valid.
4.4.39.2 Set and Save the Current Value of the Workpiece Coordinate System:SETWK
Format：SETWK(Parameter X, Parameter Y, Parameter Z, Parameter A, Parameter B);
Parameter X, Y, Z, A, B: refers to workpiece coordinate values of X, Y, Z, A and B axis in the
current workpiece coordinate system.
For example: SETWK(X23.56,Z567.89);// Set the X coordinate value in the current workpiece coordinate
system as 23.56mm, and Z coordinate value as 567.89mm.
Macro variable # can be used for specifying the values of parameters XYZAB.
For example: SETWK(X#238,Z#237);// Set X coordinate value in current workpiece coordinate system
as #238mm, and Z coordinate value as #237mm.
4.4.39.3 Tool Count command: COUN
An command waiting for a certain tool is changed and is in position by a Tool Count signal, and it also
judges the condition for tool positioning signal. The condition is met, it deems that the tool is changed and
is in position, and then the program continues.
Format：COUNT**+(-)X**+(-)X**
Description:
a>, “T**” refers to the tool number, and TT refers to the tool number that is transferred in the
command.
b>, The first input point X refers to tool count signal, '+' refers to count the tool ascendingly, and '-'
refers to count the tool descendingly.
c>,The second input point X refers to positioning signal, '+' refers to valid positioning, and '-' refers to
invalid positioning.
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 86
User Manual
d>,Two input points X can be the same. The second input point positioning signal can be missing.
e>, Parameter "One-way/two-way tool selection" is used to decide the increase of decrease of tool
number. If it is one-way, the tool number will increase, and if it is two-way, the increase or decrease of tool
number will be decided according to the principle of choosing tool at the nearest distance.
f>, Parameter "Is tool number determined by the input point" is changed to not to be decided by input
point.
g>, For lathe system, when the parameter "Is tool number determined by the input point" is set to not
to decide by the input point, press F2 in the interface of the setting of assumed tool tip to set the current
tool number.
For example: COUNTT+X11-X11 selects the tool number transferred in T command, tool count signal is
X11, count the tool ascendingly, positioning signal is X11, invalid indicates positioning.
COUNTT+X10 selects the tool number transferred in T command, tool count signal is X10, count the
tool ascendingly, not to detect the positioning signal.
COUNT6+X10-X10 selects tool No. 6, tool count signal is X10, count the tool ascendingly, positioning
signal is X10, and invalid indicates positioning.
COUNT7-X6+X8 selects tool No. 7, tool count signal is X6, count the tool descendingly, positioning
signal is X8, and valid indicates positioning.
4.4.40 Auxiliary Functions: M98,M99
Format：
M98 P_ L_; Unconditional call subprogram command.
P: Name of subprogram
L: Number of calls
Any number of characters (less than 100) of P field. Specify the path and name of subprogram called by
the program.
For example: Psub/%ab12 means that the subprogram is tmp/NC/sub/%ab12
Note: 1. tmp/NC/ is the default path of system program, and sub is a folder under it.
2. Subprogram must be a stand-alone program.
There must be a space before the address character L for the number of subprogram calls. When the
subprogram is completed, the operation will return to the next segment of the main program. If a program
contains a fixed order or repeat graphics, such order or graphics can be written as a subprogram that is
stored in memory storage in order to simplify the programming. Subprogram can be called by the main
program, and the called subprogram can also call another subprogram.
Format:
M99; End of the subprogram
M99 P_; jump to the line marked by P
M99: In the main program, M99 without P command is equivalent to M02 and M99 with P command is
equivalent to M97;
That is to say, M99 and M02 have the same function. M99P_ and M97P_ have the same function to jump
to the marked line number specified by P.
It will return when subprogram is without P command, and it will return to the line of P (the marked
line number, not sure if it is the actual line number) in the main program when it is with P command. That
is to say, M99 subprogram will jump to the line marked by P in the main program as same as M99P_ and
M97 upon finishing.
Subprogram can call other subprogram (nesting). No matter it is the main program or a subprogram to
call a subprogram, the subprogram will return to the next line of the calling program. When the main
program calls a subprogram, it is considered to be primary subprogram. There are 4 levels of calls as shown
below.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 4.52
Subprogram can call another subprogram in the same way as a main program calls a subprogram.
Figure 4.53
Call command can repeatedly call subprogram for 9999 times at the most.
1. The method for a main program in USB flash drive to call a subprogram in USB flash drive: P[ or
P].
For example: M98 P[A123 means to call the subprogram A123 in USB flash drive.
M98 P]S123 means to call subprogram S123 in USB flash drive.
M98 P[FFD means to call the subprogram FFD in USB flash drive.
If subprogram in folders in USB flash drive is to be called, the path to the file shall be indicated.
For example, if there is a program named 11 in a folder named 55, then the call is M98P[55/11.
2. Call hidden program:
The hidden files that are starting with HIDEFILE in system user program area can be displayed only
after pressing F key and inputting factory password in program directory interface, and factory password
must be entered to import and export parameter.
If M98 is omitted for subprogram call, double letter P can be written to call subprogram.
For example: PPAB89 indicates to call subprogram AB89.
If the subprogram is a hidden file that starts with HIDEFILE, the string HIDELIFE can be replaced by "*"
during the call.
For example: If the subprogram's filename is HIDEFILEMY123, which means a hidden file, there are
following methods to call it with the same effect:
M98 PHIDEFILEMY123;
M98 P*MY123;
PPHIDEFILEMY123;
PP*MY123;
4.5 Programming Conventions

4.5.1 Multiple commands Can Share Segment
Multiple commands sharing segment means multiple commands are allowed to exist in a same
program segment (program line) to reduce the programming line number. The following shall be paid
attention to the sharing of segment by multiple commands:
1. commands of the same group shall not share segment (see the grouping in command table).
2. The independent type commands must be stand-alone.
3. The commands that share segment shall be executed one by one.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 88
User Manual
4.5.2 The command and Parameter Can Be Placed Arbitrarily in Program Segment
For example
N01 G01 X120 Y100；
N03 R123 X120 Y100 G03；
Above are legal program segments.
4.5.3 Repetitive commands Are Not Allowed in Program Segment.
For example
G01 G01 X120 Y100 X34
Compilation errors will occur in the program.
4.5.4 The Operands That Have Nothing to Do with commands Are Not Allowed in
Program Segment
4.5.5 Semicolon may or may not be used at the end of a program segment.
English/Chinese comments can be appended after the semicolon.
For example:
N01 G00 X120.0 Y234.0；Fast moving
；The following processes groove
N02 G02 X34.5 Y15.67 R78；
4.5.6 When the first character of the program segment is "%", "O", "(", then the system
deems that it is a comment line
For example:
O1234
%7878
(cylinder mold)
Attention: When auxiliary relay M38 is valid, the codes after "(" will be executed or otherwise the codes
after "(" will be ignored.
4.5.7 Space may or may not be added between commands in program segment
For example:
N01G00X120.0 Y234.0；
N02 G02 X34.5Y15.67R78；
Above are all legal program segments
4.5.8 Code G00, G01, G02, G03, M02 can also be written as G0, G1, G2 and G3, and M2.
4.5.9 Global Variables and System Variables Can Be Introduced in the Program
Global variables and system variables can be introduced in programs for ease of programming.
Address characters other than P can be followed by variable name.
For example: X#135
If the value of the global variable #135 is 124, then 124 will be assigned to X.
4.5.10 Arithmetic Expression Can Be Introduced in Program
Arithmetic expression must be wrapped by brackets [ ].
For example: X[#132+5.34*（4*SIN（#105/5.6））]
During compilation, system will compute the value of arithmetic expression
[#132+5.34*(4*SIN(#105/5.6))] and then assign the value to the X axis. This method is convenient for the
operator to parameter programming.
4.5.11 Description of MDI Function
When using MDI function, if there is no G53, G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, and G59 in the MDI program
code, it means that the MDI program is running in the current workpiece coordinate system (G53,
G54-G59).
For example: given the current coordinate system is G55:
After input X50Z67F400 in the MDI dialog, press run, then the system will move to coordinate point
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
X50Z67 in the workpiece coordinate system G55 at the speed of F400.
4.6 Details of Tool Radius Compensation C

4.6.1 Inner side and outer side
When an angle intersection of the tool paths specified with move commands for two blocks on the
workpiece side is over180 degrees, it is referred to as “inner side”. when the angle is between 0 and 180
degrees, it is referred to as “outer side”.
4.6.2 Tool Movement in Start-up

From no tool radius compensation to tool radius compensation
4.6.2.1 Tool Movement around an inner side of a corner (α≥180)
4.6.2.2 Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool tool movement and the tool moves
around the outside at an obtuse angle（90≤α＜180）
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 90
User Manual
4.6.2.3 Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool movement and the tool moves around
the outside at an acute angle （α＜90）
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
4.6.3 Tool Movement in Offset Mode

4.6.3.1 Tool Movement around the Interior of Corner （180≤α）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 92
User Manual
4.6.3.2 Tool Movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle（90≤α<180）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
4.6.3.3 Tool Movement around the Exterior of Acute Corner （α<90）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 94
User Manual
4.6.4 Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel

4.6.4.1 If the cancel block is a block with tool moement; and the tool moves around the
inside(180≤α)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
4.6.4.2 If the cancel block is a block with tool movement, and the tool moves around the outside at
an obtuse angle（90≤α＜180）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 96
User Manual
4.6.4.3 If the cancel block is a block with tool movement , and the tool moves around the outside at
an acute angle (α<90）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
4.7 Programming Examples

Example 1: Cutting Square and Circle
D
C
O
A
B
E
40
Figure 4.88
Starting from the center, the center coordinates are G54 X0 Y0 Z50
D01 of tool radius in parameter T01
N0000 G54 G00 X0 Y0 Z50 ；The starting point of processing
N0002 M03 S1000 ；Start spindle
N0004 G00 Y-40 X－40 G90 ；Move out of the square
N0006 Z10 ；
N0008 G01 Z－10 F200 ；Tool plunges at Z axis
N0010 G01 G41 T01 D01 X-20 Y-20 F400 ；Go to point B
N0012 Y20 ；Tool cuts straight line BC on the left of workpiece
N0014 X20 ；Sharp-angled transition at C point, and cut straight line
CD
N0016 Y－20 ；Sharp-angled transition at D point, and cut straight line
CD
N0018 X-25 Sharp-angled transition at E point, cut straight EB, and
for consistent workpiece roughness, move 5mm more
N0020 G00 X-40 Y-40 G40 ；Move out of the circle
N0022 G01 G41 X－20 Y－20 F500 ；Radial extending for T01 values from A-B
N0024 Z－20 F100 ；Tool plunges at Z axis
N0026 G91 G02 I20 J20 Y0 X0 ；Cut circle

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 98
User Manual
N0028 G00 Z50 ；Lifting the tool
N0030 G40 G00 X0 Y0 ；Cancel the tool compensation
N0032 G40 M05 ；Shut down the spindle
N0034 M02 ；End of the program
Example 2:
Figure 4.89
It is assumed to use three tools T11, T15, T31. The tool length compensation values are 200(H1),
190(H1), and 150(H1) respectively. They have been input in the cutting tool parameter settings. Following
program can be made according to the machining requirements of parts drawing:
N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ；Set workpiece coordinates in the reference
point
N002 G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 ；Cutting tool exchange
N003 G43 Z0 H1 ；Tool length offset at initial position
N004 S30 M3 ；Start the spindle
N005 G99 G81 X400.0 Y-350.0 Z-153.0 R-97.0 F120 ；Positioning, and drill hole 1
N006 Y-550.0 ； Positioning, drilling hole 2, and then
returning to R point
N007 G98 Y-750.0 ； Positioning, drilling hole 3, and then
returning to initial position
N008 G99 X1200.0 ； Positioning, drilling hole 4, and then
N009 Y-550.0 ； Positioning, drilling hole 5, and then
N011 G00 X0 Y0 M5 ；Return to reference point and stop spindle
N012 G49 Z250.0 T15 ；Cancel tool length offset and change tool
N015 G99 G82 X550.0 Y-450.0 Z-130.0 R-97.0 P3 ； Positioning, drilling hole 7, and then
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
N017 G99 X1050.0 ； Positioning, drilling hole 9, and then
N019 G00 X0 Y0 M5 ；Return to reference point and stop spindle
N020 G49 Z250.0T31 ；Cancel tool length offset and change tool
N023 G85 G99 X800.0 Y-350.0 Z-153.0 R47.0 F50 ； Positioning, boring hole 11, and then
N024 G91 Y-200.0 ； Positioning, boring hole 12, and then
N025 Y-200.0 ； Positioning, boring hole 13, and then
N026 G90 G28 X0 Y0 M5 ；Return to reference point and stop spindle
N026 G49 Z0 G80 ；Cancel tool length offset
N027 M02 ；Program stop
4.8 User Macro Program

Although the NC program is very useful to the programming of the same processing operation, the user
macro program makes the programming of the same processing operation more convenient and easier
because it allows the use of variable arithmetic and logical operations and conditional transfer. The same
processing operations can be programmed as a general program, such as macro program for processing
cavity and fixed processing cycle macro. During usage, the processing program can call the user macro
program with a simple command in the same manner as calling a subprogram:
Figure 4.90
4.8.1 Types of Variables
User parameters 321-15: if set to 0, it indicates new type of variables that is compatible with Fanuc; if
set to 1, it indicates the legacy variables.
Legacy type of variables
Variable Type of Function

number variables
#0--#20 Local variable Local variables can only be used in a macro
program to store data, such as operation results.
When power is off, local variables are initialized to
null.
When calling macro program, the independent
variable make assignment to local variable.
#21--#600 Global variable Global variables have the same meaning in different
macro programs.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 100
User Manual
When power is off, variables #21-#100 are
initialized to null, and the data of variable
#101-#600 will not lost even the power is off.
#1000-- System System variable is used to read all kinds of data
variables changes during the operation of CNC. For example,
the current position and compensation value of the
cutting tool.
Special attention shall be paid to the following:

Macro variables #101--#155 and #161--#165 and #201--#202 and #197,#198,#199,#200 are
occupied by system function. Users shall not use them.
Macro variables #161--#165 are used to record and display XYZAB machine tool coordinate values at
G31/G311 jumps.
#201: The number of times of repeating thread compound cycle G176.
#202: Offset distance of tool along the Z axis at every time when repeating the thread compound cycle
G176 (unit: mm).
Global variables #31--#100 and #203--#600 are free to use by users. Other global variables have been
occupied by the system or used as a system backup function.
New Macro Variables Numbering (Compatible with Fanuc):
Variable Type of variables Function

number
#0 Null variable
#1--#33 Local variable Local variables can only be used in a macro
program to store data, such as operation results.
When power is off, local variables are initialized
to null.
When calling macro program, the independent
variable make assignment to local variable.
#100--#199 Global variable Global variables have the same meaning in
#300--#999 different macro programs.
When power is off, variables #100--#199 are
initialized to null, and the data of variable
#300--#999 will not lost even the power is off.
#1000-- System variables System variable is used to read all kinds of data
changes during the operation of CNC. For
example, the current position and compensation
value of the cutting tool.
Special attention shall be paid to the following: Macro variables #200--#299 are occupied by system
function. Users shall not use them.
4.8.2 Use independent variables to specify its value assigned to the corresponding local
variables as follows:
1. Specifying legacy variables
Variable
Variable Variable
Address Address Address number
number number
A #0 I #7 T #14
B #1 J #8 U #15
C #2 K #9 V #16
D #3 M #10 W #17
E #4 Q #11 X #18
F #5 R #12 Y #19
H #6 S #13 Z #20
2. Specifying the new variable (compatible with Fanuc)
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
number number number
A #1 I #4 T #20
B #2 J #5 U #21
C #3 K #6 V #22
D #7 M #13 W #23
E #8 Q #17 X #24
F #9 R #18 Y #25
H #11 S #19 Z #26
Address G, N, O, and P cannot be used in independent variable. Address that does not need to be
specified can be omitted. The local variables that correspond to omitted address are set to null. Addresses
may not be specified alphabetically but shall comply with word address format.
Levels of local variable: The nest of local variables has three levels from 0 to 3. The main program is
level 0. The level of local variable increases 1 at each time when macro program is called by G65 or G66.
The local variable of parent level is stored in CNC. When the macro program executes M99, the calling
program will be returned, and at this time, the level of local variable decreases 1 and restore the value of
local variable stored at macro program calling.
4.8.3 System Variables
System variable is used to read and write NC internal data such as tool offset value and the current
position, but the system variables can only be read. System variables are the basic for the development of
automatic control and general processing program.
1. Modal information
The modal information of the program segment that is under processing can be read out.
#4001 modal information G00, G01, G02, G03, G33
#4002 modal information G17，G18，G19
#4003 modal information G90，G91
#4009 modal information G73，G74，G76，G80-G89
#4014 modal information G53，G54-G59
#4109 modal information F
#4119 modal information S
#4120 the tool number on the spindle
#4111 modal information H
#4107 modal information D
2. #3901 The number of automatic program running by M20 command
3. The current state
#5001——#5004The end point XYZA of the program (machine tool coordinates: mm)
#5021——#5024The current position XYZA (machine tool coordinates: mm)
#5041——#5044The current position XYZA (workpiece coordinates: mm)
#5081The current tool length compensation value （um）
#5082The current tool radius compensation value （um）
#5080 The current tool number

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 102
User Manual
4. The system parameters
#1001——#1099Length compensation value H1 of tool T1-99 （um）
#1101——#1199Radius compensation value D1 of tool T1-99 （um）
#1201——#1299 Length compensation value H2 of tool T1-99（um）
#1301——#1399 Radius compensation value D2 of tool T1-99（um）
#1501——#1599 Radius compensation value D3 of tool T1-99（um）
#1800 Input relay X00-07 (corresponding to D0--7 digit)
#1801 Input relay X08--15 (corresponding to D0--7 digit)
#1804 X, Y axis of positive and negative limit, return to zero, zero position
X50-X57 (corresponding to D0--7 digit)
#1805 Z, A axis of positive and negative limit, return to zero, zero position
X58-X65 (corresponding to D0--7 digit)
#1806 B of positive and negative limit, return to zero, zero position
X66-X69, X70-X73 (corresponding to D0--7 digit)
#1807 Drive/spindle alarm X74-X81 (corresponding to D0--7 digit)
#1808 Output relay Y00-Y15 (corresponding to D0--15 digit)
#1809 Output relay Y16-Y31 (corresponding to D0--15 digit)
#1810 Auxiliary relay M200-M215 (corresponding to D0--15 digit)
#1811 Auxiliary relay M00-M15 (corresponding to D0--15 digit)
#1812 Custom keyboard indicators Y71-Y80 (corresponding to D0-10 digit)
#1813 Servo enable Y50-Y57 (corresponding to D0-7 digit)
#1814 Auxiliary relay M16-M31 (corresponding to D0-15 digit)
#1850 X offset value of workpiece coordinate system G54 （Unit：um）
#1856 Y offset value of workpiece coordinate system G54（Unit：um）
#1862 Z offset value of workpiece coordinate system G54（Unit：um）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
#1868 A offset value of workpiece coordinate system G54（Unit：um）
#1874 X value of the first reference point (Unit: mm)
#1875 X value of the second reference point (Unit: mm)
#1876 X value of the third reference point (Unit: mm)
#1877 X value of the fourth reference point (Unit: mm)
#1878 Y value of the first reference point (Unit: mm)
#1879 Y value of the second reference point (Unit: mm)
#1880 Y value of the third reference point (Unit: mm)
#1881 Y value of the fourth reference point (Unit: mm)
#1882 Z value of the first reference point (Unit: mm)
#1883 Z value of the second reference point (Unit: mm)
#1884 Z value of the third reference point (Unit: mm)
#1885 Z value of the fourth reference point (Unit: mm)
#1886 A value of the first reference point (Unit: mm)
#1887 A value of the second reference point (Unit: mm)
1888 A value of the third reference point (Unit: mm)
1889 A value of the fourth reference point (Unit: mm)
#1890 Machine tool system metric setting
1891 Spindle encoder pulse number
#1892 The fourth axis function set
#1893 The fifth axis function set
#1894 Calculation when fifth axis is rotating axis
#1895 Calculation when fourth axis is rotating axis
#1896 The X axis backlash compensation (μm)
#1897 The Y axis backlash compensation (μm)
#1898 The Z axis backlash compensation (μm)
#1899 The fourth axis backlash compensation (μm)
#1900 Feeding axis uses electronic gear or not (0 refers to use and/non-0 refers to not to use)
#1901 Numerator of X axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1902 Denominator of X axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1903 Numerator of Y axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1904 Denominator of Y axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1905 Numerator of Z axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1906 Denominator of Z axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1907 Numerator of the fourth axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1908 Denominator of the fourth axis electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1909 Spindle uses electronic gear or not (0 refers to use and/non-0 refers to not to use)
#1910 Numerator of the spindle low-gear electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1911 Denominator of the spindle low-gear electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1912 Numerator of the spindle high-gear electronic gear （1—999999999）
#1913 Denominator of the spindle high-gear electronic gear （1—999999999）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 104
User Manual
#1914 The X axis direction signal (0 refers to reverse/non-zero refers to normal)
#1915 The Y axis direction signal (0 refers to reverse/non-zero refers to normal)
#1916 The Z axis direction signal (0 refers to reverse/non-zero refers to normal)
#1917 the fourth axis direction signal (0 refers to reverse/non-zero refers to normal)
#1918 #1918 Spindle pulse control direction signal (0 refers to reverse/non-zero refers to normal)
#1923 X axis negative range (mm)
#1924 Y axis negative range (mm)
#1925 Z axis negative range (mm)
#1926 The fourth axis negative range (mm/deg)
#1927 X axis positive range （mm）
#1928 Y axis positive range （mm）
#1929 Z axis positive range （mm）
#1930 The fourth axis positive range (mm/deg)
#1950 X axis G00 speed （mm/min）
#1951 Y axis G00 speed （mm/min）
#1952 Z axis G00 speed （mm/min）
#1953 The fourth axis G00 speed (mm/min or deg/min)
#1954 G01 default speed （mm/min）
#1955 Simulation speed（mm/min）
#1956 Automatic max. feed speed（mm/min）
#1957 Acceleration of X axis lifting speed（（mm/min）/s）
#1958 Acceleration of Y axis lifting speed（（mm/min）/s）
#1959 Acceleration of Z axis lifting speed（（mm/min）/s）
#1960 Acceleration of the fourth axis lifting speed ((mm/min)/s)
#1961 Manual rotating speed of spindle（rpm）
#1962 Manual speed of feed axis（mm/min）
#1963 Forward speed of X axis returning to reference point （mm/min）
#1964 Forward speed of Y axis returning to reference point （mm/min）
#1965 Forward speed of Z axis returning to reference point （mm/min）
#1966 Forward speed of the fourth axis returning to reference point (mm/min or deg/min)
#1967 Reverse speed of X axis returning to reference point （mm/min）
#1968 Reverse speed of Y axis returning to reference point （mm/min）
#1969 Reverse speed of Z axis returning to reference point （mm/min）
#1970 Reverse speed of the fourth axis returning to reference point (mm/min or deg/min)
#1971 Max. rotating speed of spindle motor (rpm)
#1972 Manual max. feed speed
#1973 Acceleration of the fifth axis lifting speed
#1974 The initial speed of manual run (mm/min)
#1975 Velocity jump amount allowed by continuous path interpolation (mm/min)
#1990 Number of parts processed
#1991 The number of automatic program running by M20 command
#1992 delay time after loosen and tighten the tool (in second)
#1993 Comprehensive parameter 2: system internal parameter
#1994 Language selection
#1995 The direction of the offset Q of fixed cycle G76 command
#1996 The direction of the offset Q of fixed cycle G87 command
#1997 Start PLC program running or not
#1998 Tool length compensation mode

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
#2000 Spindle have high/low gear or not (0 refers to no/non-zero refers to yes)
#2001 Setting for feed axis returning to reference point (X1, Y2, Z4) normally on/off
#2002 Whether the spindle is started when the spindle shifts gear (0 refers to no/non-zero refers to
yes)
#2003 Time between stop and swing when spindle shifts gear (0.01 second)
#2004 Time between swing and gear shift of the spindle (0.01 seconds)
# 2005 Motor swing speed when spindle shifts gear (0.01 rpm)
#2006 The initial swing position of spindle when shifting gear (0 refers to positive/non-zero refers to
negative)
#2007 Positive swing time when spindle shifts gear (0.01 second)
#2008 Negative swing time when spindle shifts gear (0.01 second)
#2009 Spindle shift output signal is maintained or not (0 refers to no/non-zero refers to yes)
#2010 Whether to display the custom alarm (0 refers to no/non-zero refers to yes)
#2011 Display feed axis and spindle alarm or not (0 refers to no/non-zero refers to yes)
#2012 Display cooling/lubrication alarm or not(0 refers to no/non-zero refers to yes)
#2013 Delay time after loosening tool during tool change (0.1 second)
#2014 System internal parameter (milling and lathe setting)
#2015 Whether X axis is radius programming
#2016 Close five-axis linkage interpolation function or not (0 refers to no/non-zero refers to yes)
#2017 Detect the spindle position feedback or not(0 refers to no/non-zero refers to yes)
#2018 Internal parameters
#2019 Spindle control mode (G74/G84/G33 thread processing and spindle positioning)
#2020 tool management mode (0 refers to using M06 / non-zero refers to directly changing tool with
T command)
#2021 Tool selection mode (0 refers to select tool in one-way/non-zero refers to select two-way
randomly)
#2022 Method of feed axis returning to reference point.
#2023 Speed of arc with B-type gap compensation
#2024 Secondary panel type
#2025 Z axis returns to which reference point during tool change
#2026 Spindle orientation stop angle during tool change
#2027 Control mode of spindle returning to zero
#2028 State of the power supply of each axis at power on
#2029 Max. speed of Z axis when using manual pulse (mm/min)
#2030 Max. speed of X, Y and the fourth axis when using manual pulse (mm/min)
#2031 Detect spindle orientation and tool change point of Z axis or not before the tool change
(non-zero refers to detect)
#2032 Reserved
#2033 Reserved
#2034 Reserved
#2035 Reserved
#2036 Reserved
#2037 Reserved
#2038 Reserved
#2039 Reserved
#2040 Reserved
#2041 Reserved
#2042 Reserved

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 106
User Manual
#2043 Reserved
#2044 Reserved
#2045 Reserved
#2046 Spindle orientation stop angle for fixed cycle of hole boring
#2047 Speed of spindle returning to zero
#2048 Spindle positioning speed
#2049 Spindle positioning error range
#2050 The establishment of the tool radius compensation C
#2051 Method for cancelling tool radius compensation C
#2052 Positioning direction when spindle positioning using pulse interpolation control method
#2053 Delay time during the sudden change of rotation of spindle (unit: 0.1 second)
#2054 Acceleration of spindle lifting speed in pulse control mode ((mm/min)/s)
#2055 Start tool selection and tool change functions or not
#2056 The rate of Rs232 serial port communication
#2057 delay time of power on after the drive is power off (unit: 0.1 second)
#2058 Z axis movement interlocks with the main manual tool capture (non-zero refers to interlock/0
refers to no)
#2059 Offset distance after X axis returning to reference point (unit:0.1 mm)
#2060 Offset distance after Y axis returning to reference point (unit:0.1 mm)
#2061 Offset distance after Z axis returning to reference point (unit:0.1 mm)
#2062 Offset distance after the fourth axis returning to the reference point (unit: 0.1 mm)
#2063 Reserved
#2064 Reserved
#2065 Reserved
#2066 Reserved
#2067 Reserved
#2068 Reserved
#2069 Reserved
#2070 Value of tool retreat amount d in fixed cycle G73 command (mm)
#2071 Value of tool retreat amount d in fixed cycle G83 command (mm)
#2090---#2095: The fifth axis G54 - G59.
#2096---#2099: Reference points 1, 2, 3, 4 of the fifth axis.
#2100---#2199 Tool numbers corresponding to tool seat 0-99
#2201---#2299: Wear extent of tools 1-99 corresponding tool length H1.
#2501---#2548: G54.1--G54.48 of X axis.
#2551---#2598: G54.1--G54.48 of Y axis
#2601---#2648: G54.1--G54.48 of Z axis.
#2651---#2698: G54.1--G54.48 of the fourth axis.
#2701---#2748: G54.1--G54.48 of the fifth axis.
#3100-#3115：Input relay X0-X15
#3116-#3131：Input relay X16-X31
#3150-#3165： Input relay X50-X65
#3166-#3181：Input relay X66-X81
#3200-#3215：Output relay Y0-Y15

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
#3300-#3395：Auxiliary relay M00-M95
#3400-#3435：Auxiliary relay M100-M135
4.8.4 Arithmetic and Logical Operations
The following operations can be made in variables. Expression to the right of operator can contain
constants or variable consisting of functions or operators. The variables #j and #k in expression can be
assigned as constant value. The variable to the left can also be assigned with expression.
Table: Arithmetic and Logical Operations
Function Format Remarks
Definition #i = #j
Addition
#i = #j + #k ；
Subtraction
#i = #j - #k ；
#i = #j * #k ；
Multiplication
#i = #j / #k ；
Division
Sine
Arcsine #i = SIN（#j）；
#i = ASIN（#j）； The angle is specified with
Cosine
#i = COS（#j）； degree. 90 degrees and 30
#i = ACOS（#j）； minutes is represented by
Arc cosine
#i = TAN（#j）； 90.5 degree.
Tangent #i= ATAN（#j/#k）；
Arctangent
Square root
Absolute value
#i = SQRT（#j）；
Rounding #i = ABS（#j）；
#i = ROUND（#j）；
Top integral function #i = FIX（#j）；
#i = FUP（#j）；
FUP #i = LN（#j）；
#i = EXP（#j）；
Natural logarithm
Exponential function
OR
#i = #j OR #k ；
Logic operations is carried
Exclusive OR #i = #j XOR #k ；
out in binary.
#i = #j AND #k ；
AND
Description:
1. The unit of angle
ARCSIN # i=ASIN（#j）
ARCCOS # i =ACOS（#j）
ARCTAN（ #j/#k ）=ATAN（#j/#k）
The angular unit for the functions SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN, and ATAN is degree. For example, 90
degrees and 30 minutes is represented by 90.5 degree. The range is 0-360 degrees.
2. Natural logarithm #i=LN(#j);
3. Exponential function #i=EXP(#j)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 108
User Manual
4. Constant can replace variable #
5. ROUND Rounding function
When ROUND function is included in arithmetic operations or logic operations expression, the ROUND
function will round at the first decimal place, for example:
When performing #1=ROUND(#2), here #2=1.2345, and the value of variable #1 is 1.0.
When performing #1=ROUND(#2), here #2=1. 7345, and the value of variable #1 is 2.0.
6. During the processing of arithmetic calculation by CNC, if the absolute value of the integral
number produced by the operation is larger than the absolute value of the original number, FIX will
be made , and if it is smaller than the absolute value of the original number, FUP will be made. Pay
attention to the negative numbers. For example:
Assuming #1=1.2, #2=- 1.2
When performing #3=FUP(#1), 2.0 is assigned to #3
When performing #3= FIX (#1), 1.0 is assigned to #3
When performing #3= FUP (#2), -2.0 is assigned to #3
When performing #3= FIX (#2), -1.0 is assigned to #3
7. Order of operation
Function
Multiplication and division * / AND
Addition and subtraction + - OR XOR
Parenthesis nesting
8. Brackets [ ] are for closed expression. Note that the semicolon is used for comments.
9. Operator
Operators consists of two letters for comparing two values to decide whether they are equal or a value
is less than or greater than another. Note that inequality sign cannot be used.
Meaning of operators:
EQ equal =
NE not equal ≠
GT greater than >
GE greater than or equal to ≥
LT less than <
LE less than or equal to ≤
4.8.5 Macro Program Statement and NC Statement
The following program segments are macro program statements:
Program segment containing arithmetic or logic operation
Program segment containing control statements such as GOTO DO END
Program segment containing macro calling commands such as use G65 G66 G67 code or other G, M
code to call macro.
The program segments other than macro program segments are NC statement
When tool radius compensation is made in macro, G04 shall not be present in the section of radius
compensation;
If the end segment of macro is tool radius compensation, then the end segment shall not be a segment
without coordinate movement.
Goto and cycle
Using GOTO statement and IF statement in the program can change the flow of control. Three kinds of
goto and cycle operation are available:
a) GOTO unconditional jump
b) IF statement conditional transfer IF THEN
c) WHILE statement cycle

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
1. Unconditional transfer: GOTO statement
Jump to the program segment marked with serial number n. Serial number 1 to 99999 are legal or
error may occur. Expressions can be used to specify serial number. For example:
GOTO 1
GOTO #10
GOTOn; n: Serial number from 1 to 99999
2. Conditional transfer IF statements [<condition expression>]
IF[<condition expression>]GOTO n
Condition expression is specified after IF.
If the specified condition expression is met, jump to the program segment marked with serial number
n. If the specified condition expression is not met, the next program segment will be executed.
IF[<condition expression>]THEN
Description:
Conditional expression IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN #3=0
If conditional expression is met, the predetermined macro program statement will be executed. Only
one macro program statement is executed, if #1 and #2 have the same value, 0 is assigned to #3
Conditional expression must include operator. Operator is inserted in the middle of two variables or
between variable and constant, and brackets [ ] closed expression can replace variables
IF [conditional expression]
<Operation>
ELIF [conditional expression]
<Operation>
ELIF [conditional expression]
<Operation>
.....
ELSE
<Operation>
ENDIF
For example:1
IF [#112 EQ 0 ]
G0X#103F100
ELSE
G90 G00 A#11;
G91 A#102;
ELIF(#107 GT #105)
G01 Z-[1*(#144+#174)/2] F102;
ENDIF;
In actual use, there are following variants:
Variant 1:
IF[conditional expression]
<Operation>
ELSE
<Operation>
ENDIF
Variant 2:
IF[conditional expression]
<Operation>
ENDIF

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 110
User Manual
For example:1
IF[#200 EQ 2]
#150=10
G91X#150F100
ENDIF
For example:
The following program calculates the sum of 1~10:
#1=0 store the initial value of sum variable
#2=1 initial value of augend variable
N1 IF[#2 GT 10]GOTO 2 When augend is larger than 10, jump to N2
#1=#1+#2 Calculate sum
#2=#2+1 Next augend
GOTO 1 Jump to N1
N2 M30 End of program
Repeat the WHILE
WHILE[<Conditional Express>}DOm (m=1,2,3)
Description: Condition expression is specified after WHILE. When the specified condition is met,
execute programs from DO to END, otherwise jump to the program segment after END.
This command format applies to IF statements. The number after DO and END refers to the number
that specifies the range of program execution, and the values of the number are 1, 2, 3. If use value other
than 1, 2, 3, it may be an error. The mark number 1 to 3 can be used many times as needed in DO END cycle.
But, overlap of DO range will cause error.
When DO is specified but WHILE statement is not specified, infinitive cycle from DO to END will be
produced.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
4. Message dialog
Format: MSG(parameter) or MSG[parameter]; the parameter is information string.
Attention: The command can also be used in general NC programs (other than macro program) . After
displaying the message dialog, the system automatically switches to pause state.
4.8.6 Macro Call Command
Command G65 is different from M98, and the difference is as follows:
Command G65 can specify the argument to transfer to the macro program, however, M98 does not have
this feature;
Command G65 can change level of local variable, however, M98 can not change;Calling method of macro
program is as follows:
Macro Call : non-modal call ,use G65; and modal call, use G66, G67.
4.8.6.1 Non-modal Call G65
When G65 is specified, the called data argument of user macro program that is specified with address P
can be transferred to the user macro program. After G65, address P is used to specify the program number
of the user macro program.
Figure 4.92
When repetition is required, specify the number of repetition from 1 to 9999 after address L, and if L
value is omitted, it deems that L equals to 1.
Use independent variables to specify its value assigned to the corresponding local variables as above.
Address G, N, O, and P cannot be used in independent variable. Address that does not need to be
specified can be omitted. The local variables that correspond to omitted address are set to null. Addresses
may not be specified alphabetically but shall comply with word address format.
Levels of local variable: The nest of local variables has three levels from 0 to 3. The main program is
level 0. The level of local variable increases 1 at each time when macro program is called by G65 or G66.
The local variable of parent level is stored in CNC. When the macro program executes M99, the calling
program will be returned, and at this time, the level of local variable decreases 1 and restore the value of
local variable stored at macro program calling.
A typical program: circular bolt hole:
Prepare a macro to process a hole on a wheel circle. The radius of circumference is I; the start angle is
A; the interval is B; the number of holes is H; the center of the circle is (X, Y). The command can be specified
with absolute value or incremental value. The B shall be assigned with negative value during drilling
clockwise.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 112
User Manual
Figure 4.93
Call format: G65 P9100 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ii Aa Bb Hh；
X：Absolute value or incremental value of X coordinate of center of circle #18
Y：Absolute value or incremental value of Y coordinate of center of circle #19Z The hole depth #20
R Fast approaching point coordinates #12
F Cutting feed speed #5
I Circle radius #7
A The angle of the first hole #0
B Incremental angle (negative value is clockwise) #1
H The number of holes #6
Calling program of macro:

Absolute coordinates call
G90G54X0Y0Z100
G65P9100 X100Y50R30Z-50F500I100A0B45H5
X20Y10
X-30
M30
Relative coordinates call

G90G54X0Y0Z100
G91
G65P9100 X100Y50R30Z-50F500I100A0B45H5
X20Y10
X-30
M30
The called macro program 9100:

#3=#4003 Store G code of group 03
#27=#4014
G90
IF[#3 EQ 90] GOTO 1 Jump to N1 at G90
G53
#18=#5001+#18 Calculate X coordinate of circle center
#19=#5002+#19 Calculate Y coordinate of circle centerN1 WHILE[#6 GT 0] DO 1 Till
the remaining number of holes is 0
#25=#18+#7*COS（#0） Calculate the hole position on X axis
#26=#19+#7*SIN（#0） Calculate the hole position on Y axis
G81X#25Y#26Z#20R#12F#5 Cycle of drilling
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
#0=#0+#1 Update angle
#6=#6-1 Number of holes -1
END 1
G#3 G#27 G80 Return to G codes of original state
M99
4.8.6.2 Modal Call G66
Once G66 is given out, modal call is instructed, i.e. call macro after the program segment that is moving
along the moving axis. G67 cancels modal calls.
Figure 4.94
After G66, specify the number of program, which is modally called, by using address P. When
repetition is required, specify the number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 after address L. The data specified
by the same argument as non-modal call G65 is transferred to the macro. When cancelling G67, the
program segment after it will not perform modal call of macro.
Calling can be nested for 4 levels. It includes non-modal call G65 and modal call G66, but does not
include subprogram call M98.
During a modal call is nested in modal call, specify another G66 code to nest modal call.
Multiple macros cannot be called in a G66 program segment.
A typical program:
Figure 4.95
The operation processing program which uses macro to prepare G81 fixed cycle uses modal call.
Absolute value is used to specify all the drilling data for ease of programming.
Call format: G65 P9110 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ff Ll；
X：X coordinate of hole is specified by absolute value #18

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 114
User Manual
Y ：Y coordinate of hole is specified by absolute value #19Z ：Coordinates of Z point is specified
by absolute value #20
R ：Coordinates of R point is specified by absolute value #12F ：Cutting feed speed #5
L ：The number of repeats
Program 0001 that calls macro
G54G0X0Y0Z50
G90X100Y50
X10Y10G66POG81 Z-20R0F500
G1X20Y20
X50
Y50
X0Y80
G67
The called macro program OG81

#1=#4001 Store G00/G01
#2=#4003 Store G90/G91#3=#4109 Store cutting feed speed
#25=#5003 Store the Z coordinate at drilling start
G0G90X#18Y#19 Fixed point on XY plane
Z#12 Positioning to point R
G1Z#20F#5 Cutting feed to Z point
IF[#4010 EQ 98] GOTO 1 Return to point 1
G0Z#12 Positioning to point R
GOTO 2
N1 G0Z#25 Positioning to point 1
N2 G#1 G#2 F#3 Restore modal information
M99
Attention:
1. Arithmetic expressions of user macro program can use square brackets [ ], also can use or not use
parentheses.
For example: X[50*#290+SIN[40*[24+#300]]] and X[50*#290+SIN(40*(24+#300))] have the same
effect.
[ ] must be used in following two circumstances:
1) Conditional expression
For example:IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN #3=02) When the address operator #, X, Y, Z, A, B, N, G, M, R, I, J, K, Q,
L, P and so on is followed by an arithmetic expression, the expression should be enclosed by [ ].
For example: #[23+23*SIN（45）]
X[TAN（34+#12）+5]
Parentheses ( ) or [ ] can be used in other circumstances.
2. The logic comparison of conditional expression is only accurate to three digits after the decimal point
For example: IF [#120 EQ 23.6548] THENIf #120=23.6542, because only correct to three decimal
places,
So the system deems that #120 and 23.6548 are equal.
3. the length of a single macro program cannot exceed 500 lines, not including the submacro program.
4. Rotation commands G68/G69 and fixed cycle commands can be used in macro programs, but mirroring
and scaling commands can't be used.
Rotation command format: G68 X_ Y_ R_ Establish rotation (modal)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
X_ Y_ Specify the center of rotation, R specifies the angle of rotation
G69 Cancel the rotation (modal, initial state)
5. Macro variables #101---#124 are occupied by system function. Users shall not use them.
6. When using G65/G66 to call a macro program, it'd better to return to the starting point of the macro after
the macro is completed.
7. Macro call and sub-macro call use G65. M98 subprogram call shall not be used in macro.
8. When calling a sub-macro, a space must be present between the filename of sub-macro that is specified
by address P and the following codes.
9. Workpiece coordinates and machine tool coordinates can be reset in macro.
M317 Reset the workpiece coordinates of X axis
M318 Reset the workpiece coordinates of Y axis
M319 Reset the workpiece coordinates of Z axis
M320 Reset all the workpiece coordinates of X, Y, Z, A, B axis
M417 Reset the machine tool coordinates of X axis
M418 Reset the machine tool coordinates of Y axis
M419 Reset the machine tool coordinates of Z axis
M420 Reset all the machine tool coordinates of X, Y, Z, A, B axis
10. Tool change can be made in macro.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 116
User Manual
Chapter 5 Parameters
5.1 Parameters
On the plane, press the “Parameter” key to go into the parameter setting menu. Press the “Parameter”
key once to go into the parameter interface which includes “User Parameter”, “Speed”, “Coordinate System”,
“Macro Variable”, “Axis Parameter”, “Comprehensive Parameter”, “Password”, “Return” and other
parameters; press the “Parameter” key twice to go into the pitch error compensation interface where there
are “X-axis”, “Y-axis”, “Z-axis”, “A-axis”, “B-axis”, “Clear”, “Return” and other parameters; classify these
parameters under this interface. Press the key corresponding to the parameter setting menu to enter the
setting interface of such parameter.
First Screen- Parameter Interface
Second Screen- Pitch Error Compensation Interface

Fig. 5.1 Parameter Interface=0,1
First Screen-Parameter Interface:
“User Parameter” is applied to such parameters that are frequently used for change and adjustment
by users during machining, i.e. basic functional parameters.
“Speed” is used to set parameters of each axis relating to the speed.
“Coordinate System” is used to set coordinates of work-piece coordinate system G54-G59 in the
machine coordinate system.
“Macro Variable” is used to set values of No. 30-No. 190 macro variable parameters.
“Axis Parameter” is used to set compensation, limitation, function setting and other parameters
related to each axis.
“Comprehensive Parameter” is used to set some of miscellaneous parameters that are not easily
categorized (excluding the above parameters).
“Password” is used to set parameters concerning the system operation authority.
Second Screen-Pitch Error Compensation Interface:
“X-axis”, “Y-axis”, “Z-axis”, “A-axis” and “B-axis” are used to set pitch error compensation for X, Y, Z, A
and B axes and to set parameters related to pitch error of each axis.
“Testing Program” is used for automatic generation of pitch error compensation.
“Clear” is to clear the current pitch error compensation.
5.2 Description on parameters

For the convenience of searching parameters, parameters are classified into different categories
according to their characteristics including User Parameter, Speed Parameter, Coordinate System, Marco
Variable Parameter, Axis Parameter and Comprehensive Parameter.
5.2.1 User Parameter
User Parameter is a category of basic function parameters that are frequently used in the
system.
On the parameter interface, press the function softkey (F1) “User Parameter” to go into the user
parameter setting interface, as shown in Fig. 5.2:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig. 5.2 User Parameter

List of user parameters:
1,workpiece machined number setting
2,M20 program automatic running times
(negative means unlimited times)
3,G73 retraction value"d"(mm)
4,G83 retraction value"d"(mm)
5,direction of G76 offset Q
(take G17 plane as example)(1:+X,2:-X,3:+Y,4:-Y)
6,direction of G87 offset Q
(G17 as example)(1:+X,2:-X,3:+Y,4:-Y)
7,orient stop angle of boring cycle(0.1degree)
8,chip removal tapping G84G74(0:high speed;8:normal)
9,Retract amount d for chip removal tapping G84G74 (mm)
28,Spindle rotation needed for program running(0- Yes, 90-No)
30,G00 override adjusted independently? (88- Yes, 0-No)
31,hand soft limit valid without zero return(88:yes;0:no)
32,any hint for spindle top/low gear(88:yes;0:no)
33,apply intervention switch(88:yes;0:no)
34,make soft limit invalid(X4,Z16,Y8,A32,B64)
35,default coordinate system(4-9 corresponding G54-G59,other G53)
36,can G92 amend G54-G59(88:yes;0:no)
37,Lub and cool keys valid in auto mode(1:yes;0:no)
38,SP rotation interlock with tool unclamp(1:yes;0:no)
39,zero return method in start and program run
(1:no need;0:hint;8:force;9:super forcing )
40,G31 checking inputs(valid+300;invalid+400)
41,G31_X
42,G31_Y
43,G31_Z
44,G31_A
45,G31_B
51,edit program serial number increment
52-0,"1":Jog button valid in spindle rotation

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 118
User Manual
52-1,"1":clear workpiece number as start-up
52-2,"1":insert space when editing program
52-3,"1":twist invention switch to middle gear and press"ESC"or"STOP"button will exit program,but not
stop spindle rotation and cool output
52-4,"1":press"ESC"or"STOP"button twice will exit program,spindle rotation and cooling output
52-5,"1":will not stop spindle rotation and cool output when press RESET button
52-6,"1":When execute G00,all axes run at its speed independently, it's non-linear track running
52-8,"1":system with ferroelectric,will save current chuck(spindle tool clamp/unclamp)status M10/M11
52-9,"1":midification of tool setting and Offset adopt old mode,otherwise adopt other operation mode
52-10,"1":arrange row number when press"ENTER"or"Block Dele"button in program editing
52-11,"1":1st spindle channel output via 2nd spindle,2nd spindle invalid
52-12,"1":Shield program block skip function
52-13,"1":Shield Zero button function on subpanel
52-15,"1":Show tool offset as ware extent(cumulative compensation)
52-17,"1":use S command change spindle manual speed
53,Auto calculation of work number("1":yes;"0":no)
54-1,1:X-axis is floating zero
54-2,1:C/Y-axis is floating zero
54-3,1:Z-axis is floating zero
54-4,1:4th-axis is floating zero
54-5,1:5th-axis is floating zero
55,Machine coordinates setting when X-axis is floating zero
56,Machine coordinates setting when Y(C)-axis is floating zero
57,Machine coordinates setting when Z-axis is floating zero
58,Machine coordinates setting when 4-axis is floating zero
59,Machine coordinates setting when 5-axis is floating zero
60,G01G02G03 speed at idle running(mm/min)[>10]
62,handwheel G00 speed in auto run mode mm/min[>10]
63,handwheel acceleration in auto run mode(mm/min)/s[>500]
64,handwheel stop speed(mm/min)[>18]
66,Delay between program blocks(ms)[>10]
Param#P107G0=
67,Delay after G00(ms)[>10]
100,Set LCD brightness
101,Set system time(Y-M-D-H-M)
102,Restore factory parameter setting
103,Interface display color invert
104,Speed limit of opening protection door(mm/min)[>10]
300,Graphic display area("8"-enable)
301,Graphic display area of X-axis negative terminal
302,Graphic display area of X-axis positive terminal
303,Graphic display area of Y-axis negative terminal
304,Graphic display area of Y-axis positive terminal
305,Graphic display area of Z-axis negative terminal
306,Graphic display area of Z-axis positive terminal
307,Max.waiting time of waiting instruction(ms)[>=10 valid]
308,Start at arbitary line[8:locate to terminal point of last section firstly]
309,Feeding speed in tapping retraction(mm/min)[>=60 valid]

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
312,LED refresh frequency(12,25)
313,Coordinate keys reverse on subpanel(+4:X;+8:Y;+16:Z;+32:4;+64:5)
314,Time from spindle instruction speed change to fluctuation detection(ms)
315,Allowable rate of spindle speed fluctuation detection(0.1%)[>=10 valid]
315a,Max.waiting time for stable spindle revolution in threading[>9](ms)
316,Max. radius value based on arc speed clamp(um)[>5 valid]
317,The upper limit based on arc speed clamp(mm/min)
318,The lower limit based on arc speed clamp(mm/min)
319,The initial speed of handwheel in auto mode(mm/min)[>5]
320,Handwheel in auto mode[+4 rotation speed decide moving speed;+8 reverse and back
321,bit parameter
Param#P166G0=
322,In follow tapping,the spindle speed as lifting tool(rpm)[>1]
323,Does rotary axis move according to nearest distance principle[X4;Y8;Z16;A32;B64]
324,Set zero return sequence of axes(>9)
325,The error range of arc R value(um)[>5]
326,Lift tool before spindle CCW in follow tapping(um)[10-5000]
327,spindle backlash offset in tapping(pulse number)
400,DXF file conversion requirement[1:sequence,4:sequence by tool starting point,8:no sequence]
401,X coordinate of starting point for DXF file conversion[lathe:Z](mm)
402,Y coordinate of starting point for DXF file conversion[lathe:X]
Commands for user parameters
NO.1 Workpiece machined number setting
Used to set the displayed number of parts currently machined. When this parameter is set, the
"number of parts" in the lower right corner of the system screen will be refreshed to the set number, which
will increase as the number of times for program running rises.
Figure 5.3
NO.2 M20 program automatic running times
Used to set the number of times for cyclical execution of program when the M20 command is used in the
program. When this parameter is negative, it means an infinite loop.
NO.3 G73 retraction value"d"(mm)
Used to set the size of retract amount d at high-speed deep hole drilling cycle G73. Unit: mm (millimeter).
NO.4 G83 retraction value"d"(mm)
Used to set the size of retract amount d at chip removal drilling cycle G83. Unit: mm (millimeter)
NO.5 direction of G76 offset Q (take G17 plane as example)(1:+X,2:-X,3:+Y,4:-Y)
Used to set the offset direction of the offset Q of the fine boring cycle G76. The coordinate axes and
directions corresponding to the set value vary with the different planes, as shown in the following table:
NO.5 set parameter Offset direction of
Plane
value offset Q for G76
1 +X
G17 2 -X
3 +Y
4 -Y
1 +Z
G18
2 -Z

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 120
User Manual
3 +X
4 -X
1 +Y
2 -Y
G19
3 +Z
4 -Z
NO.6 direction of G87 offset Q (G17 as example)(1:+X,2:-X,3:+Y,4:-Y)
Used to set the offset direction of the offset Q of the back boring cycle G87. The coordinate axes and
directions corresponding to the set value vary with the different planes, as shown in the following table:
NO.6 set parameter Offset direction of
Plane
value offset Q for G87
1 +X
G17 2 -X
3 +Y
4 -Y
1 +Z
2 -Z
G18
3 +X
4 -X
1 +Y
2 -Y
G19
3 +Z
4 -Z
NO.7 orient stop angle of boring cycle(0.1degree)
Used to set the spindle stop angle after boring is completed when the boring fixed cycle command is
executed to ensure that the tool does not scratch the workpiece. Unit: 0.1 degrees; set value range: 0-3600.
NO.8 Chip removal and tapping G84G74
In the G84G74 chip removal tapping machining; when this parameter is set to 0, it indicates the high-speed
chip removal; when it is set to 8, it means the ordinary chip removal.
NO.9 Retract amount d for chip removal tapping G84G74 (mm)
Used to set the size of retract amount d at high-speed chip removal tapping cycle G84G74. Unit: mm
(millimeter)
NO.28 Is spindle rotation needed for program running? (0- Yes, 90-No)
Spindle rotation and program run are interlocked. It is used to set whether spindle running status is
detected when the program runs. Namely, when this value is set to 0, it is needed to detect the spindle
rotation when the program runs; when this value is set to 90, it is not needed to detect the spindle running
status when the program runs.
NO.30 Is G00 override adjusted independently? (88- Yes, 0-No)
Used to set override of G00 speed. When the value is set to 88, it indicates independent adjustment, which
indicates that G00 override is adjusted by Pgup and Pgdn. When it is set to 0, it indicates that the G00 speed
override and the machining speed override are adjusted via feed override.
NO.31 hand soft limit valid without zero return
Used to set the relation between reference point return and software limitNamely, when the value is set to
88, the software limit is valid even if there is no reference point return; when this parameter is set to 0, the
software limit function is invalid when there is no reference point return.
Special Attention: This parameter is based on the user's application, but accident may be caused by
improper setting or operation. Please pay attention at setting.
NO.32 any hint for spindle top/low gear? (88- Yes, 0-No)
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Used to set whether there is an automatic prompt function at spindle shift. When the value is set to 88, it
means when the speed and gear do not match at the automatic shift,the system automatically give a prompt;
when the value is set 0, it means the system does not judge whether the speed and gear match with each
other.
NO.33 Is an intervention switch used? (88- Yes, 0-No)
When this parameter is set to 88, it means using the intervention switch; when it is set to 0, it indicates that
the intervention switch is not used.
NO.34 Make the soft limit invalid（X4，Z16，Y8，A32，B64，+128）
Used to set whether the software limit function is valid.
When this parameter is set to 0, it means the software limit is valid;
When this parameter is set to +4, it means that the X axis software limit function is invalid;
When this parameter is set to +16, it means that the Z axis software limit function is invalid;
When this parameter is set to +8, it means that the Y axis software limit function is invalid;
When this parameter is set to +32, it means that the A axis software limit function is invalid;
When this parameter is set to +64, it means that the B axis software limit function is invalid;
When this parameter is set to +128, it means that the software limit is active during reference point return;
otherwise the software limit does not work during zero return.
To set software limit function of the corresponding axes as invalid, you only need to add the corresponding
values. For example, To set oftware limit function of the X and Z axes as is invalid, set value 20 (4 + 16).
Note: The setting of this parameter depends on the user's needs. Normally, it is recommended to set the parameter to be
valid, in order to prevent equipment damages caused by over-travel. It should be noted that in order to achieve
the role of software limit, in addition to setting this parameter as valid, limit travel for each axis shall be set in the
user parameter.
Special Attention: 1. The setting of the parameter is related to the use by the users. Please pay special
attention when setting. improper setting may cause machine failure or accident.
NO.35 System default coordinate system (4-9 corresponding to G54-G59, others- G53)
3-9 corresponding to G53-G59; 10-57 corresponding to G54.1-48; others-saving upon power-off; when it is
set to 99, it means maintaining the current coordinate system state in running the program.
When the program is run, if no coordinate system is specified in the program, the workpiece coordinate
system of the program is determined by the system default coordinate system
For example: When it is set to 4, it means the default coordinate system is G54.
The program code X34Y56 indicates running to coordinate point X34Y56 in the G54 workpiece coordinate
system.
NO.36 Can G92 change G54-G59? (800- Yes, 0-No)
When this parameter is set to 800, G92 will modify the current workpiece coordinate system at program
machining. When it is set to 0, the current workpiece coordinate system will not be modified.
NO.37 Are lubrication and cooling keys valid in auto state(1- Yes, 0-No)
Used to set whether the lubrication and cooling keys are valid in the automatic state. When this parameter
is set to 0, it means that it is invalid. When it is set to 1, it means that it is valid.
The setting of this parameter is related to the mode of operation. When they are set as valid, the operator
can control the valid state of lubrication and cooling at the time of automatic operation to meet the
requirements of the machining process.
NO.38 Are spindle rotation and tool unclamping interlocked (1 - partly interlocked, 8 - fully interlocked,
0 - No)
Used to set whether the spindle rotation and tool unclamping are interlocked; when this parameter is set to
0, it means that spindle tool unclamping/clamping has no relation to the spindle rotation and that they are
not interlocked; 1 means only command M03 / M04 is interlocked with spindle tool unclamping/clamping;

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 122
User Manual
8 means command M03 / M04 and the encoder detection on spindle rotation are interlocked with the
spindle tool unclamping/clamping.
The setting of this parameter is related to the configuration of the machine tool and the user's application.
It is strongly recommended that the interlock should be set from a safety point of view.
Note: 150i CNC system should also modify the relevant part of the PLC.
NO.39 Request of return to zero for startup and running programs
Used to set startup reference point return processing mode of the system. The system has four types of
processing modes on startup reference point return:
When it is set to 1, the system does not make any prompts and restrictions on reference point return after
each startup.
When it is set 0, it indicates the prompt mode: After each startup, a dialog box will pop up to prompt the
operator for reference point return operation, and then the system does not make any restrictions.
When it is set to 8, it indicates the mandatory mode: After each startup, program running system will show
a dialog box to prompt the operator for reference point return operation, and if the reference point return
operation is not made before automatic running, the system will prompt "feed axis does not return to
reference point" and will not execute the program.
When it is set to 9, it indicates the super mandatory mode: After each start, the feed axis moving system will
show a dialog box to prompt the operator for reference point return operation and if the reference point
return operation is not made, the system will prompt“feed axis does not return to reference point” and will
not make motion.
Special Attention: The setting of this parameter is related to the machine tool equipment
configuration. If the machine tool does not have the reference point switch, it is set to other
value. If this function is available, it is recommended to set it to 8 or 9 to prevent the device
malfunction caused by not returning to the reference point .
NO.40 Input point for G31 testing
When the parameter value is 300, the input point signal of the skip function is detected; when the value is
set to 400, the input point signal of the skip function is not detected.
NO.41 G31_X
NO.42 G31_Y
NO.43 G31_Z
NO.44 G31_A
NO.45 G31_B
NO.41 ~ NO.45 parameters for the skip function.
NO.51 Incerment for sequence number for programs
This parameter is used to set the incremental value of the program serial number.
NO.52
52-0,1-When the spindle is running, pressing the spindle jog key is still valid.
52-1,1-Clearing the number of parts for machining at startup.
52-2,1-Spaces are automatically inserted in editing program
52-3,1-After the intervention switch is moved to the middle position, exit from program running status by
pressing "ESC" key or stop key does not stop spindle rotation and cooling output
52-4,1-Exit from program running status by pressing "ESC" key or stop key twice stops spindle rotation and
cooling output
52-5,1-Pressing the reset key does not stop spindle rotation and cooling output
52-6,1-When G00 command is executed, each axis runs independently at its own speed in a nonlinear path
52-8, 1-Saving the current chuck(or spindle tool unclamping/clamping) status M10/M11 at power-off for
the system with ferroelecteicity.
52-9,1-The old mode is adopted for tool setting and lathe tool radius compensation modification; otherwise,

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
another operating mode is adopted.
52-10, 1-Line numbers are automatically arranged when you press the Enter key or delete a block in
editing programs.
52-11, 1-Spindle output channel for the first axis is output from the second spindle and the second spindle
is invalid.
52-12, 1-Shielding block skip function (the function to skip the block with'/' or '(' in front)
52-13, 1- Shielding the function of Return-to-Zero key on the subpanel
52-15, 1-The tool radius compensation is displayed as wear loss (i.e. cumulative compensation) and cleared
after tool setting.
52-17,1 indicates S command running by the program will change manual spindle speed.
NO.53 Automatic statistics for number of parts for machining (1-Yes, 0-No)
When it is set to 1, the system will automatically make statistics on the number of parts for machining;
when it is set to 0, can only executing M87 command increase the number of parts for machining by 1.
NO.54 Floating zero setting
54-1,1-X-axis is floating zero.
54-2,1-Y-axis is floating zero.
54-3,1-Z-axis is floating zero.
54-4,1-fourth-axis is floating zero.
54-5,1-fifth-axis is floating zero.
NO.55 Machine coordinate setting when X-axis is floating zero
This parameter is used to set the X-axis coordinate value of the floating zero point at the current machine
tool stop position; the startup zero return means the return to the floating zero position.
When the mechanical zero is not used, the floating zero is set; when the zero return operation is made, the
system will quickly locate to the zero position.
NO.56 Machine coordinate setting when Y-axis is floating zero
This parameter is used to set the Y-axis coordinate value of the floating zero point at the current machine
NO.57 Machine coordinate setting when Y-axis is floating zero
This parameter is used to set the Z-axis coordinate value of the floating zero point at the current machine
NO.58 Machine coordinate setting when the fourth-axis is floating zero
This parameter is used to set the fourth-axis coordinate value of the floating zero point at the current
machine tool stop position; the startup zero return means the return to the floating zero position.
NO.59 Machine coordinate setting when the fifth-axis is floating zero
This parameter is used to set the fifth-axis coordinate value of the floating zero point at the current
machine tool stop position; the startup zero return means the return to the floating zero position.
Note: The floating zero NO.55-NO.59 parameters are not allowed to be modified during program running.
NO.60 Speed for G01G02G03 dry running(mm/min)[>10]
When the program is in the dry running state, G00 will still run according to G00 speed set. When the
parameter is for dry running, and set value for G01G02G03 speed is over 10, the G01G02G03 will run

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 124
User Manual
according to the parameter value. Otherwise, the G01G02G03 will still run according to the programmed F
speed value.
Note: Thread machining and tapping always run at the normal speed specified by the program.
NO.62 Speed for handwheel auto-running G00 mm/min[>10]
G00 speed setting for handwheel auto-run. When it is more than 10mm/min, this value is valid.
NO.63, Acceleration for handwheel auto-running(mm/min)/s[>500]
For handwheel feed during auto-run, when the parameter is greater than 500, the acceleration will call this
parameter value.
NO.64, Handwheel stop speed(mm/min)[>18]
Used to adjust the handwheel lag time.The greater the parameter value is, the more quickly the manual
handwheel stops.
NO.66 Inter-block delay (ms)[>10]
Delay is made between executions of G1G2G3 commands of coordinates and in other cases, there is no
delay. When the parameter is set to more than 10ms, it is valid , the maximum set value is 500ms.
NO.67,Delay after G00 (ms)[>10]
Used to set the delay time for executing the program block for rapid G00 moving of coordinates. The
maximum set value is 500ms.
NO.100 LCD brightness adjustment
Used to adjust the brightness of LCD.In the dialog box corresponding to this parameter: PgUP for brightness
increase, PgDN for brightness decrease, Home for reset to default brightness.
NO.101 Setting system time (HH:MM, on DD/MM/YYYY).
Used to modify the system date and time; after the setting, the system will use this time as the basis, make
timekeeping according to the internal clock, and display it in the upper right corner of the system screen.
The setting method is as below:
In the user parameter interface, select NO.101 parameter with the cursor; press Enter key to show a dialog
box as shown in Figure 5.4; then respectively, enter the year, month, day, hour and minute for setting; and
then press the Enter for confirmation; e.g., for 09:50 on August 4, 2008, enter 2008-8-4-09-50 in the dialog
box, press Enter for confirmation.
Figure 5.4=2
NO.102 Factory reset
Set the factory parameter to the current parameter. When the parameter is disturbed during debugging,
use this parameter to set the factory parameter to the current parameter.
Note: After executing the restoration to factory parameters , the previous parameters will be overwritten.
NO.103 Interface color inversion [8-inversion]
The system interface has two colors for display; one background is gray and the other background is black;
when this parameter is set to 8, display switching can be made for color inversion; after the color inversion,
it is needed to start the system once again.
NO.104. Limited speed with protective door opened (mm/min)[>10].
The maximum speed limit after the protective door is opened. When the set value is more than 10mm/min,
it is valid. When the protection door is opened, there is an information prompt. That the auxiliary relay M10
is valid indicates that the protective door is open.
NO.300,Enable graphic display area (8-Enable)
When this parameter is set to 8, it means enabling the graphic display area limit.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
When it is set to other values, it means not enabling the graphic display area limit. It is usually set in
positive and negative limit machine coordinates of the machine tool.
NO.301,X-axis negative end of graphic display area
This parameter is used to set the maximum value of the X-axis negative end of the graphic display area,
which is usually set in negative limit machine coordinates of the machine tool.
NO.302, X-axis positive end of graphic display area
This parameter is used to set the maximum value of the X-axis positive end of the graphic display area,
which is usually set in positive limit machine coordinates of the machine tool.
NO.301, Y-axis negative end of graphic display area
This parameter is used to set the maximum value of the Y-axis negative end of the graphic display area,
NO.302, Y-axis positive end of graphic display area
This parameter is used to set the maximum value of the Y-axis positive end of the graphic display area,
NO.305, Z-axis negative end of graphic display area
This parameter is used to set the maximum value of the Z-axis negative end of the graphic display area,
NO.306, Z-axis positive end of graphic display area
This parameter is used to set the maximum value of the Z-axis positive end of the graphic display area,
NO.307,Maximum waiting time of waiting command (ms)[>=10 valid]
Used to set WAT input signal waiting time; this parameter is valid when it set to value greater than or equal
to 10ms.
NO.308, Any line start [8-Moving to coordinates of end point of the previous block]
When this parameter is set to 8, it indicate that the system moves to the end point coordinates of the
previous line at the default set speed of NO.6: G01/G02/G03 in the speed parameter when any line is
started.
NO.309, Feed speed at retract for rigid tapping(mm/min)[>=60 valid].
Speed setting for retract for rigid tapping. When the value is more than 60mm/min, the retract is made
according to the set parameter.
NO.312 , LCD refresh frequency (12,25).
150i series system is configured with two LCD displays. When the system LCD flashes at startup, modify the
parameters to configure LCD refresh frequency. 12 and 25 respectively indicate different refresh
frequencies.
NO.313,Coordinate key reverse on the subpanel (+4-X; +8-Y; +16-Z; +32-4; +64-5)
+4：Means X-axis key direction reverse
+8：Means Y-axis key direction reverse
+16：Means Z-axis key direction reverse
+32：Means fourth-axis key direction reverse
+64：Means fifth-axis key direction reverse
NO.314，Time from spindle command speed change to fluctuation detection (ms)
This parameter indicates that the spindle speed fluctuation can only be detected after waiting for the
parameter time after executing the M03/M04 or S command.
NO.315，Allowance for spindle speed fluctuation detection (0.1%)[>=10 valid]
Allowable spindle fluctuation range; e.g. when the spindle speed is 2000r / min and the value is set to 20,
the allowable fluctuations of his value is 40r / min.
NO.315a，Maximum waiting time for stable spindle speed in thread machining[>9](ms)
Maximum waiting time for stable spindle speed in thread machining; it is valid when over 9ms.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 126
User Manual
NO.316，Maximum radius for arc speed restraint (um)[>5 valid]
This parameter is used to set the arc maximum radius restraint in the program. After setting, for the radius
value less than or equal to the set value, its machining speed is limited by the 317 and 318 parameter
values.
NO.317，Upper limit for arc speed restraint(mm/min)
When the maximum radius for arc speed restraint is set in No. 316, the arc limited speed is proportional to
the speed set in this parameter in the program. The maximum speed does not exceed the value set in this
parameter; the minimum speed is not lower than 318 limited speed.
NO.318，Lower limit for arc speed restraint(mm/min)
Note: "316, Maximum radius for arc speed restraint (um)[>5 valid]" is corresponding to "317, Upper
limit for arc speed restraint (mm/min)"; for arc radius less than No. 317 parameter value, speed limit is
scaled down, but the minimum is not less than the No. 318 parameter value
NO.319,Initial speed for handwheel auto-running(mm/min)[>5]
Initial speed setting for handwheel auto-run; it is valid when greater than 5.
NO.320,Handwheel auto-running [+4 fast or slow rotation determines the speed, +8 reverse and
backing]
+4 indicates fast or slow rotation determines the speed for handwheel auto-run.
+8 indicates rotation reverse and backing running for handwheel auto-run; the forward rotation is
normally executed according to the program.
NO.321, Position parameter
+1(D0) indicates: checking whether the current tool number of lathe is correct at any time. If there is
any error, an alarm will be immediately given.
+2(D1) indicates:allowing the G00 block to have the F command.
+4(D2) indicates:after the feed is held, the program continues without running back to the pause point.
+8(D3) indicates:mode 2 manual return to zero operation. In this mode, press the "return to zero" key
to switch to the return to zero mode, and then press the cursor key for the manual coordinate axis running
to achieve zero return.
+64(D6) indicates:auxiliary relay M124-M127 are determined by the current spindle speed gear.
+128(D7) indicates:the speed calculation of the tire cutting plotter is made in the old way.
+256(D8) indicates:MDI interface adopts the original mode.
+512(D9) indicates:M20 still counts while the program exits midway
+1024(D10) indicates:when you just make a start and go into the manual state, the initial state is the
manual pulse mode.
+2048(D11) indicates:when the C-axis of the lathe does not return to zero, no alarm is given when
C-axis runs.
+4096(D12) indicates:feed axis band/override switch adopts Gray code.
+8192(D13) indicates:spindle band/override switch adopts Gray code.
+16384 (D14) indicates:input signal for feed and spindle band/override switch is filtered.
+32768(D15) indicates:the macro variable is defined the original way; otherwise the mode compatible
with FUNAC shall be used.
+65536(D16) indicates:pitch error compensation is made in the original way; otherwise, a new evenly
distributed compensation is adopted.
+262144(D18) indicates:returning to the original G00/G01 mode after executing the fixed cycle
command; otherwise, always returning to G01 state.
NO.322,Spindle speed at tapping retract (rpm)[>1]
Used to set the speed to which you wait for the spindle speed to decreases for reversing the spindle
NO.323,Is the rotating axis not moving at the nearest distance
+4 indicates when the X axis is the rotary axis, it does not move at close range.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
+8 indicates when the Y axis is the rotary axis, it does not move at close range.
+16 indicates when the Z axis is the rotary axis, it does not move at close range.
+32 indicates when the A axis is the rotary axis, it does not move at close range.
+64 indicates when the B axis is the rotary axis, it does not move at close range.
NO.324,Setting the sequence of axes for auto return-to-zero(>9)
The order of zero return is represented the input digits from left to right and the rightmost digit must be 0.
The number corresponding to each axis : 1-X axis; 2-Y axis; 3-Z axis; 4- the fourth axis;
5- the fifth axis.
For example:
The input 31240 represents the order of zero return Z->X->Y->A.
The input 2130 represents the order of zero turn Y->X->Z.
NO.325,Error range for arc R value (um)[>5]
When this parameter is set, where the arc command can not form a circle and there is a certain error in the
equation, execution can be made within the range of the set parameter.
NO.326,Retract before reverse of tapping spindle (um)[10-5000]
Setting for distance for retract before reverse of tapping spindle
NO.327, Spindle backlash compensation at tapping (pulses)
Spindle backlash compensation at tapping, which is set as pulses
5.2.2 Speed
To ensure that the feed motor (machine tool table) operates in a reliable range and guarantee its
operation characteristics, the system can set the speed-related parameters such as speed and acceleration.
In the parameter setting menu interface, press the "speed" softkey to enter the speed parameter
setting interface; move the cursor up and down to select the parameter currently needed to be modified;
press the Enter key to show the input dialog box, and then input the value. It is shown in Fig. 5.5:
Figure 5.5 Speed parameter setting

List of speed parameters:
1. X axis G00 speed (mm/min)
2. Y axis G00 speed (mm/min)
3. Z axis G00 speed (mm/min)
4.Fourth axis G00 speed (mm/min)
5.Fifth axis G00 speed (mm/min)
6. G01/G02/G03 default speed （mm/min）
7. Simulation speed（mm/min）
8. X axis acceleration and deceleration （（mm/min）/s）
9. Y axis acceleration and deceleration （（mm/min）/s）
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 128
User Manual
10. Z axis acceleration and deceleration （（mm/min）/s）
11. Fourth axis acceleration and deceleration （（mm/min）/s）
12. Fifth axis acceleration and deceleration （（mm/min）/s）
15. Handwheel acceleration （12--5000）
16. Auto run acceleration and deceleration （500-32000）
17. Forward speed for X axis return to reference point（mm/min）
18. Forward speed for Y axis return to reference point（mm/min）
19. Forward speed for Z axis return to reference point（mm/min）
20. Forward speed for fourth axis return to reference point（mm/min）
21. Forward speed for fifth axis return to reference point（mm/min）
22. Reverse speed for X axis return to reference point （mm/min）
23. Reverse speed for Y axis return to reference point（mm/min）
24. Reverse speed for Z axis return to reference point（mm/min）
25. Reverse speed for fourth axis return to reference point（mm/min）
26. Reverse speed for fifth axis return to reference point（mm/min）
27. Maximum speed for quickly stopping the feed axis（mm/min）
28. Maximum feed speed for manual run（mm/min）
29. Maximum feed speed for auto run（mm/min）
30. Maximum speed for Z axis handwheel（mm/min）
31. Maximum speed for X, Y(c) and 4th axes handwheels （mm/min）
32. Initial speed for the feed axis running （mm/min）
33. Speed jump variable for continuous path（mm/min）
34. Reverse deceleration end speed during program running（mm/min）
35. Is the speed processing function enabled (76-Yes, 0-No)
36. Manual speed of feed axis （mm/min）
100. Manual speed of spindle（rpm）
101. Maximum speed of spindle at the highest gear （rpm）
102. Maximum speed of spindle at lower gear (the second gear)（rpm）
103. Maximum speed of spindle at the third gear（rpm）
104. Maximum speed of spindle at the fourth gear（rpm）
105. Maximum speed of the second spindle（rpm）
106. Acceleration (deceleration) spindle pulse control（（mm/min）/s）
107. Are 5th-8th gears of spindle closed ? (1-Yes, 0-No)
108. Maximum speed of spindle at the fifth gear(rpm)
109. Maximum speed of spindle at the sixth gear(rpm)
110.Maximum speed of spindle at the seventh gear(rpm)
111. Maximum speed of spindle at the eighth gear(rpm)
120. RS232 serial communication rate
121. Maximum speed of Y axis handwheel (mm/min) [>=50, valid]
122. Maximum speed of 4th axis handwheel (mm/min) [>=50, valid]
123. Maximum speed of 5th axis handwheel (mm/min) [>=50, valid]
125. Servo motor thread cycle X axis retraction speed override (0.1 times)
126. Stepping motor thread cycle X - axis retract mode(1,2)
127. Stepping motor thread cycle X axis retract takeoff speed(mm/min)
128. Stepping motor thread cycle X axis maximum retract speed(mm/min)
129. Initial speed for G00 and manual fast-moving (mm/min)[>5]
201. Manual maximum speed of X axis (mm/min)[>=50]
202. Manual maximum speed of Y axis (mm/min)[>=50]

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
203. Manual maximum speed of Z axis (mm/min)[>=50]
204. Manual maximum speed of fourth axis(mm/min)[>=50]
205. Manual maximum speed of fifth axis (mm/min)[>=50]
300. Manual speed of the second spindle (r/min)
400. Feed axis acceleration and deceleration curve type (8-S type, others- linear type)
401.Initial acceleration of the S type acceleration and deceleration curves . ((mm/min)/s)[>=10]
402. Jerk of the S type acceleration and deceleration curves (((mm/min)/s)/2ms)[>=10]
403.Maximum acceleration of the S type acceleration and deceleration curves((mm/min)/s)[>=500]
404. Jump available for continuous path of X axis(mm/min)[>1]
405. Jump available for continuous path of Y axis(mm/min)[>1]
406. Jump available for continuous path of Z axis(mm/min)[>1]
407. Jump available for continuous path of fourth axis(mm/min)[>1]
408. Jump available for continuous path of fifth axis(mm/min)[>1]
500.Starting smoothing function (+4 manual; +8 handwheel; +16 automatic; +32 thread)
501.Manual smoothing time constant[2-50]
502.Handwheel smoothing time constant[2-50]
503.Auto smoothing time constant [2-50]
504.Thread smoothing time constant[2-50]
520.Maximum speed of third axis(rpm)
521. Maximum speed of fourth axis(rpm)
522.Manual speed of third axis (rpm)
523.Manual speed of fourth axis (rpm)
commands for speed parameters:
NO.1 X axis G00 speed , unit:mm/min
Dry running speed (G00 command called speed) of X axis in auto-run Initial value: 10000, maximum value:
30000.
NO.2 Y axis G00 speed , unit:mm/min
Dry running speed (G00 command called speed) of Y axis in auto-run Initial value: 10000, maximum value:
30000.
NO.3 Z axis G00 speed , unit:mm/min
Dry running speed (G00 command called speed) of Z axis in auto-run Initial value: 10000, maximum value:
30000.
NO.4 Fourth axis G00 speed , unit:mm/min or deg/min
Dry running speed (G00 command called speed) of fourth axis in auto-run Initial value: 10000, maximum
value: 30000.
NO.5 Fifth axis G00 speed , unit:mm/min or deg/min
Dry running speed (G00 command called speed) of fifth axis in auto-run Initial value: 10000, maximum
value: 30000.
NO.6 G01/G02/G03 default speed , unit:mm/min
The speed that the command calls during auto run, when the first interpolation command (G01/G02/G03)
in the program has no given speed, Initial value: 2000, maximum value: 5000.
NO.7 Simulation speed , unit:mm/min
The speed for the program dry running during simulation.Initial value: 20000, maximum value: 30000.
NO.8 X axis acceleration and deceleration ,unit: (mm/min）/s
X-axis acceleration and deceleration time constant, the greater the value, the faster the
acceleration and deceleration. Initial value: 50000, value range: 1-99999.
NO.9 Y axis acceleration and deceleration ,unit: (mm/min）/s
Y-axis acceleration and deceleration time constant, the greater the value, the faster the acceleration and

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 130
User Manual
deceleration. Initial value: 50000, value range: 1-99999.
NO.10 Z axis acceleration and deceleration ,unit: (mm/min）/s
Z-axis acceleration and deceleration time constant, the greater the value, the faster the acceleration and
NO.11 Fourth axis acceleration and deceleration ,unit: (mm/min）/s
Fourth-axis acceleration and deceleration time constant, the greater the value, the faster the acceleration
and deceleration. Initial value: 50000, value range: 1-99999.
NO.12 Fifth axis acceleration and deceleration ,unit: (mm/min）/s
Fifth-axis acceleration and deceleration time constant, the greater the value, the faster the acceleration and
Note: The value of acceleration parameter is related to the equipment configuration. Normally, the
heavier the load, the smaller the parameter value.
NO.15 Handwheel acceleration （12--5000）
Used to set acceleration and deceleration time constant when handwheel is used, setting range 12-5000,
the greater the value, the faster the acceleration and deceleration.
NO.16 Auto run acceleration and deceleration （500-32000）
Used to set the automatic running acceleration and deceleration speed constant, setting range 500-32000.
When the parameter value is set in the range of 500-32000, the speed of acceleration and deceleration for
automatic running is determined by this parameter. Otherwise, the acceleration and deceleration
parameters of each axis in the user parameter shall prevail.
The setting of this parameter is mainly to distinguish manual and automatic acceleration/deceleration
speeds. This parameter is only set when there is greater difference between acceleration/deceleration
speeds required by two states. Usually it is set as invalid.
NO.17 Forward speed for X axis return to reference point , unit:mm/min
When the X axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which it touches the reference point
switch in the forward direction. Initial value: 5000, Value range: less than X axis G00 speed.
NO.18 Forward speed for Y axis return to reference point , unit:mm/min
When the Y axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which it touches the reference point
switch in the forward direction. Initial value: 5000, Value range: less than Y axis G00 speed.
NO.19 Forward speed for Z axis return to reference point , unit:mm/min
When the Z axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which it touches the reference point
switch in the forward direction. Initial value: 5000, Value range: less than Z axis G00 speed.
NO.20 Forward speed for fourth axis return to reference point , unit:mm/min or deg/min
When the fourth axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which it touches the reference
point switch in the forward direction. Initial value: 5000, Value range: less than fourth axis G00 speed.
NO.21 Forward speed for fifth axis return to reference point , unit:mm/min or deg/min
When the fifth axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which it touches the reference point
switch in the forward direction. Initial value: 5000, Value range: less than fifth axis G00 speed.
NO.22 Reverse speed for X axis return to reference point, unit:mm/min
When the X axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which the encoder zero is detected
after turning off the reference point switch. Initial value: 250, value range: 20-500.
NO.23 Reverse speed for Y axis return to reference point, unit:mm/min
When the Y axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which the encoder zero is detected
NO.24 Reverse speed for Z axis return to reference point, unit:mm/min
When the Z axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which the encoder zero is detected
NO.25 Reverse speed for fourth axis return to reference point, unit:mm/min or deg/min

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
When the fourth axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which the encoder zero is
detected after turning off the reference point switch. Initial value: 250, value range: 20-500.
NO.26 Reverse speed for fifth axis return to reference point, unit:mm/min or deg/min
When the fifth axis returns to the reference point, the running speed at which the encoder zero is detected
Note: 1. "Return to the reference point" means return to the machine zero.
2. Reference point return reverse speed parameter value will affect the reference point return
accuracy. The smaller the value, the higher the accuracy; Once this value is well set, do not make a change to
it; otherwise, it will affect the reference point position.
NO.27 Maximum speed for quickly stopping the feed axis, unit:mm/min
Used to set the limits of the stop mode during running.
When the running speed of an axis is higher than this parameter value,in case of emergency stop or other
fault (limit, etc.), the system will stop the current running axis directly; that is, the running speed of the
current running axis will directly change to zero from the current value (At this time the machine zero will
be lost, it is needed to re-return to the reference point; please pay special attention); on the contrary, when
an axis running speed is lower than this parameter value, in the event of an emergency stop or other fault,
the system will control the speed of the moving axis and make it go down to zero from the previous speed
as per the normal deceleration.
Namely, when the speed is higher than this parameter value, there is no deceleration process in
emergency stop, otherwise, when the speed is lower than this value, there is a deceleration process in
emergency stop.
NO.28 Maximum speed for manual run,unit:mm/min
The maximum running speed limit for the feed axis in manual state.
NO.29 Maximum feed speed for auto run, unit:mm/min
The maximum speed of each axis when it automatically runs. Initial value: 12000, maximum value: 30000.
NO.30 Maximum speed for Z axis handwheel （mm/min）.
Used to set maximum speed for Z axis using handwheel in manual state, unit: mm/min (millimeter/minute)
Setting range: 100 to manual maximum speed.
The set value of this parameter is related to the load condition of the equipment. It is recommended that
this value shall not exceed 2000.
Note: When the set value is greater than 100, it is valid; otherwise, there is no limit on the maximum
speed.
NO.31 Maximum speed for X, Y(c) and fourth axes handwheels （mm/min）
Used to set the maximum speed for X, Y(C) and 4th axes using handwheels, unit: mm/min
(millimeter/minute) Setting range: 100 to manual maximum speed. When the set value is less than 100, the
maximum speed is not limited.
The set value of this parameter is related to the load condition of the equipment. It is recommended that
this value shall not exceed 3000.
NO.32 Initial speed for the feed axis running, unit:mm/min
It is used to set the initial speed of the acceleration when the feed axis is running. Similarly, it is the
deceleration end speed. That is, when the running speed of the feed axis is lower than this value, there is no
acceleration/deceleration process. When the running speed is higher than this value, acceleration starts
from this value.
The size of the parameter depends on the drive type and the load size, with an initial value of 500.
NO.33 Speed jump variable allowed for continuous path interpolation, unit:mm/min
Used to set the maximum increment for sudden change of each axis speed, to ensure resultant speed for
interpolation, when the speed is changed at the multi-axis continuous path interpolation; that is, when the
speed increment value is greater than this value, there is an acceleration (deceleration) process; if it is less

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 132
User Manual
than this value, there is only direct arrival, with no acceleration (deceleration) process. Mainly used to
increase the coherence of multi-axis continuous path interpolation.
Example:When this value is 200 and the X axis speed changes from F1000 to F2000 in the multi-axis
continuous path interpolation, the change process shall be that X axis speed first change from F1000 to
1200, and then is accelerated to F2000 from the value set by the speed parameter NO.8 .
NO.34 Termination speed for reverse deceleration during the the program operation
Used to set initial speed for reverse acceleration/deceleration of each axis when the program automatically
runs Unit: mm/min.
This parameter is different from the NO.32 parameter(the initial speed for the feed axis running) in the
speed parameters . The NO.32 parameter in the speed parameters is the normal initial speed for
acceleration/deceleration. This parameter is used for automatic operation and in reverse; this value is
usually slightly smaller.
NO.35 Is the speed processing function enabled ？(76-Yes, 0-No)
Used to set whether the speed smoothing function is enabled at auto-run. When this parameter is set to 0, it
is not enabled. When this parameter is set to 76, it is enabled.
The speed smoothing function is used for continuous high-speed small line blocks interpolation; it makes
prediction and pre-processing of the speed, so a smooth transition speed can be obtained at the run-time in
reverse, turning place, and parts surface finish can reach a better situation.
Note that this parameter is normally set as disabled. When it is set as enabled, the system CPU computation
burden will increase and it is possible to reduce the efficiency of system operation.
NO.36 Manual speed of feed axis, unit:mm/min
Feed axis speed setting in manual mode.Initial value: 5000; value range: less than the maximum speed at
the manual running (value of No. 23 speed parameter).
Note: The values of above two parameters vary with manual setting at any time; that is, when the
speed value is changed in the manual state, the system will automatically refresh this parameter value.
NO.100 Manual speed of spindle, unit: rpm
Spindle speed setting in manual status. Initial value: 2000; value range: less than the maximum spindle
speed value.
NO.101 Maximum speed of spindle at the highest gear（rpm）
Used to set maximum spindle speed.。Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
When there is high/low gear or multi-gear function, this parameter is the spindle high-gear/1st gear speed.
Note: There is no limit on the maximum spindle speed setting. the spindle speed programming S
address digits can reach 59900 r / min.
NO.102 Maximum speed of spindle at lower gear (the second gear)
Used to set maximum speed of spindle at the low gear (the second gear) Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute).
NO.103 Maximum speed of spindle at the third gear
When there are multiple gears for spindle control, this parameter is used to set the maximum spindle speed
at third gear. Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
NO.104 Maximum speed of spindle at the fourth gear
When there are multiple gears for spindle control, this parameter is used to set the maximum spindle speed
at fourth gear. Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
NO.105 Maximum speed of the second spindle at the high-gear
When there is double-spindle control, this parameter is used to set the maximum speed of the second
spindle. Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
Note: The setting of the maximum speed of the spindle is related to the configuration and use of the
equipment. When there is a transmission ratio, the maximum speed of the spindle shall be set with
consideration given to the transmission relationship, to prevent overspeed and other abnormalities of the
spindle motor.
NO.106 Acceleration (deceleration) spindle pulse control（（mm/min）/s）

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Used to set the acceleration/deceleration time constant under spindle pulse control mode; the greater the
value, the faster the acceleration/deceleration; otherwise, the acceleration/deceleration is slower. Initial
value: 8000, value range: 1-99999.
NO.107,Are fifth-eighth gears of spindle closed ? (1-Yes, 0-No)
When it is set to 1, it indicates that the spindle 5th-8th gears are not enabled; when it is set to 0, it indicates
that the spindle 5th-8th gears are enabled.
NO.108,Maximum speed of spindle at the fifth gear(rpm)
Used to set the maximum spindle speed at 5th gear. Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
NO.109,Maximum speed of spindle at the sixth gear(rpm)
Used to set the maximum spindle speed at sixth gear. Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
NO.110,Maximum speed of spindle at the seventh gear(rpm)
Used to set the maximum spindle speed at seventh gear. Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
NO.111, Maximum speed of spindle at the eighth gear(rpm)
Used to set the maximum spindle speed at eighth gear. Unit: r/min (revolutions/minute)
NO.120 RS232 serial communication rate
Used to set the baud rate for using RS232 serial communication. Baud rates corresponding to set values are
listed as below:
Set value for Serial Set value for Serial
No.120 communication No.120 communication
parameter rate (unit: bps) parameter rate (Unit: bps)
0 7200 4 38400
1 9600 5 57600
2 14400 Others 115200
3 19200
NO.121 Maximum speed of Y axis handwheel (mm/min) [>=100, valid]
Used to set the maximum speed for Y-axis using handwheel, Unit: mm/min (millimeter/ minute). Setting
range: 100 to manual maximum speed.
Note: When the set value is greater than 100, it is valid; otherwise, there is no limit on the maximum
speed.
NO.122, Maximum speed of fourth axis handwheel (mm/min) [>=50, valid]
Used to set the maximum speed for the fourth axis handwheel; it is only valid when it is more than or equal
to 50.
NO.123, Maximum speed of fifth axis handwheel (mm/min) [>=50, valid]
Used to set the maximum speed for the fifth axis handwheel; it is only valid when it is more than or equal to
50.
NO.125, Servo motor thread cycle X axis retraction speed override (0.1 times)
Used to set thread X-axis servo motor retract speed override, 0.1 times.
NO.126, Stepping motor thread cycle X - axis retract mode(1,2)
Used to set stepping motor thread cycle X-axis retract mode; when it is set to 1, the X-axis stops after
retract, and goes back to the end at G00 speed.
When it is set to 2, the X-axis quickly goes back until it is retreated to the end, which is used to remove a
middle deceleration and acceleration process.
NO.127, Stepping motor thread cycle X axis retract takeoff speed(mm/min)
Used to set the thread X-axis stepping motor retract takeoff speed, unit: mm/min.
NO.128, Stepping motor thread cycle X axis maximum retract speed(mm/min)
Used to set the thread X-axis stepping motor retract maximum speed, unit: mm/min.
NO.129, Initial speed for G00 and manual fast-moving (mm/min)[>5]
Used to set Initial speed for G00 and manual fast-moving.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 134
User Manual
N0.201,Manual maximum speed of X axis (mm/min)[>=50]
Used to individually limit the manual speed of the X axis.
N0.202,Manual maximum speed of Y axis (mm/min)[>=50]
Used to individually limit the manual speed of the Y axis.
N0.203,Manual maximum speed of Z axis (mm/min)[>=50]
Used to individually limit the manual speed of the Z axis.
N0.204,Manual maximum speed of fourth axis (mm/min)[>=50]
Used to individually limit the manual speed of the fourth axis.
N0.205,Manual maximum speed of fifth axis (mm/min)[>=50]
Used to individually limit the manual speed of the fifth axis.
NO.300 Manual speed of the second spindle (r/min)
When the machine tool has the second spindle, this parameter is used to set its manual speed.
NO.400 Feed axis acceleration and deceleration curve type (8-S type, others- linear type)
When this parameter is set to 8, it indicates command G00/G01 adopts S type acceleration and deceleration;
when it is set to 6, it indicates command G00 adopts S type acceleration and deceleration, while command
G01 adopts linear acceleration and deceleration; when it is set to other values, it indicates both of them
adopt linear acceleration and deceleration.
NO.401 Initial acceleration of the S type acceleration and deceleration curves ((mm/min)/s)[>=10]
When the parameter value is less than 10, the initial acceleration of the S-type acceleration/deceleration
curve is 10 during running; when it is greater than 10, execution is made at the set value.
NO.402 Jerk of the S type acceleration and deceleration curves (((mm/min)/s)/2ms)[>=10]
When the paramter value is less than 10, jerk of S type acceleration/deceleration curve is 10 during
running; when it is greater than 10, execution is made at the set value.
After using S-type acceleration and deceleration curve, acceleration and deceleration are more stably
started and stopped; for step drive, it can prevent out-sync of the motor.
NO.403 Maximum acceleration of the S type acceleration and deceleration
curves((mm/min)/s)[>=500]
When the parameter value is less than 500, the maximum acceleration of the S-type acceleration and
deceleration curves will call the acceleration value of the linear acceleration and deceleration curves. When
the parameter value is greater than 500, the value is the maximum acceleration value of S-type acceleration
and deceleration curves.
NO.404, Jump available for continuous path of X axis(mm/min)[>1]
interpolation, when the speed is changed at the X axis continuous path interpolation; that is, when the
than this value, there is only direct arrival, with no acceleration (deceleration) process.
NO.405, Jump available for continuous path of Y axis(mm/min)[>1]
interpolation, when the speed is changed at the X axis continuous path interpolation; that is, when the
NO.406, Jump available for continuous path of Z axis(mm/min)[>1]
interpolation, when the speed is changed at the Z axis continuous path interpolation; that is, when the
NO.407, Jump available for continuous path of fourth axis(mm/min)[>1]

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
interpolation, when the speed is changed at the fourth axis continuous path interpolation; that is, when the
NO.408, Jump available for continuous path of fifth axis(mm/min)[>1]
interpolation, when the speed is changed at the fifth axis continuous path interpolation; that is, when the
NO.500, Starting smoothing function (+4 manual; +8 handwheel; +16 automatic; +32 thread)
+4 indicates enabling smoothing function in manual state.
+8 indicates enabling smoothing function in manual state.
+16 indicates enabling smoothing function in auto state.
+32 indicates enabling smoothing function at thread machining.
+64 indicates pulses uniformization at G1 auto low-speed run.
NO.501,Manual smoothing time constant[2-50]
Used to set manual smoothing time constant; it is valid when it is set between 2 and 50.
NO.502,Manual smoothing time constant[2-50]
Used to set manual smoothing time constant; it is valid when it is set between 2 and 50.
NO.503, Auto smoothing time constant [2-50]
Used to set automatic smoothing time constant; it is valid when it is set between 2 and 50.
NO.504,Thread smoothing time constant[2-50]
Used to set thread smoothing time constance; it is valid when it is set between 2 and 50.
The larger the smoothing time constant, the better the smoothing effect, but the longer the lag time (the lag
time is 100ms when it is set to 50) and the more serious the multi-axis synchronous interpolation accuracy
loss.
NO.520, Maximum speed of third axis (rpm)
Used to set the maximum speed of the 3rd spindle.
NO.521, Maximum speed of fourth axis (rpm)
Used to set the maximum speed of the third spindle.
NO.522, Manual speed of third axis (rpm)
Used to set the manual speed of the third spindle.
NO.523, Manual speed of fourth axis (rpm)
Used to set the manual speed of the fourth spindle.
commands:
1. When the first channel port pulse is set (that is, the No. 403 axis parameter is valid), the third
spindle function is available: The third spindle is for the analog control and is output from the original first
spindle analogue port in the aspect of hardware.
The third spindle speed command: SC_， speed (revolution/minute).
Forward and CCW rotation stop commands need to be implemented by PLC; for example:
Assumptions: Y20: Spindle forward rotation; Y21: Spindle CCW rotation.
commands: M45: Spindle forward rotation; M47: Spindle CCW rotation; M57: Spindle stop.
Add the following lines in PLC:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 136
User Manual
Figure 5.6
2. When the second channel port pulse is set (that is, the No.404 axis parameter is valid), the fourth
spindle function is available: the fourth spindle is for the analog control and is output from the original
second spindle analog port in the aspect of hardware.
The fourth spindle speed command: SD_, speed (revolution/minute).
Forward and CCW rotation stop commands need to be implemented by PLC; it has the same using
method as the 3rd spindle, as shown in the above plc.
5.2.3 Coordinate system
The coordinate system in this parameter refers to the working coordinate system and a machine
coordinate system G53; that is, the coordinate system used in the workpiece machining is also called the
workpiece coordinate system, which is pre-set by CNC. A machining program can set a workpiece
coordinate system, or a plurality of workpiece coordinate systems. The workpiece coordinate system can
be changed by moving its origin. That is, the value of the coordinate system in the parameter is the value of
coordinates of its own coordinate origin (zero point) in the machine coordinate system.
With G54 to G59, 6 workpiece coordinate systems can be set and 48 additional workpiece coordinate
systems G54.1 - G54.48 can also be set. In the coordinate system setting interface, you can modify the
values of coordinates of the origins of the 6 workpiece coordinate systems in the machine coordinate
system. (As shown in Figure 5.7)
G54 ：Workpiece coordinate system 1
G54.1-G54.48：Additional workpiece coordinate systems.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 5.7 Setting of workpiece coordinate system = 4

Move the cursor up and down to select the workpiece coordinate system currently needed to be
modified , and then press the Enter key to show the input dialog box and input the value; the offset value
adopts the incremental input method; E in front of the input value indicates absolute input mode; inputting
E can clear G54-G59 offset values; if there is no E in front of the input value, the input is made in an
incremental mode.
When the program is running, you can modify the offsets of the G54-G59 parameters or set the
G54-G59 coordinates.
The 54 workpiece coordinate systems can be set by the user. In the program, G54, G55, G56, G57, G58,
G59, G54.1 ~ G54.48 commands can be used for calling.
Note: 1. As the machine coordinate system G53 in this parameter is established based on the machine reference point,
you can modify the offset of the machine coordinate system G53 relative to the original state, which can be used to
adjust tool setting deviation in feed hold. To return to the original state, set the offset of the machine coordinate
system G53 to 0. The offset is cleared after the system restarts or returns to zero; coordinates of all workpieces
shift accordingly when the offset is set.
2.The workpiece coordinate system is initially established under manual state. When there is any deviation, it will be
modified in relevant parameters according to the machining situations. E.g.: After the tool moves to a certain point,
select the corresponding coordinate system and set the coordinate value of the current coordinate system as a
certain value. In this case, the system automatically calculates the coordinates of the current coordinate system
origin in the machine coordinate system and save them into the parameters. When the deviation is found after
machining, the coordinates of the corresponding workpiece coordinate system can be modified under the
parameter interface.
3. In the "Coordinate system" parameter, add the cumulative modified offsets display, the value enclosed in square
brackets. At the time of tool setting or modifying the absolute value of the offset will automatically clear the
cumulative modified offsets. When the increment changes, the offset will be cumulatively modified.
5.2.4 Macro variable parameter
In the parameter interface, press the softkey corresponding to "macro variable" to go to the
corresponding the macro variable parameter settings interface. Use the Up and Down keys to select the
parameter and press Enter to enter the value in the dialog box.
For the detailed description on macro variables, see the "User Macro Program" section.
5.2.5 Axis parameters
The axis parameters are used to set some parameters related to each axis such as compensation, limit,
function setting, etc., mainly including the following aspects.
In the parameter interface, press the soft key corresponding to the axis parameter to enter the axis

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 138
User Manual
parameter setting interface. Move the cursor up and down to select the axis parameter which needs to be
modified currently; then press Enter to show the input dialog box and then input the value. It is shown in
Figure 5.8:
Figure 5.8 Axis parameter setting

List of axis parameters
1.X-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)
2.X-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)
3. Y-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)
4.Y-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)
5. Z-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)
6. Z-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)
7. Fourth-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)
8. Fourth-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)
9. Fifth-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)
10. Fifth-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)
11. X-axis backlash compensation (micrometer)
12. Y-axis backlash compensation (micrometer)
13. Z-axis backlash compensation (micrometer)
14. Fourth-axis backlash compensation (micrometer)
15.Fifth-axis backlash compensation (micrometer)
16.Does the feed axis use the electronic gear (0-Yes, 1-No)
17. Numerator of X axis electronic gear (1-32767)
18.Denominator of X axis electronic gear (1-32767)
19. Numerator of Y axis electronic gear (1-32767)
20. Denominator of Y axis electronic gear (1-32767)
21. Numerator of Z axis electronic gear (1-32767)
22. Denominator of Z axis electronic gear (1-32767)
23. Numerator of fourth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
24. Denominator of fourth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
25. Numerator of fifth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
26. Denominator of fifth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
27. X axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
28. Y axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
29. Z axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
30.Fourth axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
31.Fifth axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
32.The mode of feed axis to return to reference point
33. Normally closed setting for feed axis reference point return switch (X1, Y2, Z4, A8, B16)
34. Feed axis reference point return direction reverse (X4, Y8, Z16, A32, B64)
35. Maximum zero position detection length after X-axis return to reference point
36. Maximum zero position detection length after Y-axis return to reference point
37. Maximum zero position detection length after Z-axis return to reference point
38. Maximum zero position detection length after fourth-axis return to reference point
39. Maximum zero position detection length after fifth-axis return to reference point
40. Offset after X axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
41. Offset after Y axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
42. Offset after Z axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
43. Offset after fourth axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
44. Offset after fifth axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
46. Feed axis reverse delay time (ms)
47. Feed axis follow-up （AX7，AY8，AZ9，CX17，CY18，CZ19）
48. Equivalent processing for the XY (C) ZA axes
49. Does the system use C axis (0-No, 1-Yes)
51. The fourth axis function setting
52. The fifth axis function setting
54. Calculation when fourth axis is rotating axis
55. Calculation when fifth axis is rotating axis
56. Internal parameters of system
100.Number of pulses per revolution of the spindle encoder
101. Is spindle position feedback detected (1-Yes, 0-No)
102. Spindle orientation detection angle
103. Spindle orientation detection angle error
104.Control mode for spindle return to zero
105.Running before spindle return to zero (0.1s )
106.Control for thread machining and spindle positioning
107.Delay time for sudden change of spindle rotation direction (0.1s)
108.Servo spindle type
109.Spindle pulse control direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
110.Does the spindle use the electronic gear (0-Yes, 1-No)
111.Numerator of spindle low-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
112.Denominator of spindle low-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
113. Numerator of spindle high-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
114. Denominator of spindle high-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
115.Is there gear control for the spindle (1-Yes, 0-No)
116.Are the third and fourth gears closed (1-Yes, 0-No)
117. Is the spindle started at the spindle shift (1-Yes, 0-No)
118. The time from stop to sway at spindle shift (0.01s)
119.The time from sway to shift at spindle shift (0.01s)
120.Motor sway speed at spindle shift（0.01 rpm）
121. The initial sway direction at spindle shift (0-Forward, 1-Reverse)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 140
User Manual
122. The forward sway time at spindle shift (0.01s)
123.The reverse sway time at spindle shift (0.01s)
124.Is the spindle shift output signal held (0-No, 1-Yes)
200. Is the maximum speed of the G1G2G3 single-axis limited [18-Yes]
201.G1G2G3 maximum speed of X-axis(mm/min)
202. G1G2G3 maximum speed of Y-axis(mm/min)
203.G1G2G3 maximum speed of Z-axis(mm/min)
204. G1G2G3 maximum speed of fourth-axis(mm/min)
205. G1G2G3 maximum speed of fifth-axis(mm/min)
206.Is orientation made before pulse control on rigid tapping [18-Yes]
207. Maximum speed of tapping spindle (r/min)[>=20]
208. Does G64/G60 work for G00 [16-Yes]
209. Rotary axis [Xrt Zrt Xmh Zmh Xwk Zwk *** ***]
210.Pulse control rigid tapping output port (X91; Y92; Z93; A94; B95; C Others)
211. Initial speed of spindle for rigid tapping engage (rpm)
212. Initial speed of spindle for rigid tapping retract (rpm)
213.Spindle acceleration (deceleration) for rigid tapping engage ((rpm)/s)[>1]
214.Spindle acceleration (deceleration) for rigid tapping retract ((rpm)/s)[>1]
215.Spindle pre-rotation for rigid tapping engage (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
216.Spindle tailing for rigid tapping engage (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
217.Spindle pre-rotation for rigid tapping retract (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
218.Spindle tailing for rigid tapping retract (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
220.Spindle and encoder gear ratio, the number of spindle teeth
221. Spindle and encoder gear ratio, the number of encoder teeth
222. Y-axis function setting (0-rotary axis, 1-linear axis)
223. 1-Workpiece coordinates calculating when Y axis is the rotary axis
224. 1-Machine coordinates calculating when Y axis is the rotary axis
225.The feed axis is for the orthogonal pulse [X2;Y4:Z8;A16;B32;C64]
226.Y-axis pulse control rigid tapping output port (X91;Y92;Z93;A94;B95;C96)
227.X-axis pulse control rigid tapping output port(X91;Y92;Z93;A94;B95;C96)
228. Y axis rigid tapping 2n spindle electronic gear numerator
229. Y axis rigid tapping 2nd spindle electronic gear denominator
230. X axis rigid tapping 3n spindle electronic gear numerator
231. X axis rigid tapping 3nd spindle electronic gear denominator
400, Change of coordinate axis name [xxxxx0]
401.Feed axis encoder feedback filtering parameter
402.Spindle encoder feedback filtering parameter
403.First channel pulse (X91/81;Y92/82;Z93/83;A94/84;B95/85;C96/86)
404. Second channel pulse(X91/81;Y92/82;Z93/83;A94/84;B95/85;C96/86)
405.Number of pulses per revolution for 1st channel
406.First channel sharing feed axis(X61;Y62;Z63;A64;B65)
407.Number of pulses per revolution for second channel
408.Standby application
409.First channel pulse acceleration and deceleration (rpm/2ms)
410.Second channel pulse acceleration and deceleration (rpm/2ms)
411.Feed axis absolute encoder(X4,Y8,Z16,A32,B64)
412.Absolute encoder multi-revolution low 16-bit memory address
413.Absolute encoder single-revolution high 16-bit memory address

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
414.Absolute encoder single-revolution low 16-bit memory address
415.Number of pulses per cycle for X-axis absolute encoder
416. Number of pulses per cycle for Y-axis absolute encoder
417.Number of pulses per cycle for Z-axis absolute encoder
418.Number of pulses per cycle for fourth-axis absolute encoder
419.Number of pulses per cycle for fifth-axis absolute encoder
420.Corresponding coordinate distance value per circle of X-axis absolute encoder (nm)
421. Corresponding coordinate distance value per circle of Y-axis absolute encoder (nm)
422.Corresponding coordinate distance value per circle of Z-axis absolute encoder (nm)
423.Corresponding coordinate distance value per circle of fourth-axis absolute encoder (nm)
424.Corresponding coordinate distance value per circle of fifth-axis absolute encoder (nm)
425.X-axis absolute encoder multi-circle offset [input E to clear multi-circle ]
426.Y-axis absolute encoder multi-circle offset [input E to clear multi-circle ]
427.Z-axis absolute encoder multi-circle offset [input E to clear multi-circle ]
428.Fourth-axis absolute encoder multi-circle offset [input E to clear multi-circle ]
429.Fifth-axis absolute encoder multi-circle offset [input E to clear multi-circle ]
430.Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of X-axis absolute
encoder
431.Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of Y-axis absolute
encoder
432.Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of Z-axis absolute
encoder
433.Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of fourth-axis
absolute encoder
434.Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of fifth-axis absolute
encoder
481.Speed cutoff point for spindle triangle and star switching (rpm)
commands for axis parameters
NO.1 X-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for X axis moving in the negative direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.2 X-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for X axis moving in the forward direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.3 Y-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for Y axis moving in the negative direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.4 Y-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for Y axis moving in the forward direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.5 Z-axis negative maximum stroke (mm)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for Z axis moving in the negative direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.6 Z-axis forward maximum stroke (mm)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for Z axis moving in the forward direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.7 Fourth-axis negative maximum stroke (mm/deg)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for fourth axis moving in the negative direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 142
User Manual
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.8 Fourth-axis forward maximum stroke (mm /deg)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for fourth axis moving in the forward direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.7 Fifth-axis negative maximum stroke (mm/deg)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for fifth axis moving in the negative direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
NO.8 Fifth-axis forward maximum stroke (mm /deg)：
Used to set the maximum stoke for fifth axis moving in the forward direction, Unit: millimeter / inch,
setting range: -999990 ~ + 999990.
Note: The set value for the soft limit is related to the equipment stroke and user application method, but at the time of
setting, the maximum value can not exceed the position value of the hard limit detection switch in the machine
coordinate system. Otherwise, a machine failure may occur.
NO.11 The X axis backlash compensation , unit: μm (micron)
Used to set the backlash existing in transmission mechanism at reverse X-axis motion.When the axis
motion is involved in the reverse situation, the system automatically calls the value for compensation to
eliminate the error.
NO.12 The Y axis backlash compensation , unit: μm (micron)
Used to set the backlash existing in transmission mechanism at reverse Y-axis motion.When the axis
NO.13 The Z axis backlash compensation , unit: μm (micron)
Used to set the backlash existing in transmission mechanism at reverse Z-axis motion.When the axis
NO.14 The fourth axis backlash compensation , unit: μm (micron)
Used to set the backlash existing in transmission mechanism at reverse fourth-axis motion.When the
axis motion is involved in the reverse situation, the system automatically calls the value for compensation
to eliminate the error.
NO.15 The fifth axis backlash compensation , unit: μm (micron)
Used to set the backlash existing in transmission mechanism at reverse fifth-axis motion.When the
axis motion is involved in the reverse situation, the system automatically calls the value for compensation
to eliminate the error.
NO.16 Does the feed axis use the electronic gear (0-Yes, 1-No)
Used to set whether the feed axis uses electronic gear, where 0 indicates it uses electronic
gear and 1 indicates it does not use electronic gear.
NO.17 Numerator of X axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set numerator of X axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.18 Denominator of X axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set denominator of X axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.19 Numerator of Y axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set numerator of Y axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.20 Denominator of Y axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set denominator of Y axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.21 Numerator of Z axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set numerator of Z axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.22 Denominator of Z axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set denominator of Z axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
NO.23 Numerator of fourth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set numerator of fourth axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.24 Denominator of fourth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set denominator of fourth axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.25 Numerator of fifth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set numerator of fifth axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.26 Denominator of fifth axis electronic gear (1-32767)
Used to set denominator of fifth axis electronic gear, setting range 1—32767.
Note: For the method of setting the electronic gear of the feed axis (for matching servo motor), refer to the following
formula:
L:The amount of movement of the machine tool corresponding to one revolution of the servo motor.
Unit: Millimeter
P:Number of pulses fed back by one revolution of servo motor (number of motor encoder lines × 4)
Attention: It is usually recommended to set the electronic gear in the driver to prevent the poor
synchronization at multi-axis linkage (when there is great difference between electronic gears of all axes).
NO.27 X axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
Used to change the moving direction of the X-axis; namely, when this value is set to 0, the moving
direction of the X-axis is equivalent to the reverse direction of the command; when the value is 1, the X-axis
moving direction is equivalent to the direction of the command.
NO.28 Y axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
Used to change the moving direction of the Y-axis; namely, when this value is set to 0, the moving
direction of the Y-axis is equivalent to the reverse direction of the command; when the value is 1, the Y-axis
NO.29 Z axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
Used to change the moving direction of the Z-axis; namely, when this value is set to 0, the moving
direction of the Z-axis is equivalent to the reverse direction of the command; when the value is 1, the Z-axis
NO.30 Fourth axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
Used to change the moving direction of the fourth-axis; namely, when this value is set to 0, the moving
direction of the fourth -axis is equivalent to the reverse direction of the command; when the value is 1, the
fourth -axis moving direction is equivalent to the direction of the command.
NO.31 Fifth axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
Used to change the moving direction of the fifth-axis; namely, when this value is set to 0, the moving
direction of the fifth-axis is equivalent to the reverse direction of the command; when the value is 1, the
fifth-axis moving direction is equivalent to the direction of the command.
NO.32 The mode of feed axis to return to reference point
Used to set several methods to detect the reference switch and the motor encoder zero pulse signal
when each feed axis returns to the reference point:
When it is set to 0: When the feed axis returns to the reference point, after it hits the reference point
switch, it runs in reverse and detects the switch off and then detects the motor encoder zero pulse signal.
switch, it runs in reverse and detects the switch off.
switch, it runs forwards and detects the switch off and then detects the motor encoder zero pulse signal.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 144
User Manual
switch, it runs forwards and detects the switch off.
The mode of return to reference point shall be set according to the circuit condition of the equipment.
Normally it is recommended to set it to 0 or 2. That is because if the return to reference point does not
detect the zero pulse signal of the motor encoder, the accuracy is fully guaranteed by reference. Compared
with the encoder zero pulse accuracy, this will be worse.
NO.33 Normally closed setting for feed axis reference point return switch (X1, Y2, Z4, A8, B16)
Used to set whether the reference point switch for each axis is normally open or normally closed.
When this parameter is set to 0, it means that each axis reference point switch is normally open;
+1 indicates that the X axis reference point switch is normally closed.
+2 indicates that the Y axis reference point switch is normally closed.
+4 indicates that the Z axis reference point switch is normally closed.
+8 indicates that the A axis reference point switch is normally closed.
+16 indicates that the B axis reference point switch is normally closed.
+128 means auto entrance into manual state after completion of automatic running or stop; in the
manual state, press the run key to automatically switch to the automatic state and run the program.
+256 indicates X axis zero return skip zero return switch detection step.
+512 indicates Y axis zero return skip zero return switch detection step.
+1024 indicates Z axis zero return skip zero return switch detection step.
When you want to set the multi-axis reference point switch as normally closed, you need to add the
values of the corresponding axes and input it to this parameter. The specific setting is related to the
selection of the equipment switch.
When the axis is a rotary axis, it is not needed to install zero return switch; return to zero skips
detection of zero switch and the corresponding parameters can be set directly.
Example: Reference point switches for X axis, Z axis and A axis are normally closed; in this case, this
parameter will be set to 13 (1 + 4 + 8 = 13).
NO.34 Feed axis reference point return direction reverse (X4, Y8, Z16, A32, B64)
Used to set the direction for feed axis return to reference point.When this parameter is set to 0, it
indicates that the direction for each axis return to reference point is forward; when you want to set the
direction for one axis return to reference point as negative, following the following method:
The direction for X axis return to reference point is negative: 4;
The direction for Y axis return to reference point is negative: 8;
The direction for Z axis return to reference point is negative: 16;
The direction for A axis return to reference point is negative: 32;
The direction for B axis return to reference point is negative: 64;
For multi-axis return to the reference point, Y-axis needs to first return to reference point and this
parameter is set to: +256; otherwise, for multi-axis return to reference point, Z axis first returns to
reference point by default.
When you want to set the direction of the multi-axis return to reference point as negative, you need to
add the set values of the corresponding axes and input it to this parameter.
Example: When reference point direction for X axis and Z axis is negative, this parameter will be set to
20 (4 + 16 = 20).
NO.35 Maximum zero position detection length after X-axis return to reference point（0.1mm）.
Used to set the range in which the motor encoder zero pulse signal is detected when the
X-axis returns to reference point and after the reference switch is disconnected. 单位：0.1mm。Unit: 0.1mm.
NO.36 Maximum zero position detection length after Y-axis return to reference point.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
X-axis returns to reference point and after the reference switch is disconnected. Unit: 0.1mm.
NO.37 Maximum zero position detection length after Y-axis return to reference point.
Y-axis returns to reference point and after the reference switch is disconnected. Unit: 0.1mm.
NO.38 Maximum zero position detection length after fourth-axis return to reference point
（0.1mm）.
fourth-axis returns to reference point and after the reference switch is disconnected. Unit: 0.1mm.
NO.39 Maximum zero position detection length after fifth-axis return to reference point
（0.1mm）.
fifth-axis returns to reference point and after the reference switch is disconnected. Unit: 0.1mm.
Note: Set values for No.35~39 parameters shall not be greater than the distance caused by one revolution of the motor
of the corresponding axis. Under normal circumstances, when the company's servo is provided, refer to the
following formula.
L: Maximum zero position detection length after return to reference point

Numerator of electronic gear: Numerator of electronic gear for servo driver, NO. 12 parameter.
Denominator of electronic gear: Denominator of electronic gear for servo driver, NO. 13 parameter.
NO.40 Offset after X axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
Used to set the offset distance needed to complete reference point return function when X-axis returns
to the reference point and the servo motor zero pulse signal is detected. Unit: 0.01mm. Set value range
-99999 ~ + 99999.
The specific set value of this parameter is related to the machine reference point installation position
and the machine coordinate system setting, depending on the equipment.
Note: The offset after the reference point moves at the speed of G00.
NO.41 Offset after Y axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
Used to set the offset distance needed to complete reference point return function when Y-axis returns
-99999 ~ + 99999.
NO.42 Offset after Y axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
Used to set the offset distance needed to complete reference point return function when Z-axis returns
-99999 ~ + 99999.
NO.43 Offset after fourth axis return to reference point (0.01mm)
Used to set the offset distance needed to complete reference point return function when fourth-axis
returns to the reference point and the servo motor zero pulse signal is detected. Unit: 0.01mm. Set value
range -99999 ~ + 99999.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 146
User Manual
NO.46 Feed axis reverse delay time (ms)
Used to set whether a delay is required or not when the feed axis is reversed during the automatic run
of the program. When the parameter is set to non-zero, it indicates the delay is needed; when the
parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the delay is not needed.
The setting of this parameter is related to the equipment conditions and machining process. For
example, when the equipment is heavier, the continuous reverse will bring large impact to the equipment.
In this case, a delay can be added and reverse after the working table completely stopped can reduce the
impact on the equipment; also, there is another example. At the continuous high-speed small line blocks
machining, the workpiece at the reverse position has poor gloss and in this case, this will be improved by
setting a reverse delay.
NO.47 Feed axis follow-up（AX7，AY8，AZ9，CX17，CY18，CZ19）.
Used to set the follow-up function for A (4th) and C (5th) axes.
When this parameter is set to 7, it indicates A axis follows X axis; when it is set to 8, it indicates A axis
follows Y axis; when set to 9, it indicates A axis follows Z axis; when set to 17, it indicates C axis follows X
axis; when set to 18, it indicates C axis follow the Y axis; when set to 19, it indicates that C axis follow Z axis;
when set to other values, it indicates there is no follow-up function.
The system's follow-up function is defined as follows:
Example: The A-axis follows the X-axis - it indicates that A-axis path is exactly the same as the X-axis
path. During system programming or under manual state, you only need to operate the X-axis and the A
axis will fully move along with the X-axis. For the hardware, the number of pulses output from the X-axis
drive signal port is the same as the number of pulses output from the A-axis drive signal port, in order to
achieve follow-up function.
Attention: 1. The follow-up function is usually used at applications requiring higher synchronization. For
adjustment of synchronous coordination for two axes, it is needed to adjust the servo
stiffness and other parameters to achieve the best condition.
2. This system can only achieve follow-up of one of A axis and C axis along with
some one axis.
3. The driven axis and the drive axis have their own pitch error compensations and backlash
compensations. When you manually or automatically run the driven axis, the machine tool will
not move. For detection and input of pitch error compensation and backlash of driven axis,
compensation shall be made according to machine coordinates of the drive axis.
NO.48 Equivalent processing for the XY (C) ZA axis
Used to set the multiplication of the pulse equivalent of each axis. The setting of this parameter is
usually applied to the case where the mechanical reduction ratio of one axis has a great difference from that
of other axes in the machine tool , and it is used to prevent the motor over-speeding during multi-axis
linkage.
The set value to change the X-axis pulse equivalent multiplication: 16+ to change the multiple;
The set value to change the Y-axis pulse equivalent multiplication: 32+ to change the multiple;
The set value to change the Z-axis pulse equivalent multiplication: 64+ to change the multiple;
The set value to change the A-axis pulse equivalent multiplication: 128+ to change the multiple;
For example:
X-axis pulse equivalent is 1/2 of the original (doubling): 16 +2 = 18;
Y-axis pulse equivalent is 1/2 of the original (doubling): 32+2=34;
Z-axis pulse equivalent is 1/2 of the original (doubling): 64+2=66;
A-axis pulse equivalent is 1/2 of the original (doubling): 128+2=130;
X-axis pulse equivalent is 1/3 of the original (doubling): 163=19;
Y-axis pulse equivalent is 1/3 of the original (doubling): 323=35;
Z-axis pulse equivalent is 1/3 of the original (doubling): 643=67;

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
A-axis pulse equivalent is 1/3 of the original (doubling): 128+2=131;
XY-axis pulse equivalent is 1/2 of the original (doubling): 16+32+2=50;
XYZ-axis pulse equivalent is 1/2 of the original (doubling): 16+32+64+2=114;
And the like:
Attention: After multiplication for the pulse equivalent of a axis, electronic gear of the corresponding driver also needs
multiplication, in order to ensure that the moving size of the working table size is identical to the actual value.
When pulse equivalent multiplication is set for multiple axes, the multiplication for each axis must be consistent.
NO.49, Does the system use C axis (0-No, 1-Yes)
For the system of 5th-axis, when the parameter is set to 1, the system 5th axis is displayed as C axis;
when the parameter is set to 0, the system 5th axis is displayed as B axis.
NO.51 The fourth axis function setting（0- Rotary axis，1- linear axis）
Used to set the function of fourth axis application, which has two types: Rotary axis and linear axis.
When the input value is 0, it means that the rotary axis mode is applied. When the input value is 1, the
linear axis mode is applied. Setting of this parameter depends on the specific situation of the machine tool
equipment.
NO.54 Calculation when the fourth axis is the rotary axis(workpiece coordinates display
calculation+1; machine coordinates calculation+2)
Used to set workpiece coordinates display mode and machine coordinates display and calculation
modes when the fourth axis is the rotary axis. It has two types: Caculating (in the range of 0-360 degrees; in
case of any excess, exactly divided by a 360) and non-calculating (accumulation, the same way as linear axis
processing).
When the input value is +1, it indicates that the display of the workpiece coordinates is of the
calculating mode. When the input value is +2, it means that the display and calculation of the machine
coordinates is of calculating mode. The setting for this parameter depends on the user's usage.
Example: When this parameter is 3 (1 + 2), it indicates the display of the workpiece coordinates and
the display and calculation of the machine coordinates are of calculating mode.
Attention: In the case of rotary axis mode, the calculation of axis operation path is independent of the
above parameters. Calculating and non-calculating for axis path calculation only depends on
whether the programming mode is absolute or relative (incremental). When G90 absolute
programming is used, calculating is made according to 360 degrees, to calculate with the
shortest path and run to the programming point; when G91 incremental programming is used,
like the linear axis, non-calculating is made.
NO.56 Internal parameters of system
Used to set the system function, parameters set by the NC manufacturers.
NO.100 Number of pulses per revolution of the spindle encoder
Used to set the number of pulses fed back per revolution of the spindle encoder; the value: number of
encoder lines× 4.
NO.101 Is spindle position feedback detected (1-Yes, 0-No)
Used to set whether the system detects the spindle position feedback signal. When the parameter
value is set to 1, it indicates there is such a detection; when the parameter value is set to 0, it indicates there
is no such a detection.
This parameter is used to enable the display of the actual speed and angle of the spindle, feed rate per
revolution and other functions related to the spindle speed. The premise for function realization is that
there must be the spindle encoder feedback signal.
NO.102 Spindle orientation detection angle
Used to detect the angle at which the spindle is stopped for automatic tool change.
NO.103 Spindle orientation detection angle error

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 148
User Manual
Used to set the positioning error range when the spindle performs the positioning function. Unit: 0.01
degree.
NO.104 Control mode for spindle return to zero
Used to set the control mode when the spindle returns to zero (return to stop angle for tool change).
When it is set to 0, spindle return to zero adopts speed control mode, which is realized by angel
detection by the encoder; when it is set to 1, spindle return to zero adopts pulse control mode, which is
realized by angel detection by the encoder; when it is set to 2, spindle return to zero is realized by auto
control of the driver.
Setting of this parameter is related to the type of spindle driver. When the spindle driver has its own
control on return to zero, set the parameter value to 2 to improve the efficiency. If the spindle driver does
not have its control on return to zero, the parameter value can only be set to 0, but the encoder signal
synchronized with the spindle must be fed back.
NO.105 Running before spindle return to zero (0.1s )
Used to set rotation time before the spindle returns to zero.
N0.106 Control for thread machining and spindle positioning
(0- tracking for both; 1- interpolation for threading, tracking for positioning; 2- tracking for threading,
interpolation for positioning; 3- interpolation for both; +4- interpolation for tapping)
Used to set the spindle control mode at thread machining and spindle positioning control. The details
are as follows:
0–tracking for both; 1- interpolation for threading, tracking for positioning;
2- tracking for threading, interpolation for positioning; 3 – interpolation for both.
Tracking means: the movement of the spindle is determined by the signal fed back by the spindle
encoder.
Interpolation means: the movement of the spindle is determined by the system pulse signal.
+4 indicates the tapping cycle G74 / G84 uses the interpolation mode, while the threading and
positioning control modes remain unchanged.
+8 indicates the spindle orientation command SP *** is implemented as follows:
Stop the spindle rotation, switch to the spindle pulse control mode, read the current spindle position
by encoder feedback, and then navigate to the angular position specified by the command. The spindle
orientation process for this mode is controlled by the following parameters:
(1) Spindle positioning direction (0- forward direction, 1 – negative direction, others- the nearest
direction).
(2) Spindle positioning speed (unit: 0.1rpm).
(3) Spindle electronic gear related parameters.
(4) Pulse signal direction reverse setting is made in the corresponding output feed axis.
N0.107 Delay time for sudden change of spindle rotation direction (0.1s)
When this parameter is set as negative, at the time of switching between CW rotation and CCW
rotation on the sub-panel, keys can only be effective when the spindle is at the stop state; when this
parameter is set as positive, it indicates delay time for sudden change. When the set value of the parameter
is more than 3000, there are two meanings as below: (1) the delay time for sudden change of the spindle
rotation direction is the difference between set value of the parameter and 3000. (2) During auto running
of the program, the delay time for waiting for the spindle speed to become stable when the spindle rotates
from stop state is the difference between set value of the parameter and 3000.
Note: When the set value of the parameter is greater than 0 and less than 3000, the delay time for sudden change of the
spindle rotation direction is the set value of the parameter. When the set value of the parameter is less than 0, it means that
the delay process is not performed in the above cases.
NO.108 Servo spindle type (0-MODROL, 1-CTB, 8- Delta)
Used to set type of the servo spindle configured by machine tool equipment to determine the system

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
control mode on the servo spindle.
When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the system controlled servo spindle brand is
MODROL. When it is set to 1, the system controlled servo spindle brand is CTB-GA or general purpose
inverter. When it is set to 8, the system controlled servo spindle brand is Delta.
NO.109 Spindle pulse control direction signal (0-reverse, 1-normal)
Used to change the rotation direction for the spindle position (pulse) control; that is, when this value
is set to 0, the spindle rotation direction is equivalent to the reversed direction of the command. When this
value is 1, the spindle rotation direction is equivalent to the direction of the command.
NO.110 Does the spindle use the electronic gear (0-Yes, 1-No)
Used to set whether the electronic gear is used at the spindle position control, where 0 indicate it is
used and 1 indicate it is not used.
NO.111 Numerator of spindle low-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
Used to set numerator of electronic gear when the spindle is at low gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.112 Denominator of spindle low-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
Used to set denominator of electronic gear when the spindle is at low gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.113 Numerator of spindle high-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
Used to set numerator of electronic gear when the spindle is at high gear, setting range 1—32767.
NO.114 Denominator of spindle high-gear electronic gear（1-32767）
Used to set denominator of electronic gear when the spindle is at high gear, setting range 1—32767.
Note: For the method of setting electronic gear of spindle, refer to the formula as below:
A: The rotation angle of the corresponding machine tool spindle when spindle motor rotates by one
revolution. Unit: degree
P: Number of pulses fed back by one revolution of the spindle motor (number of motor encoder lines ×
4)
NO.115 Is there gear control for the spindle (1-Yes, 0-No)
Used to set whether the spindle has high gear and low gear functions. When the machine tool has
automatic shift function, the system can achieve switching between high gear and low gear and speed
control the corresponding the gear based on the command. When the parameter value is set to 1, it
indicates that the equipment has high gear and low gear functions. If it is set to 0, it indicates that the
equipment has no high gear and low gear functions.
When the spindle has high gear and low gear upon the setting, K1 on standard sub-panel of the system
is the spindle high-gear option and K2 is the spindle low-gear option; in the program, M61 is the spindle
high-gear option command and M62 is the spindle low-gear option command. Auxiliary relays M64 and
M65 are respectively for high-gear and low-gear control; to achieve high-gear and low-gear control, edit the
PLC ladder diagram to introduce the corresponding auxiliary relay signal to the output relay Y, thus
controlling the shift circuit. Auxiliary relays M40 and M41 are respectively for high-gear and low-gear
detections; if you want to detect whether the shift is made in place, edit the PLC ladder diagram, to
introduce the corresponding detection signal to the corresponding auxiliary relay.
Setting of high-gear and low-gear speeds: Set high-gear and low-gear speed through the "speed"
parameters NO.101and NO.102.
Attention: If manual mechanical switching is available between high-gear and low-gear, you only need to
introduce the corresponding detection signal to the corresponding auxiliary relay when editing
the PLC ladder diagram, and set the corresponding high-gear and low-gear speeds. There is no
need to start high-gear and low-gear functions.
NO.116 Are the third and fourth gears closed (1-Yes, 0-No)
Used to set whether the spindle third/fourth gear is closed; when the parameter value is set to 1, it

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 150
User Manual
indicates the spindle third/fourth gear function is closed; when the parameter value is set to 0, it indicates
the spindle third /fourth gear function is not closed.
NO.117 Is the spindle started at the spindle shift (1-Yes, 0-No)
Used to set whether the spindle is required to swing at the time of spindle shift. When the parameter
value is set to 1, it indicates the spindle swings. When the parameter value is set to 0, it indicates the
spindle does not swing.
The specific setting is related to the mechanical structure of the shift mechanism. Normally, the
spindle needs to swing when the spindle gear is shifted.
NO.118 The time from stop to sway at spindle shift
Used to set the delay time from system stop signal output to the shift start when shift is made while
the spindle is rotating. Unit: 0.01s (second).
The specific setting is related to with the maximum speed of the spindle. If this value is too small,
there would be gear damage during shift.
NO.119 The time from sway to shift at spindle shift (0.01s)
Used to set the time from swing signal output to shift signal output at the time of spindle shift. Unit:
0.01s(second)
NO.120 Motor sway speed at spindle shift（0.01 rpm）
Used to set the speed of spindle motor during the spindle shift. Unit: 0.01r/min(revolution/minute)
The specific setting is related to the mechanical structure of the shift mechanism.
NO.121 The initial sway direction at spindle shift (0-Forward, 1-Reverse)
Used to set the direction from which the spindle motor rotates at the time of spindle shift. When the
parameter is set to 0, it indicates the direction is identical to the M03 direction; when the parameter is set
to 1, it indicates the direction is opposite to M03 direction.
NO.122 The forward sway time at spindle shift (0.01s)
Used to set the time for forward sway of the spindle motor during spindle shift. Unit: 0.01s (second).
The specific setting is related to the mechanical structure of the shift mechanism.
NO.123 The reverse sway time at spindle shift (0.01s)
Used to set the time for reverse sway of the spindle motor during spindle shift. Unit: 0.01s (second).
The specific setting is related to the mechanical structure of the shift mechanism. Normally, the CW
rotation time is identical to the reversed rotation time.
NO.124 Is the spindle shift output signal held (0-No, 1-Yes)
Used to set whether the spindle shift control signal (the state of auxiliary relays M64 and M65 ) is
continuously held after the shift is made in place. When the parameter value is set to 1, it indicates the
signal is held; when the parameter value is set to 0, it indicates the signal is not held.
The specific setting is related to the mechanical structure of the shift mechanism. Normally, it is not
needed to hold the signal.
N0.200 Is the maximum speed of the G1G2G3 single-axis limited [18-Yes]
This parameter is used to set whether the maximum speed of G1G2G3 single-axis is enabled; when it is
set to 18, it indicates this is enabled; when it is set to other values, it indicates this is not enabled.
N0.201 G1G2G3 maximum speed of X-axis(mm/min)
Used to set G1G2G3 maximum speed of X axis, unit: mm/min.
N0.202 G1G2G3 maximum speed of Y-axis(mm/min)
Used to set G1G2G3 maximum speed of Y axis, unit: mm/min.
N0.203 G1G2G3 maximum speed of Z-axis(mm/min)
Used to set G1G2G3 maximum speed of Z axis, unit: mm/min.
N0.204 G1G2G3 maximum speed of fourth-axis(mm/min)
Used to set G1G2G3 maximum speed of fourth axis, unit: mm/min.
N0.205 G1G2G3 maximum speed of fifth-axis(mm/min)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Used to set G1G2G3 maximum speed of fifth axis, unit: mm/min.
N0.206 Is orientation made before pulse control on rigid tapping [18-Yes]
This parameter is used to set whether orientation is made before pulse control on rigid tapping. When
this parameter is set to 18, it indicates the orientation is made before tapping; when this parameter is set to
other values, it indicates the orientation is not made.
N0.207 The maximum spindle speed for rigid tapping (r/min)[>=20] (only for pulse control)
Used to set the maximum spindle speed for rigid tapping when pulse control is made for rigid tapping;
this parameter works when it is greater than 20.
N0.208 Does G64/G60 work for G00 [16-Yes]
When the parameter is set to 16, the G64/G60 command has an impact on G00. When it set to the
other values, the G64 / G60 command has no effect on G00. When the parameter setting lets G64/G60
command have no effect on G00, the non-G00 block will make accurate positioning, when non-G00 block is
transferred to the G00 block.
N0.209 Rotary axis[Xrt Zrt Xmh Zmh Xwk Zwk *** ***]
Used to set X/Z axis functions and whether calculating is made.
The set value of parameter 128 is corresponding to Xrt; X axis is the rotary axis.
The set value of parameter 64 is corresponding to Zrt; Z axis is the rotary axis.
The set value of parameter 32 is corresponding to Xmh; X axis is the rotary axis for machine coordinate
system calculation.
The set value of parameter 16 is corresponding to Zmh; Z axis is the rotary axis for machine coordinate
system calculation.
The set value of parameter 8 is corresponding to Xwk; X axis is the rotary axis for workpeice
coordinate system calculation.
The set value of parameter 4 is corresponding to Zwk; Z axis is the rotary axis for workpeice
coordinate system calculation.
Example: Z axis is defined as the rotary axis and calculating is made for workpiece coordinate system
and machine coordinate system. 64+16+4＝84
N0.210 Spindle pulse output port for rigid tapping under interpolation control (X91; Y92; Z93;
A94; B95; C-other values)
Used to set the spindle pulse output port for interpolation control on rigid tapping; X axis pulse output
port is set to 91; Y axis pulse output port - 92; Z axis pulse output port - 93; A axis pulse output port - 94; C
axis pulse output port - other values.
Attention: Electronic gear of spindle for rigid tapping is still set in the spindle, but pulse signal direction
reverse is set in the corresponding feed axis.
NO.211,Initial speed of rigid tapping under pulse control (mm/min)[>5].
Setting initial speed of rigid tapping under pulse control.
NO.212, Initial speed of spindle for rigid tapping retract (rpm)
Setting initial speed of spindle for rigid tapping retract
NO.213,Spindle acceleration (deceleration) for rigid tapping engage ((rpm)/s)[>1]
Setting spindle acceleration (deceleration) for rigid tapping engage
NO.214, Spindle acceleration (deceleration) for rigid tapping retract ((rpm)/s)[>1]
Setting spindle acceleration (deceleration) for rigid tapping retract
NO.215, Spindle pre-rotation for rigid tapping engage (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
Setting spindle pre-rotation for rigid tapping engage (1/1000 revolution)
NO.216, Spindle tailing for rigid tapping engage (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
Setting spindle tailing for rigid tapping engage (1/1000 revolution)
NO.217, Spindle pre-rotation for rigid tapping retract (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
Setting spindle pre-rotation for rigid tapping retract (1/1000 revolution)
NO.218,spindle tailing for rigid tapping retract (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 152
User Manual
Setting spindle tailing for rigid tapping retract (1/1000 revolution) [>2]
NO.220,Spindle and encoder gear ratio, the number of spindle teeth
Setting spindle and encoder gear ratio, the number of spindle teeth
NO.221,Spindle and encoder gear ratio, the number of encoder teeth
Setting spindle and encoder gear ratio, the number of encoder teeth
NO.222, Y-axis function setting (0-rotary axis, 1-linear axis)
0 indicates Y axis is the rotary axis; 1 indicates Y axis is the linear axis.
NO.223,1-Workpiece coordinates calculation when Y axis is the rotary axis
When it is set to 1, it indicates workpiece coordinate system calculation when Y axis is the rotary axis.
NO.224, 1-Machine coordinates calculation when Y axis is the rotary axis
When it is set to 1, it indicates machine coordinates calculation when Y axis is the rotary axis.
NO.225, The feed axis is for the orthogonal pulse [X2;Y4:Z8;A16;B32;C64]
When it is set to 2, it indicates X axis is for the orthogonal pulse.
When it is set to 4, it indicates Y axis is for the orthogonal pulse.
When it is set to 8, it indicates Z axis is for the orthogonal pulse.
When it is set to 16, it indicates A axis is for the orthogonal pulse.
When it is set to 32, it indicates B axis is for the orthogonal pulse.
When it is set to 63, it indicates C axis is for the orthogonal pulse.
NO.226, Y-axis pulse control rigid tapping output port(X91;Y92;Z93;A94;B95;C96)
91 indicates Y axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from X axis pulse port.
92 indicates Y axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from Y axis pulse port.
93 indicates Y axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from Z axis pulse port.
94 indicates Y axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from A axis pulse port.
95 indicates Y axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from B axis pulse port.
96 indicates Y axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from C axis pulse port.
NO.227,X-axis pulse control rigid tapping output port(X91;Y92;Z93;A94;B95;C96)
91 indicates X axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from X axis pulse port.
92 indicates X axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from Y axis pulse port.
93 indicates X axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from Z axis pulse port.
94 indicates X axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from A axis pulse port.
95 indicates X axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from B axis pulse port.
96 indicates X axis pulse control rigid tapping output port is output from C axis pulse port.
NO.228,Y axis rigid tapping second spindle electronic gear numerator
Setting Y axis rigid tapping second spindle electronic gear numerator
NO.229,Y axis rigid tapping 2nd spindle electronic gear denominator
Setting Y axis rigid tapping second spindle electronic gear denumerator
NO.230, X axis rigid tapping third spindle electronic gear numerator
Setting X axis rigid tapping third spindle electronic gear numerator
NO.231, X axis rigid tapping 3nd spindle electronic gear denominator
Setting X axis rigid tapping third spindle electronic gear denumerator
NO.400, Change of coordinate axis name [xxxxx0]
The coordinate axis name must have six digits; the first digit indicates the name of the first axis on the
interface, and so on. The value 1 indicates X; 2-Y; 3-Z; 4-A; 5-B; 6-C.
After setting, this parameter can only become valid after system restart
Example: When you input 123460, it indicates the names of axes displayed on the interface are XYZAC
in order
Example: When you input 653000, it indicates the names of axes displayed on the interface are CBZ in
order

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
NO.401, Feed axis encoder feedback filtering parameter
Used to set feed axis encoder feedback filtering parameter
NO.402, Spindle encoder feedback filtering parameter
Used to set spindle encoder feedback filtering parameter.
NO.403,1st channel pulse(X91/81;Y92/82;Z93/83;A94/84;B95/85;C96/86)
91 indicates the 1st channel pulse output port is output from X axis pulse port; 81 indicates the 1st
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the X axis pulse port.
92 indicates the 1st channel pulse output port is output from Y axis pulse port; 82 indicates the 1st
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the Y axis pulse port.
93 indicates the 1st channel pulse output port is output from Z axis pulse port; 83 indicates the 1st
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the Z axis pulse port.
94 indicates the 1st channel pulse output port is output from A axis pulse port; 84 indicates the 1st
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the A axis pulse port.
95 indicates the 1st channel pulse output port is output from B axis pulse port; 85 indicates the 1st
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the B axis pulse port.
96 indicates the 1st channel pulse output port is output from C axis pulse port; 86 indicates the 1st
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the C axis pulse port.
NO.404, 2nd channel pulse(X91/81;Y92/82;Z93/83;A94/84;B95/85;C96/86)
91 indicates the 2nd channel pulse output port is output from X axis pulse port; 81 indicates the 2nd
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the X axis pulse port.
92 indicates the 2nd channel pulse output port is output from Y axis pulse port; 81 indicates the 2nd
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the Y axis pulse port.
93 indicates the 2nd channel pulse output port is output from Z axis pulse port; 83 indicates the 2nd
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the Z axis pulse port.
94 indicates the 2nd channel pulse output port is output from A axis pulse port; 84 indicates the 2nd
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the A axis pulse port.
95 indicates the 2nd channel pulse output port is output from B axis pulse port; 85 indicates the 2nd
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the B axis pulse port.
96 indicates the 2nd channel pulse output port is output from C axis pulse port; 86 indicates the 2nd
channel pulse output port outputs the pulse port direction signal reverse from the C axis pulse port.
NO.405, Number of pulses per revolution for 1st channel
Setting number of pulses per revolution for 1st channel
NO.406, First channel sharing feed axis (X61;Y62;Z63;A64;B65)
61 indicates the 1st channel sharing X axis.
62 indicates the 1st channel sharing Y axis.
63 indicates the 1st channel sharing Z axis.
64 indicates the 1st channel sharing A axis.
65 indicates the 1st channel sharing B axis.
commands: Used to realize angular positioning of this feed axis-the first channel spindle.
Example: Sharing between A axis and the 1st spindle.
Axis parameters are set as below:
16,Whether the feed axis uses electronic gear (0-Yes, 1-No). Set as: 0.
23.Numerator of electronic gear for A axis. Set as: 4096.
24. Denominator of electronic gear for A axis. Set as: 360000.
30.A axis direction signal (0-Reverse, 1-Normal). Set as: 1.
403.The first channel pulse (X91/81;Y92/82;Z93/83;A94/84;B95/85;C96/86)。Set as:94
405. Number of pulses per revolution for the first channel. Set as: 4096.
406.The first channel sharing feed axis (X61;Y62;Z63;A64;B65). Set as:64。

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 154
User Manual
NO.407, Number of pulses per revolution for second channel
Setting number of pulses per revolution for second channel
NO.408,Standby application
NO.409,First channel pulse acceleration and deceleration (rpm/2ms)
Setting first channel pulse acceleration and deceleration.
NO.410,Second channel pulse acceleration and deceleration (rpm/2ms)
Setting second channel pulse acceleration and deceleration.
commands:
The maximum speed of the first channel is limited by the maximum speed of the first spindle at the
high gear (revolutions per minute).
The maximum speed of the second channel is limited by the maximum speed of the second spindle
(revolutions per minute).
The first channel command:
M03.CW rotation. (The corresponding auxiliary relay M53 is valid)
M04. Reversed rotation. (The corresponding auxiliary relay M54 is valid)
Stop. (The corresponding auxiliary relay M55 is valid). Note: When the auxiliary relay M55 is valid, the
system automatically stops sending pulses.
S_,Speed (revolution/min)
The second channel command:
M203.CW rotation. (The corresponding auxiliary relay M231 is valid)
M204, Reversed rotation. (The corresponding auxiliary relay M232 is valid)
M205. Stop.(The corresponding auxiliary relays M231 and M232 are invalid). Note: When auxiliary
relays M231 and M232 are invalid, the system automatically stops sending pulses.
SS_, speed (revolutions/minute)
When the 1st channel port pulse is set, the 3rd spindle function is provided; the third spindle adopts
analog control, and on the hardware aspect output is from the analog port of the original first spindle.
When the second channel port pulse is set, the fourth spindle function is provided; the fourth spindle
adopts analog control, and on the hardware aspect output is from the analog port of the original second
spindle.
NO.411, Feed axis absolute encoder(X4,Y8,Z16,A32,B64)
Set to 4 for X axis as the absolute encoder;
Set to 8 for Y axis as the absolute encoder;
Set to 16 for Z axis as the absolute encoder;
Set to 32 for A axis as the absolute encoder;
Set to 64 for B axis as the absolute encoder;
NO.412,Absolute encoder multi-revolution low 16-bit memory address
Absolute encoder multi-revolution low 16-bit memory address: Set to 92 for DO driver
NO.413,Absolute encoder single-revolution high 16-bit memory address
Absolute encoder single-revolution high 16-bit memory address: Set to 91 for DO driver
NO.414,Absolute encoder single-revolution low 16-bit memory address
Absolute encoder single-revolution low 16-bit memory address: Set to 90 for DO driver
NO.415, Number of pulses per cycle for X-axis absolute encoder
Setting number of pulses per cycle for X-axis absolute encoder
NO.416, Number of pulses per cycle for Y-axis absolute encoder
Setting number of pulses per cycle for Y-axis absolute encoder
NO.417, Number of pulses per cycle for Z-axis absolute encoder
Setting number of pulses per cycle for Z-axis absolute encoder
NO.418, Number of pulses per cycle for fourth-axis absolute encoder

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Setting number of pulses per cycle for fourth-axis absolute encoder
NO.419, Number of pulses per cycle for fifth-axis absolute encoder
Setting number of pulses per cycle for fifth-axis absolute encoder
NO.420,Corresponding coordinate distance value per revolution for X-axis absolute encoder
(nm)
Used to set coordinate distance corresponding to each revolution of X axis absolute encoder. When it is
set to be negative, it indicates reversed coordinate direction. Unit: nanometer (nm).
NO.421,Corresponding coordinate distance value per revolution for Y-axis absolute encoder
(nm)
Used to set coordinate distance corresponding to each revolution of Y axis absolute encoder. When it is
NO.422,Corresponding coordinate distance value per revolution for Z-axis absolute encoder
(nm)
Used to set coordinate distance corresponding to each revolution of Z axis absolute encoder. When it is
NO.423,Corresponding coordinate distance value per revolution for fourth-axis absolute
encoder (nm)
Used to set coordinate distance corresponding to each revolution of fourth axis absolute encoder.
When it is set to be negative, it indicates reversed coordinate direction. Unit: nanometer (nm).
NO.424,Corresponding coordinate distance value per revolution for fifth-axis absolute encoder
(nm)
Used to set coordinate distance corresponding to each revolution of fifth axis absolute encoder. When
it is set to be negative, it indicates reversed coordinate direction. Unit: nanometer (nm).
NO.425,X-axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset [input E to clear multi-revolution]
X axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset, used to resolve the problem of machine coordinates
overflow caused by too large multi-revolution value. Input E to clear multi-revolution.
NO.426,Y-axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset [input E to clear multi-revolution]
Y axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset, used to resolve the problem of machine coordinates
NO.427,Z-axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset [input E to clear multi-revolution]
Z axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset, used to resolve the problem of machine coordinates
NO.428,fourth-axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset [input E to clear multi-revolution]
Fourth axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset, used to resolve the problem of machine
coordinates overflow caused by too large multi-revolution value. Input E to clear multi-revolution.
NO.429,fifth-axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset [input E to clear multi-revolution]
Fifth axis absolute encoder multi-revolution offset, used to resolve the problem of machine coordinates
NO.430,Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of X-axis
absolute encoder
NO.431,Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of Y-axis
absolute encoder
NO.432,Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of Z-axis
absolute encoder
NO.433,Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of
fourth-axis absolute encoder
NO.434,Denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of
fifth-axis absolute encoder

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 156
User Manual
Attention:
1.485 communication driver station address: 1 corresponding to the X axis; 2 corresponding to the Y
axis; 3 corresponding to the Z axis; 4 corresponding to the fourth axis; 5 corresponding to the fifth
axis.
2. 485 communication baud rate is set to 19200; number of data bits is set to 8; number of stop bit is
set to 1; format is set to RTU format.
3. 485 communication odd/even check set as: odd check.
4.The absolute encoder single-revolution offset is stored in the "offset after return to reference point"
parameter of each feed axis; unit of the offset in um.
5.The parameter “denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of
absolute encoder” is always positive. This means the actual coordinate distance value (nm)
corresponding to each revolution of absolute encoder is equal to the value gotten via dividing the
parameter “coordinate distance value (nm) corresponding to each revolution of absolute encoder”
by “denominator of coordinate distance value corresponding to each revolution of absolute encoder”
The system will read the coordinates from the driver at startup. The zero return flag is effective after
successful reading.
When you press the R key to reset the alarm on the alarm display interface for diagnosis, the current
coordinates can be read and refreshed from the driver.
In addition, pulse fed back to the system by the DO 17-bit encoder driver is still sent by 2500 lines
(orthogonal pulse sent through the A and B signal lines).
NO.481,Speed cutoff point for spindle triangle and star switching (rpm)
Used to set speed cutoff point for spindle speed triangle and star switching. When the spindle speed is
higher than speed cutoff point for triangle and star switching, M233 is valid; otherwise, it is invalid.
5.2.6 Comprehensive parameters
The comprehensive parameter interface is used to set some of the system parameters other than the
above parameters, which are not easily categorized.
When the function soft key corresponding to "comprehensive parameter" in the parameter menu is
pressed under the parameter interface, you will enter the comprhensive parameter setting interface, as
shown in Figure 5.9:
Figure 5.9 Comprehensive parameter

Use the Up and Down cursor keys to select the currently set parameter; press the Enter key and then
the data input dialog box pops up; for example, see the following figure:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 5.10
List of comprehensive parameters:
1.Sub-panel control (18 represents all is controlled by PLC)
2.Internal parameter of system
3. Language selection (1-Chinese, 0-English)
4. Tool length/fixed cycle/circular clearance compensation mode
5. Circular B-type clearance compensation speed (mm/min)
6. Sub-panel type(A3；B0；C3；D6；E7；F15)
7. Whether to display a custom alarm (0-No, 1- Yes)
8. Whether to display feed axis and spindle alarms (0-No, 1- Yes)
9. Whether to display a cooling/lubrication alarm (0-No, 1- Yes)
10. Whether to enable tool selection and tool change functions (0-No, 1- Yes)
11. Tool management mode
12. Tool selection mode/tool count signal
13. Return to tool change point axis (3-ZX; 4-ZY; 5-ZXY; others-Z)
14. The reference point that the feed axis will return to at tool change
15. Whether to detect spindle orientation and the feed axis return to the tool change point prior to tool
change
16. Whether the spindle is oriented when the tool is changed
17. The spindle orientation stop angle at tool change (0.1 degree)
18. Magazine type
19. Special magazine (0: standard, 16: special bamboo hat style, 32: servo magazine, 64: special ARM)
20. Z axis lifting height at tool change for bamboo hat style magazine (mm)
21. Z axis lifting speed at tool change for bamboo hat style magazine （mm/min）
22. Quick lifting distance of Z axis for bamboo hat style magazine (mm)
23.Tool back-off delay (turntable style tool seat falling/tool clamping ) for bamboo hat style magazine
(0.1 s)
24. Delay time after tool unclamping at tool change (0.1 s)
25.Whether Z axis motion and main arm tool holding/bamboo style magazine are interlocked
26.Whether magazine moving forward M41 checks Z axis position (0-Yes, 1-No)
27. Maximum tool number at the fixed tool location zone
28. Power status of each axis at startup
29.Delay time for re-energization after power-off of the driver(0.1s)
31. Tool radius C compensation establishment mode

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 158
User Manual
32. Tool radius C compensation cancelling mode
33. Whether M03/M04 command detects spindle speed is in place (0-Yes, 1-No)
34. Delay time before detecting that the spindle speed is in place(0.1s)
35.Initial speed for circular B type clearance compensation (mm/min)[>10]
36. Acceleration circular B type clearance compensation ((mm/min)/s)[>10]
61.Magazine tool count signal [rising edge” 1000+ number”, falling edge “2000+number”]
62. Magazine location signal [1000+number]
63. Magazine CW rotation output point [1000+ number]
64. Magazine CCW rotation output point [1000+ number]
65.Arm braking input point [1000+ number]
66. Arm rotation output point [1000+ number]
100.Reference point 1 X (mm)
101. Reference point 1 Y (mm)
102. Reference point 1 Z (mm)
103. Reference point 1 A (mm)
104. Reference point 2 X (mm)
116. Reference point 4 B (mm)
150.Whether to start voltage compensation(2-Yes, 0-No)
151.Voltage compensation point 0.1V
160.Voltage compensation point 1V

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
170.Voltage compensation amount
190.X axis machine coordinates of initial location point for automatic tool setting (mm)
191.Y axis machine coordinates of initial location point for automatic tool setting (mm)
192. Z axis machine coordinates of initial location point and return point for automatic tool setting
(mm)
193.Quick negative moving speed for automatic tool setting (mm/min)
194.Slow forward moving speed for automatic tool setting (mm/min)
195.Z axis coordinates of upper surface of workpeice under the current workpiece coordinate system
after automatic tool setting (mm)
196. Quick location point speed for automatic tool setting (mm/min)
197.Minimum machine coordinates of Z axis (mm)
198.Z axis drop [i.e. the height of the upper surface of tool setting gauge relative to the upper surface of
workpiece ](mm)
199.Automatic tool setting mode (1-Fixed tool setting gauge, 0-Floating tool setting gauge)
200.Standby
201.Standby
202.Whether to start PLC program running (0-Stop, 1-Start)
203.Defining the current parameter settings as factory parameters
204.Whether to enable high-speed PLC function [18-Yese]
205.System G code group [32-Group B]
206.Backlash compensation state after stop of coordinate axis
207.Time delay after tool seat lifting (ms)
208.The time from the arm’s detecting stop signal to output stop (ms)
209.Gear shift prior to spindle orientation (11-18 represent 1st-8th gears respectively)
210.The longest waiting time for forward and backward motion of bamboo hat style magazine [>5]
(0.1s)
211.Speed boundary for full interlocking between the spindle and the chuck (or tool unclamping)
[>5](rpm)
309.Dynamic following error of X axis(pulse)[>1]
309a.Static error X axis (pulse)[>1]
310.Dynamic following error of Y axis(pulse)[>1]
310a .Static error Y axis (pulse)[>1]
311.Dynamic following error of Z axis(pulse)[>1]
311a .Static error Z axis (pulse)[>1]
312.Dynamic following error of fourth axis(pulse)[>1]
312a.Static error fourth axis (pulse)[>1]
313.Dynamic following error of fifth axis(pulse)[>1]
313a .Static error fifth axis (pulse)[>1]
314.X-axis feedback electronic gear numerator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead
(um), M-number of encoder lines]
315.Y-axis feedback electronic gear numerator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead
316.Z-axis feedback electronic gear numerator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead
317.Fourth-axis feedback electronic gear numerator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 160
User Manual
lead (um), M-number of encoder lines]
318.Fifth-axis feedback electronic gear numerator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead
319.Feedback electronic gear denominator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead (um),
M-number of encoder lines]
320.Feedback electronic gear denominator of Y axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead (um),
321.Feedback electronic gear denominator of Z axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead (um),
322.Feedback electronic gear denominator of fourth axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead
323.Feedback electronic gear denominator of fifth axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw lead (um),
380.Custom system interface [4-Whole; 8-Part]
401.Set the current parameter to stepper motor parameter
402.Set the current parameter to the servo motor parameter
450.System control mode (20xx-MII; 30xx-MIII; other-other types of bus or pulse type)
commands for comprehensive parameters:

NO.1 Sub-panel control (18 represents all is controlled by PLC)
Used to set the control mode of the key interface of the sub-panel. If the value is set to 18, the key
interface of the sub-panel is realized by the user to edit the PLC program (except for the coordinate button
and the band switch). If the value is not set to 18, the key interface of the sub-panel is realized by the
internal preset program of system.
NO.2 Internal parameter of system
Used to set system startup screen; when it is set to 6, it indicates the system automatically enters the
set startup picture display screen at the time of power-on; when set to 8, it indicates the system startup
picture can be imported; enter 9 and press Enter key to make the deleted imported picture reset; after
setting the GCODEX, press Enter key to delete all the gcode encoded. bmp pictures (graphic dialogue
pictures); after setting MISCEL, press Enter key to delete centfunc.bmp (automatic centering pictures) and
workcoor.bmp (workpiece coordinate system pictures) and tooloffset.bmp (tool setting function picture)
pictures.
NO.3 Language selection (1-Chinese, 0-English)
Used to set whether system interface is displayed in Chinese or English. When the set value of the
parameter is 1, it means Chinese display is used. When the parameter is set to 0, it means English display is
used.
After the parameter is set, the system interface will be refreshed immediately.
NO. 4 Tool length/fixed cycle/circular clearance compensation mode
(0 bit: Length compensation; 1st bit: fixed cycle; 3rd bit: circular clearance compensation)(0: A; 1: B)
Tool length compensation / fixed cycle / circular clearance compensation method.
Used to set tool length compensation / fixed cycle / circular clearance compensation modes: A and B;
this parameter is calculated in binary form and then converted to decimal input value.
The 0th bit is used to set the tool length compensation mode. The tool length compensation includes
both A and B modes. When the value is 0, it corresponds to Mode A and the value is 1, it corresponds to
Mode B.
Mode A tool length compensation refers to compensation for tool length difference along the Z axis.
Mode B tool length compensation means that plane selection command G17/G18/G19 decides to make
compensation for the tool length difference along the X, Y or Z axis.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
The 1st bit is used to set the fixed cycle mode. The fixed cycle includes two modes: A and B; when the
value is 0, it corresponds to mode A, when the value is 1, it corresponds to mode B.
Mode A indicates that the positioning plane of the fixed cycle is always G17 (i.e. XY plane);
Mode B indicates that the positioning plane of the fixed cycle is determined by the selection command
G17/G18/ G19.
The second bit is used to set circular clearance compensation mode. The circular clearance
compensation includes two modes: A and B, where the value of 0 corresponds to the mode A and the value
of 1 corresponds to mode B.
Circular clearance compensation includes two modes: A and B, in which the value of 0 corresponds to
the mode A and the value of 8 corresponds to the mode B, and the value of +64 indicates no backlash
compensation is made during circular machining. The default backlash compensation of the system is of
mode A.
Mode A represents that the circular clearance compensation method is to perform backlash
compensation and the circular interpolation at the same time;
Mode B represents that the circular clearance compensation method is to first stop the circular
interpolation, and then to complete the backlash compensation at the speed of NO.5 parameter value, and
then to continue to perform the circular interpolation.
Example: If the length compensation adopts mode B, fixed cycle adopts mode A and circular clearance
compensation uses mode B, the input value shall be: 5 (binary value: 101).
NO.5 Circular B-type clearance compensation speed (mm/min)
Used to set the running speed of B-type clearance compensation. Unit: mm/min (millimeter/min).
NO.6 Sub-panel type （A3；B0；C3；D6；E7；F15）
The corresponding type is set according to the sub-panel configured by the system. When it is set to 3,
it indicates that the A-type sub-panel or the C-type sub-panel is provide; when set to 0, B-type sub-panel is
provided; when set to 6, it indicates the D-type sub-panel is configured. When it is set to 7, E type sub-panel
is provided; when set to 15, F-type sub-panel is configured.
NO.7 Whether to display a custom alarm (0-No, 1- Yes)
Used to set whether the status of the custom alarm auxiliary relay is displayed in the message display
bar in real time. When the parameter value is set to 1, this is displayed; when the parameter value is set to 0,
this is not displayed
NO.8 Whether to display feed axis and spindle alarms (0-No, 1- Yes)
Used to set whether the statuses of auxiliary relays for feed axis and spindle alarms are displayed in
the message display bar in real time. When the parameter value is set to 1, this is displayed; when the
parameter value is set to 0, this is not displayed.
NO.9 Whether to display a cooling/lubrication alarm (0-No, 1- Yes).
Used to set whether the statuses of auxiliary relays for the cooling and lubrication alarms are
displayed in the message display bar in real time. When the parameter value is set to 1, this is displayed;
when the parameter value is set to 0, this is not displayed.
NO.10 Whether to enable tool selection and tool change functions (0-No, 1- Yes).
Used to set whether the system starts the tool selection and tool change functions. The setting of this
parameter is related to the configuration of the machine tool (whether or not the magazine is configured).
When this parameter is set to 0, it means that there is no such function; when this parameter is set to 1, it
means this function is available for use.
When this parameter is set to 1, the machine tool has the automatic tool exchange function and can
carry out multi-tool work. If the machine tool does not have a magazine and need to manually change the
tool to achieve multi-tool work, you will need to set this parameter to 0, but during auto running of the
program, after the manual tool change, the program also needs to use the TxxDxxHxx command to achieve
multi-tool control and radius/ length compensation.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 162
User Manual
NO.11 Tool management mode
Used to set the tool change mode for the "turntable style" and "Bamboo style" magazines. When the
parameter value is set to 1, it means using the T command to directly change the tool; when the parameter
value is 0, it means using the M06 command for tool change
NO.12 Tool selection mode/tool count signal
When binary 0 bit is 1 (decimal + 1), it indicates tool selection mode of the machining center is the
two-way random tool selection.
When binary first bit is 1 (decimal + 2), it indicates machining center tool count signal detection along
the reverse.
When binary second bit is 1 (decimal +4), it indicates filtering is made for machining center magazine
tool count signal;
When binary third bit is 1 (decimal +8), it indicates filtering is made for machining center arm stop
signal;
When binary fourth bit is 1 (decimal + 16), it indicates 8ms filtering mode is adopted for machining
center magazine tool count signal and machining center arm stop signal (otherwise, it indicates 4ms
filtering mode is adopted).
When binary fifth bit is 1 (decimal + 32), it indicates machining center arm magazine will automatically
let tool seat fall down after execution of T instrument.
When binary sixth bit is 1 (Decimal +64), it indicates when executing the last step of tool change
command to lift the tool seat, machining center arm magazine executes the next block without detecting
whether it is lifted in place.
When binary seventh bit is 1 (decimal +128), it indicates when T command is executed, the next block
is executed without waiting for the tool seat to be lifted.
When binary eighth bit is 1 (decimal +256), it indicates 2ms filtering is made for lathe tool position
detection signal;
When binary ninth bit is 1 (decimal +512), it indicates 4ms filtering is made for lathe tool position
detection signal;
When binary tenth bit is 1 (decimal +1024), it indicates 8ms filtering is made for lathe tool position
detection signal;
If you need longer filtering time, add them; for example, if you need 14ms filtering, set it to +1792 (256
+ 512 + 1024 = 1792).
When binary 11th bit is 1 (decimal +2048), it indicates 2ms filtering is made for command WAT
waiting input signal;
If you need longer filtering time, add them. For example: If you need 14ms filtering, set it to +14336
(2048+4096+8192=14336). Filtering processing can improve the anti-jamming capability of the input
signal.
NO.13 Return to tool change point axis (3-ZX; 4-ZY; 5-ZXY; 13-XZ; 15-XZY; 24-YZ; 25-YZX;others-Z)
Used to set those feed axes needing to return to a specific parameter point (tool change point) at
automatic tool change;
When it is set to 3, it indicates ZX axis need to return to the tool change point;
When it is set to 4, it indicates ZY axis need to return to the tool change point;
When it is set to 5, it indicates ZXY axis need to return to the tool change point;
When it is set to 13, it indicates XZ axis need to return to the tool change point;
When it is set to 15, it indicates XZY axis need to return to the tool change point;

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
When it is set to 24, it indicates YZ axis need to return to the tool change point;
When it is set to 25, it indicates YZX axis need to return to the tool change point;
When it is set to other values, it indicates Z axis needs to return to the tool change point.
The specific settings of this parameter is related to machine type and magazine installation type.
Usually, for automatic tool change at the vertical machining center, only Z-axis needs to return to the tool
change point.
NO.14 The reference point that the feed axis will return to at tool change (1, 2, 3 and 4
represent the corresponding reference points; other values represent no motion)
Used to set which reference point value is adopted by coordinates of auto tool change point; the
setting range: 1-4(corresponding to the first to the fourth reference points). Normally, the second reference
point value is used as the tool change point. Other values excluding 1, 2, 3 and 4 indicates the axis does not
move at tool change.
NO.15 Whether to detect spindle orientation and feed axis tool change point prior to tool
change (0-Detection is made, 1- Detection is not made).
Used to set whether to detect whether the spindle orientation is completed and whether the feed axis
is moved to the tool change point before the automatic tool change. When this parameter is set to 1, it
indicates that the spindle orientation angle and feed axis coordinates are detected before the automatic tool
change, to enhance the safety. When the parameter is set to 0, it means that it is not needed to detect the
spindle orientation angle and feed axis coordinates before the automatic tool change.
When this parameter is set, if the machine tool has the automatic tool change function, it is
recommended to set it to 1 to enhance the safety of the automatic tool change and reduce the equipment
failure as much as possible.
NO.16 Whether the spindle is oriented when the tool is changed (0-It is oriented, 1- It is not
oriented)
Used to set whether the system automatically controls the spindle orientation for automatic tool
change, to prepare for tool exchange.
When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the system does not automatically control the spindle
orientation. The spindle shall be oriented with the corresponding command before changing the tool. When
it is set to 1, the system will automatically control the spindle orientation.
NO.17 The spindle orientation stop angle at tool change (0.1 degree) (Negative value represents
no orientation)
Used to set the spindle orientation stop angle at the automatic tool change; the setting range: 0-3600,
unit 0.1 degree.
Normally, the angle at which the spindle is stopped at the time of automatic tool change is achieved by
the spindle servo driver. This parameter is only required to be set when the axis parameter NO.104 is set to
0, in order to determine the angle at which the spindle is stopped at the time of automatic tool change.
NO.18 Magazine type
Used to set the magazine type configured for the machine tool, to determine how the system controls
the magazine.
When this parameter is set to 0, it means the "Turntable style" (cam type with arm) magazine is
configured; when it is set to 1, it indicates no magazine; when set to 2, it indicates the "Bamboo hat style"
magazine is configured.
This parameter setting is related to the configuration of the machine tool. To realize the control of the
corresponding magazine, you need to edit the corresponding PLC program in addition to setting this
parameter.
NO.19 Special magazine
Used to set the magazine type configured for the machine tool, to determine how the system controls
the magazine.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 164
User Manual
When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates the standard “turntable style” or “bamboo hat style”
magazine is configured; when set to 16, it indicates the special bamboo hat style magazine is configured;
when set to 32, servo control magazine is configured; when set to 64, special ARM magazine is configured.
This parameter setting is related to the configuration of the machine tool. To realize the control of the
corresponding magazine, you need to edit the corresponding PLC program in addition to setting this
parameter.
NO.20 Z axis lifting height at tool change for bamboo hat style magazine (mm)
Used to set Z axis lifting height at tool unclamping during automatic tool change for the configured
bamboo hat style magazine; unit: mm (Millimeter).
This value must be greater than the length of tool holder, to ensure that the tool holder does not
interfere with the spindle head when the tool disk is turned or retracted after tool unclamping.
NO.21 Z axis lifting speed at tool change for bamboo hat style magazine （mm/min）
Used to set the speed at which Z axis moves to NO.22 parameter set height, at tool unclamping during
automatic tool change for configured bamboo hat style magazine; unit: mm/min (millimeter/min).
This parameter shall not be set too high, because the spindle quick leave from and approach to the
tool disk will have impact on it. This may affect the rotation accuracy of the tool disk and lead to
deformation of the magazine; also, it can not be set too small; otherwise, it will affect the efficiency of the
tool change.
NO.22 Quick lifting distance of Z axis for bamboo hat style magazine（mm）
Used to set Z axis quick lifting distance at tool unclamping during automatic tool change for configured
bamboo hat style magazine; unit: mm (millimeter).
This value must be less than NO.20 parameter value.
NO.23 Tool back-off delay (turntable style tool seat falling/tool clamping ) for bamboo hat style
magazine (0.1s)
Used to set how long the delay lasts to perform the tool disk back-off action after the spindle moves
down and holds the tool holder when the bamboo style magazine performs the tool change action; how
long the delay lasts to perform the arm tool clasping action after the tool seat falls when the turntable style
magazine performs the tool change action; as well as how long the delay lasts to perform the arm zero
return action after the tool is changed and clamped when the turntable style magazine performs the tool
change action; it is used to set the delay time under the above three conditions; unit: 0.1s (second).
Setting of this parameter is related to magazine type.
NO.24 Delay time after tool unclamping at tool change (0.1s)

Used set how long the delay lasts to perform the next action of tool change after tool unclamping
in-place signal becomes effective when the automatic tool change performs the tool unclamping actions.
Unit: 0.1s (second).
NO.25 Whether Z axis motion and main arm tool holding/bamboo style tool magazine are
interlocked.
Used to set whether Z axis moving range and tool disk (bamboo style tool magazine) or arm (turntable
style tool magazine) status are interlocked; that is, when the tool disk is at pushed state or the arm is at tool
clasping state, it is used to set whether Z axis coordinates can not run below the value for Z axis tool change
point.
When this parameter is set to 1, it means that this is limited to prevent the Z axis from moving below
the tool change point and damaging the magazine, and to enhance the safety. When this parameter is set to
0, it means this is not limited.
Setting of this parameter is related to the using situation. Usually, in the debugging, this parameter is
set as unlimited to facilitate debugging, but you shall be careful to ensure that the Z-axis position does not
interfere with the tool disk; in normal service condition, it is recommended to set it as limited to ensure the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
safety.
NO.26 Whether magazine moving forward M41 checks Z axis position (0-Yes, 1-No)
Used to set whether to check the Z-axis position when the magazine moves forwards (M41) under
manual and MDI states. When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that this is to be detected. At this time,
forward moving of the magazine can only be executed when the Z-axis is at coordinates of tool change point
+ 20mm position. When set to 1, it indicates this is not detected.
Setting of this parameter depends on the situation. Usually, in the initial debugging of equipment, for
the convenience of debugging, the parameter is set to no detection, but in the normal use, it is
recommended to set it to be detected for safety reason.
NO.27 Maximum tool number at the fixed tool location zone (After setting this parameter,
initialize the table of tool seats)
Used to set the range of the fixed tool location zone (tool is corresponding to tool seat number and
random tool change is not allowed). Setting range: 1 to maximum tool seat number.
For example: When the value of this parameter is set to 5, it indicates that the fixed tool location zone
is from No. 1 tool seat to No. 5 tool seat; in this zone, the tool change is corresponding to initial tool
installation and random tool change is not allowed.
This parameter is mainly used to install large-diameter tool and the tool diameter may be greater than
the distance between the two tool seats; if random tool change is made, tool collision will occur; therefore,
it is needed to place it in a fixed tool location zone.
Attention: After setting this parameter, the table of tool seats must be initialized.
NO.28 Power status of each axis at startup (0: Auto power-on at startup; 1: No power-on at
startup)
Used to set the control state of each axis power supply when the system enters the system control
interface after start. When it is set to 0, it indicates the system automatically energizes the driver of each
axis after it finds everything is normal upon detection at startup; when set to 1, it indicates the system will
not automatically energize the driver of each axis and it is needed to manually control power supply of each
axis diver.
The premise of setting this parameter is that the power supply of each axis driver is controlled by
command appliances such as contactors. If the power is directly supplied from the main switch of the
machine tool, this parameter has no meaning to its control.
When it is set to auto power-on at startup, after the system is started and emergency stop switch is
lifted from the pressed state, the system will automatically make K8 indicator light up, as well as you can
edit the PLC program to control the external circuit to energize the axes; when the system can not
automatically energize each axis driver by the setting, it is needed to press the K8 key to energize each axis
driver (it is needed to edit PLC program).
NO.29 Delay time for re-energization after power-off of the driver（0.1s）
Used to set how long the delay lasts to re-energize the driver after the system cuts off the power
supply to the driver when the power supply to each axis driver is controlled by the system. Unit: 0.1s
(second).
NO.31Tool radius C compensation establishment mode (0-mode A, 1-mode B)
Used to set the tool radius C compensation establishment mode. In this system, the tool radius C
compensation is established in both A and B modes (see Chapter 4.6 of this manual).
When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the tool radius C compensation is established in mode
A. When set to 1, the tool radius C compensation is established in mode B.
NO.32 Tool radius C compensation cancelling mode (1-A, 0-B)
Used to set the tool radius C compensation cancelling mode. In this system, the tool radius C
compensation is cancelled in both A and B modes (see Chapter 4.6 of this manual).
When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the tool radius C compensation is cancelled in mode A.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 166
User Manual
When set to 1, the tool radius C compensation is cancelled in mode B.
NO.33 Whether M03/M04 command detects spindle speed is in place (0-Yes, 1-No)
Used to set whether executing M03/M04 command detects the speed of main spindle is in place, when
the program starts running in the automatic state. When this parameter is set to 0, this will be detected;
when set to 1, this will not be detected.
The setting of this parameter depends on the configuration and usage of the machine tool equipment.
If you want to detect the machine tool, the spindle speed control device must be configured and the PLC
program shall also be programmed to introduce the speed in-place signal of spindle speed control device
into the system auxiliary relay.
NO.34 Delay time before detecting that the spindle speed is in place（0.1s）
Used to set how long the delay lasts to detect the state of speed in-place auxiliary relay after the
system sends the M03/M04 command. Unit: 0.1s (second).
The setting of this parameter depends on the maximum speed and the inertia of the spindle. The
higher the maximum speed or the greater the inertia, the greater the set value of this parameter (longer
spindle acceleration time).
NO.35,Initial speed for circular B type clearance compensation (mm/min)[>10]
Used to set the initial speed of circular B type compensation.
NO.36,Acceleration circular B type clearance compensation ((mm/min)/s)[>10]
Used to set the acceleration of circular B type compensation.
NO.61,Magazine tool count signal [rising edge” 1000+ number”, falling edge “2000+number”]
1000+ input point number, representing that modifying magazine tool count signal rising edge is valid;
2000+ input point t number, representing that modifying magazine tool count signal falling edge is invalid.
For example: 1022 represents X22 is the tool count and the rising edge is valid. 2023 represents X23 is the
tool count and the falling edge is valid.
NO.62,Magazine location signal [1000+number]
1000+input point number, representing modifying the magazine positioning signal. For example:
1001 means X1 is the magazine positioning signal.
NO.63,Magazine CW rotation output point [1000+number]
1000+ input point number, representing modifying magazine CW rotation output point. For example:
1001 means Y1 magazine CW rotation output signal.
NO.64, Magazine CCW rotation output point [1000+number]
1000+ input point number, representing modifying magazine reversed rotation output point. For
example: 1002 means Y2 magazine reversed rotation output signal.
NO.65,Arm braking input point [1000+number]
1000+ input point number, representing modifying arm brake input point. For example: 1002 means
X2 is the arm brake input signal.
NO.66, Arm rotation output point [1000+number]
1000+ input point number, representing modifying arm brake rotation input point. For example: 1003
means Y3 is the arm rotation input signal.
If the above parameters are not set, processing will be made as per the original fixed input and output
points.
Special Notice: If the above parameters are set to custom input and output points, the corresponding
output points in ladder diagram must also be modified accordingly.
Parameters for NO.100 ~ NO.119 reference point
The system can set four reference points (from the first reference point to the fourth reference point)
in the machine coordinate system. The coordinates of each reference point can be modified on the
reference point setting interface.
The first reference point is often referred to as the machine reference point, which is a fixed point on

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
the machine tool and is determined by the detection device. With the reference point return function
(available for manual and automatic states), the tool can easily move to that position. The tool
automatically moves to the reference point along the specified axis. When the return to the reference point
is completed, the machine coordinates are refreshed to coordinates of the first reference point. Normally,
the first reference point coincides with the machine zero, and the rest of the reference points are
established based on the first reference point, as shown in Figure 5.11:
Fig. 5.11 Machine zero and four reference points

In the parameter menu, press the NO.100 ~ NO.119 parameters corresponding to the "comprehensive
parameters" to set four reference points.
Fig. 5.12 Reference point setting =8

Move the cursor up and down to select the reference point you want to currently modify; then press
Enter key to show the input dialog box and then input the value.
The first reference point is a special location point, which is usually set by the machine tool
manufacturer and is no longer changed again. Yet, the remaining three reference points are typically used
as positions for automatic tool exchange or for other purposes.
NO.150 Whether to start voltage compensation
When it is set to 2, it means starting the analog voltage (DA1) compensation. When set to 0, it means
that the voltage compensation function is not started.
NO.151~NO.169 parameters are used to set voltage compensation values of spindle analog
voltage.
NO.170 Voltage compensation
NO.190, X axis machine coordinates of initial location point for automatic tool setting (mm)
Used to set X axis machine coordinates of initial location point for automatic tool setting

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 168
User Manual
NO.191,Y axis machine coordinates of initial location point for automatic tool setting (mm)
Used to set Y axis machine coordinates of initial location point for automatic tool setting
NO.192,Z axis machine coordinates of initial location point and return point for automatic tool
setting (mm)
Used to set X axis machine coordinates of initial location point and return point for automatic tool
setting.
NO.193,Quick negative moving speed for automatic tool setting (mm/min)
Used to set the quick negative moving speed for automatic tool setting
NO.194,Slow forward moving speed for automatic tool setting (mm/min)
Used to set the slow forward moving speed for automatic tool setting.
NO.195,Z axis coordinates of upper surface of workpeice under the current workpiece
coordinate system after automatic tool setting (mm)
Used to set Z axis coordinates of upper surface of workpeice under the current workpiece coordinate
system after automatic tool setting.
NO.196, Quick location point speed for automatic tool setting (mm/min)
Used to set quick location point speed for automatic tool setting
NO.197, Minimum machine coordinates of Z axis (mm)
Used to set minimum machine coordinates of Z axis
NO.198, Z axis drop [i.e. the height of the upper surface of tool setting gauge relative to the
upper surface of workpiece ](mm)
Z axis drop [i.e. the height of the upper surface of tool setting gauge relative to the upper surface of
workpiece ]
NO.199,Automatic tool setting mode (1-Fixed tool setting gauge, 0-Floating tool setting gauge)
1-Fixed tool setting gauge, 0-Floating tool setting gauge.
NO.200 Standby
NO.201Standby
NO.202 Whether to start PLC program running (0-Stop, 1-Start)
Used to set the running status of the PLC. When the parameter value is set to 0, it means stopping
running PLC program. When the parameter value is set to 1, it means starting the PLC program.
Note: When the running PLC program is stopped, all I / O statuses of the system will not be controlled
by the PLC program. All outputs will maintain the status quo and the inputs will not be detected. However,
for the control of the output port, in the "I/O" → "output relay" interface, use the cursor to select the
corresponding output port "Yxx" and press the Alt key on the panel to control the signal output, as shown in
Figure 5.13. This is usually used when the device is first debugged. In other cases, this function can not be
used and failure to do so may result in equipment failure
.
NO.203 Defining the current parameter settings as factory parameters
Define the current parameters as factory parameters; this is used for parameters backup after
equipment debugging, to facilitate future equipment maintenance.
NO.204 Whether to enable high-speed PLC function [18-Yese]
When this parameter is set to 18, it indicates enable high-speed PLC function is enabled;
high-speed PLC scan time is 8 milliseconds.
In the PLC ladder diagram, edit the following line as the boundary between high-speed PLC and
low-speed PLC:
M999

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
-||----------------------( )M999
High-speed PLC is before this line while low-speed PLC is after this line.
High-speed PLC scan cycle is 8ms, while low-speed PLC scan cycle is 100ms.
NO.205 System G code group [32-Group B]
CNC system code G command system includes group A and group B. group A is the system default
configuration. B group is the new G code command system. Group B code G command system is very close
to Japan FANUC and other Chinese CNC Brands.
NO.206 Backlash compensation state after stop of coordinate axis
Make the coordinate axis always move to the forward or negative direction to eliminate backlash when
it stops after running
+1012 means starting this function of X axis; +1024 means starting this function of Y axis; +2048 means
starting this function of Z axis; +4096 means starting this function of the 4th axis; +8192 means starting
this function of the 5th axis.
+2 indicates X axis always moves to negative direction to eliminate the backlash; otherwise, it always
move to the forward direction to eliminate the backlash.
+4 indicates Y axis always moves to negative direction to eliminate the backlash; otherwise, it always
+8 indicates Z axis always moves to negative direction to eliminate the backlash; otherwise, it always
+16 indicates fourth axis always moves to negative direction to eliminate the backlash; otherwise, it
always move to the forward direction to eliminate the backlash.
+32 indicates fifth axis always moves to negative direction to eliminate the backlash; otherwise, it
always move to the forward direction to eliminate the backlash.
For example, if you need to make the Z axis always move to the forward direction by one backlash
distance after it moves to the negative direction, the parameter shall be set to 2048.
NO.207 Time delay after tool seat lifting (ms)
Used to set time delay after tool seat lifting
NO.208, The time from the arm’s detecting stop signal to output stop (ms)
Used to set the time from the arm’s detecting stop signal to output stop, unit: Millimeter.
NO.209, Gear shift prior to spindle orientation (11-18 represent 1st-8th gears respectively)
When the spindle has more than one gears, in order to ensure that the orientation angle remains
unchanged, it is needed to fix a gear for orientation. The parameter is used to set the gear before spindle
orientation.
When it is set to 11, it indicates first gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
When it is set to 12, it indicates second gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
When it is set to 13, it indicates third gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
When it is set to 14, it indicates fourth gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
When it is set to 15, it indicates fifth gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
When it is set to 16, it indicates sixth gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
When it is set to 17, it indicates seventh gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
When it is set to 18, it indicates eighth gear is fixed before the spindle orientation.
NO.210,The longest waiting time for forward and backward motion of bamboo hat style
magazine [>5] (0.1s)
Setting the longest waiting time for forward and backward motion of bamboo hat style
magazine
NO.211, Speed boundary for full interlocking between the spindle and the chuck (or tool
unclamping)
Setting speed boundary for full interlocking between the spindle and the chuck (or tool unclamping)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 170
User Manual
NO.309,Dynamic following error of X axis(pulse)[>1]
Setting dynamic following error of X axis
NO.309a, Static error X axis (pulse)[>1]
Setting static error X axis
NO.310,Dynamic following error of X axis(pulse)[>1]
Setting dynamic following error of Y axis
NO.310a, Static error Y axis (pulse)[>1]
Setting static error Y axis
NO.311,Dynamic following error of Z axis(pulse)[>1]
Setting dynamic following error of Z axis
NO.311a, Static error Z axis (pulse)[>1]
Setting static error Z axis
NO.312,Dynamic following error of fourth axis(pulse)[>1]
Setting dynamic following error of fourth axis
NO.312a, Static error fourth axis (pulse)[>1]
Setting static error fourth axis
NO.313,Dynamic following error of fifth axis(pulse)[>1]
Setting dynamic following error of fifth axis
NO.313a, Static error fifth axis (pulse)[>1]
Setting static error fifth axis
NO.314, Feedback electronic gear numerator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw
NO.315, Feedback electronic gear numerator of Y axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw
NO.316, Feedback electronic gear numerator of Z axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw
NO.317, Feedback electronic gear numerator of fourth axis [automatic calculation input:
L-screw lead (um), M-number of encoder lines]
NO.318, Feedback electronic gear numerator of fifth axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw
NO.319,Feedback electronic gear denominator of X axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw
NO.320, Feedback electronic gear denominator of Y axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw
NO.321, Feedback electronic gear denominator of Z axis [automatic calculation input: L-screw
NO.322, Feedback electronic gear denominator of fourth axis [automatic calculation input:
NO.323, Feedback electronic gear denominator of fifth axis [automatic calculation input:
10 parameters of 314-323 are used to indicate the ratio of pluses sent by the system to pluses fed back
by encoder. You can directly enter values of these 8 parameters through calculation. The calculation
method is as below:
Assuming that numerator and denominator of electronic gear of the feed axis are respectively A and B
and that the lead of screw is L (unit: um) and that number of encoder lines is M, then:
Feedback electronic gear numerator = L X A (When the pulse equivalent is set to 0.1um, feedback
electronic gear numerator= 10 X L X A)
Feedback electronic gear denominator = 4 X M X B

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
For these 8 parameters, you can only input screw lead and the number of encoder lines and then the
system automatically calculates the electronic gear numerator and denominator.
Special notice: In this way, you need to set the electronic gear numerator and denominator of each feed
axis in the system (this will not be needed if set in the driver). Namely, first make sure that the system
displayed coordinates are in accordance with the actual running distance of the machine tool and then set
these 8 parameters.
The input format: L –screw lead (um) M- number of encoder lines, (Notice: It must be set in this way
when you need to read the absolute encoder data through the serial port).
For example: L6000M2500; indicating that screw lead is 6 mm and the number of encoder lines is
2500.
NO.380,Custom system interface [4-Whole; 8-Part]
For specific rules, see System Interface Configuration Scheme .txt.
When it is set to 4, press the Enter key in the main interface to show interfacecn.cfg defined dialog box
and then you can enter the corresponding macro variable value.
When it is set to 8, in addition to the above function, interfacecn.cfg defined screen can also be shown
in the main interface at startup.
NO.401 Set the current parameter to the factory stepper motor parameter
Used to set the current parameter to the factory stepper motor parameter and applicable to the case
where a stepper device is installed on the machine tool.
NO.402 Set the current parameter to the factory servo motor parameter
Used to set the current parameter to the factory servo motor parameter and applicable to the case
where the machine tool has a servo device installed.
NO.450,System control mode (20xx - MII; 30xx - MIII; other - other types of bus or pulse type)
For example: When it is set to 2002, it represents the second generation of MechatroLink bus is
adopted and there are two bus IO modules.
Attention 1: After modification of this parameter, it can only become valid after restart of the system; the
upper two bits indicate the bus type; the lower two bits indicate how many bus IO modules there
are.
Attention 2: When the 1st or 2nd spindle is also controlled by the bus, the speed control mode can be set,
or the independent pulse control mode can be set for the 1st or 2nd spindle; that is, the axis
parameter 403 or 404 is set (to 96 or 86).
5.2.7 Password
Password interface is mainly used for authority settings and system program upgrading and backup;
in the parameter interface, press the password soft key to enter the password setting interface, as shown in
Figure 5.14:
Figure 5.14 Password setting

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 172
User Manual
The password parameter setting interface totally includes the following items:
1. Is the CNC manufacturer’s password enabled?
2. Is the machine manufacturer’s password enabled?
3. Is the user’s password enabled?
4. Modify the CNC manufacturer’s password
5. Modify the machine manufacturer’s password
6. Modify the user’s password
7. Statistics on cumulative working hours of machine tool
8. Display screen copying function
9.Current system software version number：V350.14.01 FPGA1003[linux2.6]
5.2.7.1 Authority settings
In order to prevent the parameters from being accidentally modified, the system uses classification
authority setting for parameters. There are total three levels of authority ("CNC manufacturer’s", "Machine
manufacturer’s", "User’s"). Among others, "CNC manufacturer’s" authority is to set the system function and
part of the system internal parameters; "Machine manufacturer’s" authority is to set parameters related to
machine equipment configuration, mechanical indicators and safety; “User’s” authority is to set parameters
related to machining process, performance and machining program. When these permissions are enabled
and the corresponding parameters and programs are modified and adjusted, the system will remind the
operator to enter the password to achieve the "authority" and to play a safe role.
In the system, the initial situation of the three-level authority is as below: "CNC manufacturer’s"
authority has been enabled; "Machine manufacturer’s" authority and "User’s" authority are not enabled. If
you want to enable these authority functions, you shall first use the initial password, enable the authority
function, and then set the corresponding new password, to achieve the authority. Note that the initial
password can only be used once; the initial password will be void after the new password is set; be sure to
remember the new password. Among others, the initial "machine manufacturer’s" authority password is
"888888"; initial "user’s" authority password is "999999".
Attention: The authority password must be a set of 6-digit data; the data can be either a number or a
letter.
"Machine manufacturer’s" authority setting process is as below:
The first step is to enable the authority: In the password interface, move the cursor to No. 2 parameter
"Is the machine manufacturer’s password enabled" and press the Enter key to show the dialog box below
Figure 5.15 Input machine manufacturer’s initial password
Enter the initial password to show the dialog box as below; then enter the value of "0" and press the
Enter key for confirmation to start the authority function.
Figure 5.16 Select whether to enable password

The second step is to set a new password: In the password interface, move the cursor to the No. 5
parameter "modify the machine manufacturer’s password" and press the Enter key to show the dialog box
as below.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 5.17 Input the new machine manufacturer’s password

After entering the new password in the figure above, press the Enter key for confirmation; in this case,
the system remind you to enter the password again (make sure it is correct). The dialog box is shown as
below.
Figure 5.18 Confirm the new machine manufacturer’s password

After inputting the new password again, press Enter key for confirmation. The system prompt is
shown as below and the authority password is set successfully.
Figure 5.19 The machine manufacturer’s password is successfully set

If you want to modify the corresponding parameters after the password is set successfully, the system
will remind you to enter the password first. The parameters can only be modified after the correct
password is input, as shown in Figure 5.20:
Figure 5.20 Input the machine manufacturer’s password

"User’s" authority setting process is as below:
The first step is to enable the authority: In the password interface, move the cursor to No. 3 parameter
"Is the user’s password enabled" and press the Enter key to show the dialog box as below
Figure 5.21 Input the initial user’s authority

Enter the initial password to show the dialog box as below; in this case, if the input value is "0",
authority functions for user parameters and machining programs is enable; if the input value is "1", only the
authority function for user parameters is enabled; press the Enter key for confirmation to start authority
function.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 174
User Manual
Figure 5.22 Select whether to enable the password

Attention: When authority functions for user parameters and manufacturer programs are enabled, the
operator will be reminded by the system to enter the password first when he/she modifies user
parameters and machining programs. If only the authority function for user parameters is
started, the operator will only enter the password before modifying the user parameters; it is not
needed to enter the password for modifying the machining programs in this case. The specific
settings depend on user management.
The second step is to set a new password: In the password interface, move the cursor to the No.6
parameter "Modify user’s password" and press the Enter key to show the dialog box as below
Figure 5.23 Input a new user’s password

In the above figure, enter a new password and press Enter for confirmation; in this case, the system
remind you to enter the password again and the dialog box is shown as below.
Figure 5.24 Confirm the new user’s password

Enter the password again and press Enter key for confirmation; the system prompt is shown as below
and the password is set successfully.
Figure 5.25 User’s password is successfully modified

If you want to modify the corresponding parameters or programs after the password is set successfully,
the system will remind you to enter the password; the parameters can only be modified after the correct
password is input, as shown below:
Figure 5.26 Input the new user’s password

5.2.7.2 Statistics on cumulative working time of machine.
After the system is energized, the time is only counted when the coordinate axis is running or when the
spindle is running; namely, the working time is counted.
Note: If the function is turned off, the time will be cleared when it is turned on again.
5.2.7.3 System display screen backup function:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
First, in the "password", set the parameter "display screen backup function" as enabled. First insert the
U disk into the system. In any interface needing to copying the display screen, press and release the Shift
key, and then press the F2 key to make the current display screen backup. Then press "ESC" to return to the
main interface, press and release the Shift key, and then press the F1 key to make USB backup; then the
picture file CurBmp.bmp is copied into the U-disk. Wait a moment; after the successful backup dialog box is
shown, remove the U-disk. The file CurBmp0.bmp in U-disk is the display screen picture file. When
execution is made once again, the screen image is saved as CurBmp1.bmp. The file name is increased by 1,
CurBmp2.bmp, CurBmp3.bmp and so on... ....
This parameter is automatically turned off after system restart.
5.2.7.4 Current system software version number：
No.9 parameter in the password parameter interface shows the current system software version
number: V350.14.01 FPGA1003 [linux2.6].
Figure 5.27
5.3 Diagnosis
Press the "Diagnosis" button under the panel to switch to the diagnosis function interface. In this
interface, monitor the external I/O points, edit the I/O function name, as well as reset the drive failure.
Diagnosis interface:
"Control program" is used to edit different types of control programs.
"I/O" is to display input and output status.
"Ladder state" is to display the state of ladder diagram.
"Alarm" shows the current alarm information and historical records on ten alarms.
"Ladder Diagram edition" is built-in PLC ladder diagram used in online editing system.
"Reset drive" is used to reset the feed driver.
"Edition configuration" is to edit the current configuration.
5.3.1 Real-time detection of input/output points
In the diagnosis interface, press "I/O" function software to enter the I/O point monitoring interface, as
shown in Figure 5.28. By pressing "PgUp" and "PgDn", you can switch among five interfaces - "input relay",
"sub-panel input", "output relay", "auxiliary relay 1" and "auxiliary relay 2", to monitor various I/O states.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 176
User Manual
Figure 5.28 I/O interface

Note: The red light indicates the signal hardware circuit is invalid and the green light indicates the signal hardware
circuit is valid.
5.3.2 Real-time detection of ladder diagram
In the diagnosis interface, press the "ladder diagram" function soft key to enter the ladder diagram
monitoring interface, as shown in Figure 5.29. Through this interface, you can observe logical relationship
of various I/O, timers, auxiliary relays, etc. and monitor the running of the PLC.
Figure 5.29 Editing ladder diagram

Note: The red light indicates the relay is off and the green light indicates the relay is on.
5.3.3 Input/output and custom alarm configuration
In the diagnosis interface, press the "Edit Configuration" sof tkey to enter the Edit Configuration
interface, as shown in Figure 5.30. Through this interface, you can edit commands on uses of the I/O and
auxiliary relay, in order to more intuitively understand I/O uses and application.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 5.30
Editing method: In Edit Configuration interface, by pressing "↑" and"↓" to move the cursor to the
element to be edited; press "Enter" key and then enter the configuration commands in the dialogue box.
Note: When you edit the configuration online in the system, you can only edit the letters, can not edit Chinese characters;
Chinese characters can be edited on the PC and then sent to the system.
5.3.4 Release feed drive alarm failure
If you want to release the feed drive fault alarm, press the "Reset" soft key in the parameter interface
and make a confirmation. In this case, the system will release feed drive alarm according to the preset PLC
output signal.
Special Attention: This function only eliminates the drive alarm prompt after troubleshooting. If the
cause of the drive fault still exists, it will not eventually eliminate the drive failure. It is
needed to handle drive failure.
5.3.5 Edit ladder diagram
When you press the soft key corresponding to "Edit Ladder Diagram" under the diagnosis interface,
you will enter the Edit Ladder Diagram interface, as shown in Figure 5.31:
Figure 5.31
There are totally interfaces for editing ladder diagram; press the soft key corresponding to “》” in the
menu, and enter the second interface for editing the ladder diagram; see Figure 5.32:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 178
User Manual
Figure. 5.32
Press the soft key corresponding to “ ALT ” key in the menu, to enter into the third editing interface.
Figure 5.33
Press the soft key corresponding to “》” in the menu to enter into the fourth interface for editing the
ladder diagram; see Fig. 5.34:
Figure 5.34

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
In these four interfaces, you can complete the PLC ladder diagram editing according to the system PLC
resources. In Figure 5.34, click on "Save" soft key for confirmation, after completing the ladder diagram
editing; then click on "Compile" soft key, to generate or modify the PLC file. Press "ESC" to exit from the
"Edit Ladder Diagram" interface.
For details on how to edit the ladder diagram, see the Chapter of "Programmable Logic Controller
PLC".
Note: 1. In the ladder diagram state of diagnostic interface and ladder diagram editing state, press the S key to enter the
element you need to find and you can search for the element.
2. When the PLC file is updated, restart system or to press the "R" key to re-run the PLC in the "ladder diagram"
interface under the "parameters" function.
5.3.6 Alarm display
When an alarm occurs on the machine tool, you can press the "alarm" soft key in the parameter
interface to view it. You can see the current displayed alarm information and ten records on historical
alarms. When the spindle is running, the number of spindle encoder lines can also be observed in the alarm
interface.
5.4 Pitch error compensation

Used for automatic pitch error compensation, to compensate for the impact of screw pitch error on
machine tool transmission accuracy. The system uses the storage type pitch error compensation: At
debugging, with the machine tool zero point as the starting point, screw error curve is measured; the
correction curve is fitted according to the error curve; the correction curve value is input to the correction
parameter table; during the automatic operation, the system will make compensation in accordance with
the correction table.
In the panel, press the "Parameter" twice to go into the pitch error compensation interface, for pitch
compensation settings, as shown in Figure 5.35; the pitch error compensation interface has two areas
(basic parameter area and compensation amount setting area); you can switch between them by using the
left and right arrow keys to move the cursor; the pitch error compensation parameters are set and stored
with the axis as a unit; press the corresponding F soft key to enter the corresponding parameter of each
axis:
Figure 5.35 Pitch error compensation interface

Use the left cursor key to enter the basic parameter setting area; use the upper and lower cursor keys
to select the basic parameter for current setting. When the Enter key is pressed, the basic parameter dialog
box for inputting the pitch error compensation for each axis is displayed. See Figure 5.36:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 180
User Manual
Figure 5.36 Basic parameter setting for pitch error compensation

Use the right cursor key to enter the pitch error compensation amount setting area of each axis. When
the soft keys corresponding to the X axis, Y axis, Z axis, fourth axis and fifth axis are pressed, pitch error
compensation point and amount of each axis are displayed.
Use the upper and lower cursor keys and PgUp and PgDn keys to select the current compensation
point; when you press the Enter key, the compensation amount input dialog box is shown; see Figure 5.37:
Figure 5.37 Compensation amount setting

Automatically generating a program which uses a laser interferometer to detect the screw pitch error
compensation.
Go into the pitch error compensation interface, set the basic parameters and press the detection
program to show the dialog box as below, press OK to generate the corresponding pitch error
compensation detection program. The generated pitch error compensation detection program is directly
stored in the program.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 5.38 Compensation amount setting

There two pitch error compensation input modes - absolute error value and relative compensation
value between which switching is made with ALT key.
Absolute error value input mode: The input error value is the absolute error value detected when
the laser interferometer runs from positive end to negative end.
The basic parameters are to set the number of negative and forward detection points of reference
points, not containing detection points of the reference points.
In order to distinguish it from the relative compensation value input mode, enclose the detection point
number and the machine coordinates in parentheses.
Absolute error value input mode is default at the system start-up.
Relative compensation value input mode: The difference between absolute error value of the
detection point at forward end and absolute error value of the detection point at the negative end.
The basic parameters are to set the reference point and the negative and forward compensation point
numbers.
The number of compensation points can be set freely; the number of compensation points of each axis
is up to 300. The basic parameters of pitch error compensation for each axis include the following:
1. Compensation point number of the reference point: set on each axis corresponding to the reference point
of the pitch error compensation point number.
2. The number of compensation point at the farthest end of the negative direction: To set the number of
compensation point at the farthest end of the negative direction on the axis.
3. The number of compensation point at the farthest end of the forward direction: To set the number of
compensation point at the farthest end of the forward direction of each axis. The value of this parameter
needs to be more than the set value of " The number of compensation point at the farthest end of the
negative direction".
4. Compensation override: The coefficient of compensation value for each compensation point, usually set
to 1.
5. Compensation point spacing: distance between compensation points in each axis, unit: um.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 182
User Manual
Figure 5.39 Compensation point spacing
The system automatically calculates the position of pitch error compensation point of each axis
according to the basic parameters; pitch error compensation points of each axis is equally spaced in
distribution and the user can input the compensation value of each point.
The pitch error compensation points is equally spaced in distribution; this spacing is set on each axis,
and the minimum value of the pitch error compensation point is limited.
Unit for the minimum value of the pitch error compensation point: mm
Maximum feed rate mm / min
Examples:
Example 1: In linear axis case: When the stroke is -400mm~+800mm, the spacing between pitch error
compensation points is 50mm; when the reference point compensation number is 40, you can calculate the
number of the compensation point at the farthest end of negative direction:
Reference point compensation number - Machine stroke length in negative direction/spacing between
compensation points + 1 = 40-400/50 +1=33.
The number of compensating point at the farthest end of the forward direction:
Reference point compensation number + machine stroke length in the forward direction/ spacing between
compensation points = 40 + 800/50 = 56.
The corresponding relation between the machine coordinates and the compensation point number:
Figure 5.40 Corresponding relation between machine coordinates and compensation point number
Outputting the compensation amount at the O position
The parameters are set as follows:
The number of compensation point of reference point: 40
The number of compensation point of the farthest point in the negative direction: 33
The number of compensation point of the farthest point in the forward direction: 56
Compensation override: 1
Spacing between compensation points: 50000
Outputting compensation amount at the corresponding compensation point:
Numbe 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5
…
r 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6
Compe
+ + + + + + +
nsation -2 0 -1 0 -1 0 -1 -1 -2 0
2 1 1 2 1 1 1
amount
Diagram on comparison between the compensation point and the compensation amount is shown as below:
Figure 5.41 Diagram on comparison between compensation point and compensation amount
Example 2: In rotary axis case: If the amount of movement per revolution is 360 degrees, the spacing
between axis distance error compensation points will be 45 degrees and the number of compensation point
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
of the reference point will be 60; in the rotary axis case, the number of compensation point at the farthest
end in the negative direction is usually identical to the number of compensation point of the reference
point.
The number of compensation point at the farthest point in the forward direction:
The number of compensation point of reference point + movement amount/spacing between
compensation points per revolution = 60+360/45 = 68.
The corresponding relation between machine coordinates and compensation points:
Figure 5.42 Corresponding relation between machine coordinates and compensation points in rotary axis case
commands: Enter the compensation amount at the position of the circle. If the sum of the
compensation amounts from 61 to 68 is not zero, the position offset will occur due to the accumulated pitch
error per revolution. Therefore, the same compensation amount shall be input for the compensation points
60 and 68.
The parameters are set as follows:
The number of compensation point of reference point: 60
The number of compensation point at the farthest point in the negative direction: 60
The number of compensation point at the farthest point in the forward direction: 68
Compensation override: 1
Spacing between compensation points: 45000
Outputting compensation amount at the corresponding compensation point:
Compensatio
n point 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
number
Set
compensatio +1 -2 +1 +3 -1 -1 -3 +2 +1
n amount
Diagram on comparison between compensation points and compensation amounts is as below:
Figure 5.43 Diagram on comparison between compensation points and compensation amounts in rotary axis case

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 184
User Manual
Chapter 6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
6.1 General
According to the system programmable I/O, auxiliary relays, timers and other resources, on the PC, a
dedicated PLC editing software (PLC.EXE) is used to edit and generate PLC file PLC.lad (ladder diagram file)
and PLC.plc (command list file) which will be delivered to the system for running, or in the system, the
ladder diagram is directly edited for running to achieve PLC function.
In this system, the PLC function can manage all the I/O interfaces of the system, as well as conduct
logic judgment, counting and other processing, to realize detection on input port and control on the output
port. The maximum number of execution steps for the system PLC is 1000 (commands list file), and all PLC
will be executed with 100ms as a cycle.
In this system, PLC can be implemented by using two ways: ladder diagram and commands list. As the
ladder diagram is very similar to circuit diagram of the relay control system, it is intuitive and easily
understandable. Thus, it can be easily mastered by electrical personnel in the factory who are familiar with
electrical control and is especially applicable to switch logic control. At the same time, ladder diagrams are
more frequently applied in the daily use of PLC, so this manual mainly focuses on ladder diagrams to
introduce system PLC functions.
6.2 commands for elements

6.2.1 Element and element number
The element is the address symbol used to identify the signal processed in the PLC. The element
number is the serial number assigned to the element. The numbers of elements X, Y and M in the system
PLC are indicated by decimal notation.
6.2.2 List of elements
This table is about list of all elements of this system
Element No. Quantity Description
X00-X31
X X50-X81 121 System input signal
X151-X208
Y00-Y31
Y Y100-Y122 63 System output signal
Y50-Y57
T00-T03; T16-T31-10ms general timer;
T04-T07; T32-T47-10ms retentive
T T00-T79 80 timer;
T08-T11；T48-T63-1s general timer;
T12-T15；T64-T79-1s retentive timer;
C C00-C15 16 System counter
M00-M95
M100-M135
M 460 Auxiliary relay of system
M151-M198
M200-M815
6.2.3 Detailed commands on elements
6.2.3.1 Input relay (X)
The input relay is the window where the system PLC receives the external inputted switch quantity
signal. commands from the external elements such as buttons, change-over switches, limit switches or
digital switches are introduced into the system from the input point circuits; assume each input point

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
corresponds to a relay Xn; PLC program can use the normally open and normally closed contact of the relay
to edit the program, and can use it for multiple times.
As shown below:
Figure 6.1
Note: The input relay number is indicated by a decimal value.
6.2.3.2 Output relay (Y)
Output relay is the window where system PLC sends signals to the external load. The output relay is
used to transfer the output signal from the system PLC to the output point which drives the external load.
Each relay of the output point has only a pair of normally open points, but in the ladder diagram, normally
open contacts and normally closed contacts of each output relay can be used (and can be used for multiple
times), as shown below:
Figure 6.2
Note: The output relay number is indicated by a decimal value.
6.2.3.3 Internal relay (M)
The internal relay is an auxiliary relay in the PLC and can not be directly output to an external source.
It is usually defined as the input, output or status of a function. It is the information transmission channel
for PLC and system control software. It features the following:
（a）These relays are cleared when the power is turned off.
（b）Normally open contacts and normally closed contacts of the internal relays that can be used in the
ladder diagram.
（ c ） The internal relay number is indicated by a decimal number. Most internal relays have been
defined by the system for a function and control mode. Only part of the internal relays are used as
temporary intermediate signals.
6.2.3.4 Timer (T)
The timer in the system PLC is equivalent to the time relay in the relay system. In this system, the
timers are classified into general timers and retentive timers. Constant K is used as the set value of the
timer.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 186
User Manual
General timer
T00-T03 and T16-T31 in the system PLC are the 10ms general timers; T08-T11 and T48-T63 are 1s
general timers. The operating principle is as follows: When the input condition is met, the counting starts;
when the count value reaches the set value, the timer contact is on; if the input condition is off, the timer
count value will be set to 0, the contact will be off. Set value (K) of the timer is a decimal number, which can
be in the range of 1 to 9999.
Example: As it is shown in Fig. 6.3, when the input relay X5 is valid, the timer T01 starts counting. After
0.5s (K value is 50; T01 is a10ms timer), the T01 contact is on. When the input relay X5 is invalid, the timer
T01 is set to 0 and the contact is also off.
Figure 6.3
Retentive timer
T04-T07 and T32-T47 in this system PLC are 10ms retentive timers; T12-T15 and T64-T79 are 1s
retentive timers. The operating principle is as follows: When the input condition is met, the counting starts;
when the count value reaches the set value, the timer contact is on; even if the input condition is off, the
current value (count value) of retentive timer still remains unchanged and the contact status also remain
unchanged. When the RST command is executed, count value of the retentive timer will be set to 0 and the
contact will be disconnected. Set value (K) of the timer is a decimal number, which can be in the range of 1
to 9999.
Example: As it is shown in Figure 6.4, when the input relay X5 is valid, the timer T04 starts counting;
after 1 second (K value is 100; T04 is 10ms timer), T04 contact is connected; as it is shown in the waveform
diagram, even if the input condition X5 is disconnected, the current value (count value) of retentive timer
T04 will remain unchanged and the contact status will also remain unchanged. When the input relay X7 is
valid, the timer T04 is reset to 0 and the contact is also off. When the input signal is valid again, T04 starts
counting again.
Figure 6.4
6.2.3.5 Counter (C)
The counter is used to accumulate and detect the rising edge of the input condition (X, Y, M, T).

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Therefore, when the input condition is ON, the counting does not change. The response period is 100ms.
Thus, the input conditions on/off duration shall be greater than 100ms. The system PLC totally has 16
counters C01-C15, which feature the following:
（a）The count value is a decimal number that can be specified in the range 1 to 9999.
（b）The count value of the counter is not cleared even if the input condition is off. The count value of
counter must be cleared with the RST command.
（c）The normally open contact and normally closed contact of the counter can be used in the ladder
diagram.
Example: As it is shown below, after X5 input impedance signal is valid, C0 is reset; its corresponding
count value is set to "0" and its normally open contact is off (normally closed contact is on). The X7 input
signal is used to provide the count input signal. When the reset input of the counter is off and the count
input signal become on from off (i.e, the rising edge of the count pulse), the current value of the counter is
increased by one. After 9 input count pulses, the C0 counter is valid (constant K is 9), its normally open
contact is on (normally closed contact is off) and Y0 output is valid. If the pulses are input again, the count
value of counter remains unchanged; the count value of counter is set to "0" until the reset input signal is
valid.
Figure 6.5
6.3 Symbols of basic elements in the ladder diagram

In order to facilitate the editing of the ladder diagram, the following symbols of basic elements are
specially set; their specific definitions are shown as below
Symbol Symbol
S/N Symbol name S/N Symbol name
graphic graphic
Normally open
1 16 Data movement MOV
contact
Normally closed
2 17 Data bit operation BIT
contact
Direct output
3 18 Data addition ADD
coil
Setting output
4 19 Data subtraction SUB
coil
5 Reset output coil 20 Data multiplication MUL
6 Horizontal line 21 Data division DIV
7 Vertical line 22 End of 1st level END1
Reverse output
8 --[/] 23 End of 2nd level END2
coil
Rising edge
9 --[U] 24 Location label LABL
output coil
10 Falling edge --[D] 25 Conditional or JUMP
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 188
User Manual
output coil unconditional
jump
Rising edge Start of
11 -[US] 26 SP
setting coil sub-program
Falling edge End of
12 -[DS] 27 SPE
setting coil sub-program
Rising edge reset Return of
13 -[UR] 28 RETN
coil sub-program
Conditional or
Falling edge
14 -[DR] 29 unconditional CALL
reset coil
subprogram call
15 Data comparison CMP
6.4 Basic logic commands in the command list

The system PLC command list has a total of 16 basic logic commands for the realization of basic logic
control.
6.4.1 LD, LDI and OUT commands
LD：command for connecting normally open contact and bus.
LDI：command for connecting normally closed contact and bus.
OUT：Relay coil output command.
The LD and LDI commands can be used for X, Y, M, T and C, which can also be used with the AND and
ORB commands for the starting point of the branch circuit. The OUT instrument can be used for Y, M, T and
C, but not for input relay X.
6.4.2 AND and ANI commands
AND：Normally open contact series connection command.
ANI：Normally closed contact series connection command.
The AND and ANI commands can be used for X, Y, M, T and C.
6.4.3 OR and ORI commands
OR：command for normally open contact parallel connection.
ORI：command for normally closed contact parallel connection.
OR and ORI commands can be used for X, Y, M, T and C.
6.4.4 ORB command
ORB: Parallel connection command for series circuit blocks. The circuit formed by two or more
contacts connected in series is called "series circuit block"; use the ORB command to connect series circuit
blocks in parallel.
6.4.5 ANB command
ANB: Series connection command for parallel circuit blocks.
The ANB command can connect in series the parallel circuit block with the preceding circuit. Before
using the ANB command, the internal connection of the parallel circuit blocks shall be completed.
6.4.6 MPS, MRD, MPP stack memory and multiple output command
MRD and MPP commands are Push, Read and Pop commands; they are used for
multiple output circuits.
6.4.7 SET and RST command
SET：Setting command, the operation hold command.
RET：Reset command, the operation hold reset command.
The SET command can be used for Y and M, and the RST command can be used for Y, M, T and C.
6.4.8 NOP and END command
NOP：Do-nothing operation command.
END：End command, indicating the end of the program.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
6.5 PLC commands

6.5.1 PLC basic commands
1. --[/]: Reverse output coil
When X00 is invalid, it is Y00 output signal.

When X00 is valid, the Y00 output signal is invalid.
2. --[U]: Rising edge output coil
Y02 is output when X01 is from invalid to valid rising edge.

3. --[D]: Falling edge output coil.
Y03 is output when X02 is from valid to invalid falling edge.

4. -- [US]: Rising edge setting coil.
Y04 is set when X03 is from invalid to valid rising edge.
5. -- [DS]: Falling edge setting coil.
Y05 is set when X04 is from valid to invalid falling edge.
6. -- [UR]: Rising edge reset coil.
Y06 is reset when X05 is from invalid to valid rising edge.

7. -- [DR]: Falling edge reset coil.
Y07 is reset when X06 is from valid to invalid falling edge.
6.5.2 PLC logic operation function block

Special Attention: 1. The parameter C is always the address.
2. Constant value range: 0 --- 255.
1. Data comparison.
Control Number of Parameter Parameter
condition bits A B
0 8 Address Address

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 190
User Manual
1 16 Address Address
2 8 Address Constant
4 8 Constant Address
8 Constant Constant
Rules of operation:
When parameter A> parameter B, the assignment parameter C (lower 3 bits) is equal to 1;
When parameter A= parameter B, the assignment parameter C (lower 3 bits) is equal to 2;
When parameter A< parameter B, the assignment parameter C (lower 3 bits) is equal to 4;
Example 1:
Control condition is 0, parameter A is address and parameter B is address.

When X10 is valid, parameter A= 01000101, parameter B = 00010010, comparison result is A> B and a
value is assigned to R103; if the original value of R103 is 0, R103 = 00000001 after assignment.
Example 2:
Control condition is 1, parameter A is address and parameter B is address.
When X10 is valid, parameter A= 0000010110100001, parameter B = 0000010110100000,
comparison result is A> B and a value is assigned to R103; if the original value of R103 is 0, R103 =
000000000000001 after assignment.
2. MOV: Data movement.
condition bits A B
0 8 Address Address
Rules of operation:
Parameter B is assigned to Parameter A. Parameter A is always the address.
Control condition is 2, Parameter A is address and Parameter B is constant.

When X03 is valid, parameter B = 7, and 00000111, will be sent to A parameter = R105, and R105 =
00000111.
3. BIT: Data bit operations.
Control condition:Consisting of two bits.
One bit at left One bit at right
Control Control Number Paramete Parameter
condition condition of bits rA B
1 Logic and 0 8 Address Address
2 Logic or 1 16 Address Address
3 Logic exclusive or 2 8 Address Constant

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Logic not. The value
obtained after A not
4 operation will be directly 3 16 Address Constant
assigned to C, irrelevant to
parameter B.
5 Left shift 4 8 Constant Address
6 Right shift 5 16 Constant Address
8 Constant Constant
For example: control condition equal to 35 indicating: 16-bit data logic XOR, parameter A - constant,
parameter B - the address.
Rules of operation:
（1）Parameter C = (parameter A & parameter B).
When M77 is valid, the control condition is 10, indicating the logic AND; both parameter A and
parameter B are address. When the parameter A is address 10 = 10000111 and parameter B is address 12 =
01100001, the parameter C is address 15 = 00000001.
（2）Logic or：Parameter C = (Parameter A | Parameter B) .
When M77 is valid, the control condition is 20, indicating the logic OR; both parameter A and
parameter B are address. When the parameter A is address 10 =10000111 and parameter B is address 12 =
（3）Logic xor: Parameter C = (Parameter A ^ Parameter B) 。
When M77 is valid, the control condition is 30, indicating the logic XOR; both parameter A and
parameter B are address. When the parameter A is address 10 =10000111 and parameter B is address 12 =
(4) Logic not: Parameter C = (~Parameter A) .
When M77 is valid, the control condition is 40, indicating the logic NOT; parameter A is address. When
the parameter A is address 10 =10000111, and parameter C is address 15 = 01111000.
（5）Left shift: Parameter C = (parameter A << parameter B). (Parameter B specifies the number of
bits for left shift).
When M77 is valid, the control condition is 50, indicating the logic left shift; both parameter A and
parameter B are address. When the parameter A is address 10 = 10000111, the parameter B is address 11 =
（6）Right shift: Parameter C = (parameter A >> parameter B) . (Parameter B specifies the number

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 192
User Manual
of bits for right shift).
When M77 is valid, the control condition is 50, indicating the logic right shift; both parameter A and
parameter B are address. When the parameter A is address 10 =10000111, the parameter B is address 11 =
4.ADD: Data addition.
condition bits A B
0 8 Address Address
8 Constant Constant
Rules of operation:
Parameter C=Parameter A + Parameter B.
When M71 is valid, the control condition is 0 and both Parameter A and Parameter B are address.
When parameter A is address 23=10000111 and Parameter B is address 34=01100001, parameter C is
address 32=11101000.
5.SUB:Data subtraction.
condition bits A B
0 8 Address Address
8 Constant Constant
Rules of operation:
Parameter C = Parameter A - Parameter B.
address 45=01000000.
6.MUL: Data multiplication.
condition bits A B
0 8 Address Address

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
8 Constant Constant
Rules of operation:
Parameter C = Parameter A X Parameter B.
address 15=01000011.
7. DIV: Data division.
condition bits A B
0 8 Address Address
8 Constant Constant
Rules of operation:
Parameter C = Parameter A / Parameter B.
When parameter A is address 1=1010011 and Parameter B is address 2=00000101, parameter C is address
111=00100001.
6.5.3 Process control function block
1. END1: End of Level 1.
plc in front of END1 is for high-speed scanning; each scan cycle is 8ms.
2. END2: End of Level 1.

plc in front of END2 is for low-speed scanning; each scan cycle is 100ms.
3. LABL: Location label.

Specify a label in the ladder diagram; that is, JMPB specifies the destination for the jump, a LABL label.
Example:
LABL label parameter setting range: 1-9999.

4.JUMP : Conditional or unconditional jump
Immediately transfer the program to the program location set by the label for execution. It features the
following: multiple jumps can use the same label; not skipping END1 and END2; not jumping out of
sub-program; jumping forward or backward.
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 194
User Manual
Example1:
Control condition
When M78 is invalid, the next statement after JUMP is executed, without jumping.
When M78 is valid, after jumping to the specified label, the next command following the label is executed.
LABL label parameter setting range: 1-9999.
Example 2:
commands: When X11 is valid, lines 45-49 are skipped and line 51 is directly executed.
When X11 is invalid, the subsequent line 45 is directly executed
5.Conditional or unconditional subprogram call
Calling the specified subprogram features the following: Multiple call commands can call the same one
subprogram; call commands can be nested; not calling the subprogram in the first level of program; the
subprogram must be written after END2.
Example 1:
commands: When M72 is valid, the subprogram with specified number (e.g. CALL 16) will be called.
When M72 is invalid, the next command after CALL is executed.
6. SP: Start of subprogram.
7. SPE: End of sub-program
SP is used to generate a subprogram; the number of the subprogram is used as as the name of the
subprogram, and the SPE as the mark of end of the subprogram. When the command is executed, the
control returns to the main program that calls the subprogram; SP and SPE are used to specify the range of
the subprogram. The subprogram used must be written after END2.
Example 1:
E.g. the following SP16 sub-program.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Example 2:
commands: When M288 is valid, calling subprogram SP16 is executed.

When the M288 is invalid, the calling subprogram SP16 is not executed.
8. RETN: Return of subprogram.
When the condition is met and the calling subprogram is executed, if the RETN condition in the
subprogram is satisfied, direct return to the main program will occur.
When the condition is met and the calling subprogram is executed, if the RETN condition in the
subprogram is not met, return to the main program will occur after execution of the called program.
commands: When X11 is valid, calling the subprogram SP22 is executed; when M285 in subprogram is
valid, RETN condition is met, direct return to the main program and line 13 is executed.
When X11 is valid, calling the subprogram SP22 is executed; if M285 in subprogram is invalid, RETN
condition is not met, line 18 of the subprogram to end of the subprogram is executed and then return to
main program occurs.
6.6 List of parameter addresses:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 196
User Manual
6.6.1 Parameter address definition for input and output points:
Parameter address Parameter
definition
1 X0-X7
2 X8-X15
3 X16-X23
4 X24-X31
7 X50-X57
8 X58-X65
9 X66-X73
10 X74-X81
13 X151-X158
14 X159-X166
15 X167-X174
16 X175-X182
17 X183-X190
18 X191-X198
31 X200-X207
32 X208-X208
51 Y0-Y7
52 Y8-Y15
53 Y16-Y23
54 Y24-Y31
55 Y50-Y57
57 Y71-Y78
58 Y79-Y80
6.6.2 Parameter address define for auxiliary relay:
Parameter address Parameter
definition
101 M0--M7
102 M8--M15
103 M16--M23
104 M24--M31
105 M32--M39
106 M40--M47
107 M48--M55
108 M56--M63
109 M64--M71
110 M72--M79
111 M80--M87
112 M88--M95
113 M100--M107
114 M108--M115
115 M120--M127
116 M128--M135
117 M200--M207
118 M208--M215
119 M250--M257
120 M258--M265
121 M266--M273
122 M274--M281
123 M218--M225
124 M226--M233
125 M234--M241
126 M242--M249

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
127 M282--M289
128 M290--M297
129 M298--M305
130 M306--M313
131 M800--M807
132 M808--M815
151 Tool count
153 Current tool case number
155 Target tool case number
Attention:
1.Odd addresses not only can be used for 8-bit parameters, but also for 16-bit parameters;
2.Even addresses can only be used for 8-bit parameters and can not be used for 16-bit
parameters.
3.The 16-bit odd address actually contains the odd address and the latter even address
parameter.
4. The constant actually includes 8 bits.
6.7 Editing of PLC programs

The system PLC ladder diagrams can be edited on the PC by using a dedicated PLC editing software
(PLC.EXE) to generate PLC file PLC.lad (ladder diagram file) and PLC.plc (command list file) which can be
delivered to the system for running; you can also edit the ladder diagram directly on the system for running.
Normally, when the PLC has a large change or there are lots of contents to be edited, it is needed to make
editing the PC. That is because the dedicated editing software interface (regular Windows interface) and
operation (mouse and keyboard operation) way will be much better in doing such job. If there are only
individual changes or less content to be edited, you will make editing on the system panel and this manner
will be faster. Now, the following two kinds of editing methods are introduced.
6.7.1 PLC program editing on PC
6.7.1.1 Editing software installation and operation environment
Name: The system PLC editing software is an executable program called PLC.EXE.The icon is shown
below
Figure 6.6
Source: This software is available on a bundled CD.
Installation mode: This software does not need to be installed; you can directly copy it from the CD to
a local hard disk of the PC.
Requirements on running environments:
Hardware-IBM compatible microcomputer, the lowest hardware configuration: 64M memory, P200 or
more, with CD-ROM drive;
Software-Windows98 /NT4.0/ 2000/XP/Windows7 Chinese version for the software platform.
6.7.1.2 Basic operation for editing software
Run the editing software: directly double-click the PLC.EXE icon and then you can run the PLC
editing software. Its running interface is shown below:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 198
User Manual
Figure 6.7
New PLC file: Click the "New" menu under "File" in the menu bar (as shown below) or click the " "
button on the toolbar to create a new PLC file.
Figure 6.8
Open an existing PLC file: Click the "Open" menu under "File" in the menu bar (shown below) or the
" " button on the toolbar to open the existing PLC file in the corresponding file storage directory.
Figure 6.9
Save the PLC file: Click the "Save" menu under "File" in the menu bar (as shown below) or the " "
button on the toolbar to save the PLC file.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.10
Attention: When you save the PLC file for the first time, you will be reminded to enter the file name; at
this time no matter whether ladder diagram or command file is saved, its name must be "PLC". That is
because default names of PLC ladder diagram and command list file in this system are PLC.LAD and
PLC.PLC. if they are replaced by another names, the system will not be able to recognize them.
Exit from the software: Click the "Exit" menu under "File" in the menu bar (as shown below) or click
the " " button in the control bar to exit from the software.
Figure 6.11
Note: Before exiting from the program, confirm whether the current PLC file is saved.
Select all PLC: On the toolbar, press the " " key to select all PLC; the selected PLC is the red.
Cut and paste PLC: Select the PLC to be cut and pasted and press the " " key in the toolbar to
execute plc cut and paste function.

Block copy PLC:In the toolbar, press " " to copy the selected plc.
Block paste PLC:In the toolbar, press " " to paste the copied plc.
Find PLC element: In the toolbar, press " "; in pop-up dialog box, enter the element to be found and
perform the search.

Enter PLC annotation in Chinese characters:Select the element to be annotated; in the toolbar, press
" "; in the pop-up dialog box, enter the corresponding annotation in Chinese characters.
Horizontal line:
Vertical line:
Normally open contact:
Normally closed contact:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 200
User Manual
Output coil:
Output setting:
Output reset:
Reverse output Coil:
Rising edge output coil:
Falling edge output coil:
Logic operation function block:
Process control function block:

Delete element:
Delete vertical line:
Delete a line:
Insert a line:
6.7.1.3 Edit PLC ladder diagram

When editing the ladder, use the cursor (as shown below) as the focus; the cursor can be moved by
clicking the button of the mouse or by using arrow keys on the the keyboard.
Figure 6.12
Edit horizontal line: Move the cursor to the position for editing and then click the “ ” button on the
toolbar.
Edit vertical line: Move the cursor to the front of the position for editing and then click the “ ” button
on the toolbar.
Edit the normally open contact: Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the “ ” in
the toolbar to show the dialog box below; then select the corresponding element in the dialog box and enter
the corresponding number and then click "OK" .

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.13
Note: The "Parameter" column in its dialog box does not need to be set.
Edit the normally closed contact: Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the " " in
the toolbar to show the dialog box below; then select the corresponding element in the dialog box and enter
the corresponding number and then click "OK" .
Figure 6.14
Note: The "Parameter" column in its dialog box does not need to be set.
Edit direct output：Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the “ ” in the toolbar to
show the dialog box below; then select the corresponding element in the dialog box and enter the
corresponding number and then click "OK" .
Figure 6.15
Note: 1. X can not be selected for "element name" column in the dialog box.
2. "Parameter" column in the dialog box only needs to be set accordingly when the element is T or C , as well as
does not need any settings for any other elements.
Edit setting output：Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the “ ” in the toolbar
to show the dialog box below; then select the corresponding element in the dialog box and enter the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 202
User Manual
Figure 6.16
Note: 1. X, T and C can not be selected for "element name" column in the dialog box.
2. "Parameter" column in the dialog box does not need any setting.
Edit reset output: Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the “ ” in the toolbar to
show the dialog box below; then select the corresponding element in the dialog box and enter the
Figure 6.17
Note: 1. X can not be selected for "element name" column in the dialog box.
2. "Parameter" column in the dialog box does not need any setting.
Edit direct reverse output: Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the “ ” in the
toolbar to show the dialog box below; then select the corresponding element in the dialog box and enter the
Figure 6.18
Edit rising edge output: Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the “ ” in the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.19
Edit falling edge output ： Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the “ ” in the
Figure 6.20
Edit logic operation function block: Move the cursor to the position for editing and click on the
“ ” in the toolbar to show the dialog box below; then select the corresponding element in the dialog box
and enter the corresponding number and then click "OK"
Figure 6.21
After selecting the comparator function block, the following dialog box will pop up. In the dialog box,
enter the control condition, parameter A, parameter B and parameter C and press OK to complete the
setting.
Figure 6.22
Edit process control function block: Move the cursor to the position for editing; click " " on the
corresponding number; for the corresponding set parameter, Click "OK" .

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 204
User Manual
Figure 6.23
Delete element: Move the cursor to element to be deleted; click on the " " button on the toolbar.
Elements mentioned in this case include: horizontal line, normally open contact, normally closed contact, all
output coils.
Delete vertical line: Move the cursor to the front of the vertical line you want to delete. Click the
"0x1" button on the toolbar.
Delete a line of ladder diagram: Move the cursor to the line you want to delete. Click on the " "
button on the toolbar.
Add a line of ladder diagram: Move the cursor to the line in front of which you want to add a line of
ladder diagram. Click the " " button on the toolbar; then a blank line will be shown in front of that line,
which is used to edit a line of ladder diagram.
6.7.1.4 Generate command list file
In the editing software, the command list can not be edited, and its command is generated from
compilation made for the ladder diagram. Thus, the command list is generated while the ladder diagram is
compiled.
When the ladder diagram editing is completed, click the Save button on the toolbar to save the ladder
diagram, and then click"command list" button on the control bar to generate the command file; as shown
below:
Figure 6.24
Note: If the ladder diagram has a logic principle error, the software will automatically show a dialog box to make
illustration; in this case, the command list will not be generated (the command list can only be generated when there is no
error occurring in the compilation); as shown below:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.25
6.7.2 PLC program editing on the system panel
6.7.2.1 Basic operation on edit interface
Enter editing interface: In the main interface of the system, press the "parameter" softkey twice on
the main function menu to go into the diagnosis interface; then press the "Edit Ladder Diagram" softkey to
enter the PLC ladder diagram editing interface; in the PLC ladder editing interface, there are actually four
interfaces, among which switching is made through “<<” and "switch (ALT)" soft keys. The Fig. 6.26 below
is the first interface of PLC editing interface.
Figure 6.26
The Figure 6.27 below is the second interface of PLC editing interface.
Figure 6.27
The Figure 6.28 below is the third interface of PLC editing interface.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 206
User Manual
Figure 6.28
The Figure 6.29 below is the fourth interface of PLC editing interface.
Figure 6.29
Move the cursor: When editing the ladder diagram, use the cursor as the focus; the cursor movement
is controlled by the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Compile ladder diagram: After the ladder editing is completed, the format and logic judgments are
required to verify its correctness. The method is to press the "compile" soft key. When there is any error
occurring in the compilation, the system will show a dialog box to remind the programmer (as shown in
Figure 6.30);
Figure 6.30
If there is no error, the system will show the successful compilation dialog box (as shown in Figure
6.31)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.31
Save ladder diagram: When the ladder diagram is edited and compiled successfully, you must save
the ladder diagram once before exiting from the editing interface. The operation method is to press "Save"
soft key; when you press the "Save" soft key, a question dialog box on whether to save it (as shown below)
will be shown; press "Enter" key to save it or "Esc" to cancel the save.
Figure 6.32
Press "Enter" key in the interface of Figure 6.32 and then the system will show successful save (as
shown in Figure 6.33). Press "Enter" to confirm and complete the save.
Figure 6.33
Exit from editing interface: When the ladder is saved successfully, press the "ESC" key on the panel
to exit from the PLC editing interface. Return to the previous parameter menu interface.
6.7.2.2 Edit PLC ladder diagram
Edit horizontal line: Move the cursor to position for editing and press the "-- " soft key.
Edit vertical line: Move the cursor to the front of the position for editing and press the "|" soft key.
Edit normally open contact: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press "-||-" soft key to
show the following dialog box; then in the dialog box interface, press the Up and Down keys to select the
corresponding element and input the corresponding number and press the "Enter" button.
Figure 6.34
Note: When entering the element number, directly enter the numbers so that you do not need to enter the element
names such as X, Y, T, C and M.
Edit normally closed contact: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press "-|/|-" soft key to
show the following dialog box; then press the Up and Down keys under the dialog box interface to select the
corresponding element and enter the corresponding number and then press the "Enter" button.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 208
User Manual
Figure 6.35
Note: When entering the element number, directly enter the numbers so that you do not need to enter the element
names such as X, Y, T, C and M.
Edit direct output: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key to show the
following dialog box; then press the Up and Down keys under the dialog box interface to select the
Figure 6.36
Note: 1. X can not be selected for elements in the dialog box.
2.When entering the element number, directly enter the numbers so that you do not need to enter the element
names such as Y, T, C and M.
Edit setting output: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key to show the
Figure 6.37
Note: 1. X, T and C can not be selected for elements in the dialog box.
2. When entering the element number, directly enter the numbers so that you do not need to enter the element
Edit reset output: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key to show the
Figure 6.38
Note: 1. X can not be selected for elements in the dialog box
2.When entering the element number, directly enter the numbers so that you do not need to enter the element

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Delete Element: Move the cursor to the element you want to delete and press "Delete Element" soft
key. The elements mentioned here include: Horizontal lines, normally open contacts, normally closed
contacts, all output coils.
Delete Vertical Line: Move the cursor to the front of the vertical line to be deleted and press the
"Delete Branch" soft key.
Delete a line of ladder diagram: Move the cursor to the line you want to delete and press "Delete a
line" soft key.
Add a line of ladder diagram: Move the cursor to the line in front of which you want to add a line of
ladder diagram. Click the "Add a line" soft key; then a blank line will be shown in front of that line, which is
used to edit a line of ladder diagram.
Set Parameters: Mainly used to set the value of the constant K of the elements C and T relay coils and
the parameters of the function block. Operation method is as below: Move the cursor to the corresponding
element relay coil or function block, and then press the "Set Parameters" soft key; the system will show the
following dialog box. In the following dialog box interface, enter the appropriate value and parameter and
then press the "Enter" button.
Figure 6.39 Set the K value of timer T13
Figure 6.40 Set parameters of function block
Edit reserve output coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key to
Figure 6.41
Edit rising edge output coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key
to show the following dialog box; then press the Up and Down keys under the dialog box interface to select
the corresponding element and enter the corresponding number and then press the "Enter" button.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 210
User Manual
Figure 6.42
Edit rising edge output coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key to
Figure 6.43
Edit rising edge output coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key to
Figure 6.44
Edit rising edge setting coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key
Figure 6.45
Edit falling edge setting coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key
Figure 6.46
Edit rising edge reset coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ” soft key to show
the following dialog box; then press the Up and Down keys under the dialog box interface to select the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.47
Edit falling edge reset coil: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press “ ”soft key to
Figure 6.48
Edit function block: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press " " soft key to show
the following dialog box; in the dialog box, enter the corresponding number, which is the corresponding to
a specific function block. E.g.: 20 corresponds to CMP (comparator), 21 corresponds to MOV (data
movement) and so on.
Figure 6.49
If you select the function block 20 (CMP Comparator), set the function block; move the cursor to the
function block, press " " to show the following dialog box; then set the corresponding parameters
in the dialog box.
Figure 6.50
Edit function block: Move the cursor to the position for editing and press " " soft key, to show
the following dialog box; in the dialog box, enter the corresponding number, which is corresponding to a
specific function block. E.g.: 28 corresponds to END1 (End of the first level), 29 corresponds to END2 (end
of the second level ) and so on.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 212
User Manual
Figure 6.51
If you select function block 31 (JUMP), set the function block; move the cursor to the function block
and press " " to show the following dialog box; set the corresponding parameters in the dialog box.
Figure 6.52
6.8 Transfer of PLC files

PLC program transfer input/output (transfer) will be involved in the following cases: You want to
modify the existing PLC programs on the PC after PLC programs are well edited on a PC, you want to back
up the current PLC programs to the computer after system debugging, or you want to copy them to the
control system of other machine tool of the same type, etc. As this system has a USB interface function, you
can use the U disk for the transfer of PLC files.
6.8.1 Import PLC file from the U disk into the system
In the PC, copy the well edited PLC file to a folder (i) of U disk and insert the U disk into the system
USB interface.
Press the soft key F6 "Open the U disk" in the system "Program" interface; then the system opens the U
disk root directory; move the cursor with Up and Down keys and press the Enter key to open the folder (i)
where the PLC file is located.
Figure 6.53
Press the soft key F2"Import parameter" and press "ENTER" key to import the PLC file into the system
and press Enter again for confirmation. PLC parameter import is completed. To run the new PLC file,
restart the system or press the "R" key in the "Ladder diagram" interface of the "Diagnosis" function to
re-run the PLC for updating.
Note: The function of importing PLC files from the U disk into the system, not only transfers PLC files to

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
the system, but also transfers conforming system parameters in the current folder to the system. Hence, if
you only want to update PLC files, the current folder shall only have PLC-related files (PLC.plc, PLC.lad).
6.8.2 Export PLC files from the system to the USB disk
In the system "Program" interface, press the soft key F6 "Open the U disk"; in this case, the system
opens the U disk root directory; move the cursor through Up and Down keys; press Enter to open the
pre-established folder where PLC files are located. Then press the soft key F1 "Export parameter" and press
Enter key; then the PLC file will be exported to the U disk.
Figure 6.54
Press the soft key F6 "Exit from U disk" to return to the system and remove the U disk. PLC parameter
export is completed.
Note: The function of exporting PLC files from the system to the U disk, not only exports the PLC files to the U disk, but
also exports the system parameters in the system to the U disk. Thus, this step can be used as the system
parameter backup function.
Attention: There is no space symbol in the name of the folder when the U disk is used.
6.9 Definition of internal auxiliary relays

Internal auxiliary relay is the information transmission channel between PLC and the system core
control software. In order to facilitate the exchange of information between the PLC and the CNC, the
following auxiliary relays and their functions are defined as follows:
S/N Number Name (function) Description
M00 No feed is allowed for each axis When this relay is valid
1 No feed
State relay; when the system is in manual state, this relay is
2 M01 Manual state valid; otherwise, when the relay is invalid, the system is in the
automatic state.
State relay, which is active and held when the system is just
3 M02 Just started
started.
Program When this relay is valid, the program is prevented from
4 M03
prevention running automatically.
The system is in an emergency stop state When this relay is
5 M04 Emergency stop
valid.
Being under tool State relay, which is valid when the system is in tool selection
6 M05
selection state (when tool disk rotates).
Being under tool State relay, which is valid when the system is in tool change
7 M06
change state ( tool exchange).
Magazine return When this relay is valid, the system executes magazine return
8 M07
to zero to zero function.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 214
User Manual
Status relay, which is valid when the system coordinate axis
9 M08 Feed run
feed occurs.
The system executes tool case lift function when this relay is
10 M09 Tool case lift
valid.
Protective door The system is in the protective door open state when this
11 M10
open relay is valid.
12 M11 Encoder signal To detect the spindle encoder signal
Machine Status relay, which is valid at system emergency stop or drive
13 M12
exception alarm or custom alarm or hard limit.
When this relay is valid, it means that tool is available in tool
14 M13 Tool detection case at the tool change position (for the bamboo hat style
magazine). (input)
Spindle The system executes spindle orientation function When this
15 M14
orientation relay is valid. (output)
Tool tension When this relay is valid, it indicates that the tool is in
16 M15
detection clamping state. (input)
When this relay is valid, it means that X axis is in forward hard
17 M16 X forward limit
limit state. (input)
When this relay is valid, it means that X axis is in negative
18 M17 X negative limit
hard limit state. (input)
When this relay is valid, it means that Y axis is in forward hard
19 M18 Y forward limit
When this relay is valid, it means that Y axis is in negative
20 M19 Y negative limit
When this relay is valid, it means that Z axis is in forward hard
21 M20 Z forward limit
When this relay is valid, it means that Z axis is in negative
22 M21 Z negative limit
When this relay is valid, it means that A axis is in forward
23 M22 A forward limit
When this relay is valid, it means that A axis is in negative
24 M23 A negative limit
When this relay is valid, it means that B axis is in forward
25 M24 B forward limit
When this relay is valid, it means that B axis is in negative
26 M25 B negative limit
Program selected Program selected stop (input)
27 M26
stop
28 M27 G31 quick stop G31 quick stop (input)
Tool rest moving When this relay is valid, the system executes the function of
29 M28 forward / tool tool reset moving forward (bamboo hat style magazine) / tool
case falling down case falling down (turntable style magazine) . (output)
Tool rest moving When this relay is valid, the system executes the function of
30 M29 backward/tool tool reset moving backward (bamboo hat style magazine) /
case lifting up tool case lifting down (turntable style magazine).(output)
Moving forward When this relay is valid, it indicates tool rest moving forward
31 M30 in place/falling in place (bamboo hat style magazine)/ tool case falling down
down in place in place (turntable style magazine) (input)
Moving backward When this relay is valid, it indicate stool rest moving
32 M31 in place/lifting up backward in place (bamboo hat style magazine)/ tool case
in place lifting up in place (turntable style magazine) (input)
When this relay is valid, it indicates the X axis driver is at
33 M32 X drive alarm
alarm state. (input)
When this relay is valid, it indicates the Y axis driver is at
34 M33 Y drive alarm
When this relay is valid, it indicates the Z axis driver is at
35 M34 Z drive alarm

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
When this relay is valid, it indicates the A axis driver is at
36 M35 A drive alarm
When this relay is valid, it indicates the B axis driver is at
37 M36 B drive alarm
38 M37 Standby (input)
1.During automatic running, When this relay is valid, the

program blocks after "(" or "/" will be executed, otherwise,
the situation will be on the contrary. (input)
2.The symbols "(" and "/" in the programming is judged based
Running“(”After
on the state of the auxiliary relay M38. Symbol "(" means to
or
39 M38 determine the M38 state at the beginning of the program
Running“/”After
running to determine whether to run the line; the symbol "("
can be placed at any position of the program line; and the
symbol "/" means to determine the M38 state during the
process of program running to determine whether to run the
line; the symbol "/" can only be placed at the head of the
program line.
When this relay is valid, it indicates that the spindle driver is
40 M39 Spindle alarm
in alarm state. (input)
Spindle high-gear When this relay is valid, it indicates that the spindle is in
41 M40
detection high-gear state. (input)
Spindle low-gear When this relay is valid, it indicates that the spindle is in
42 M41
detection low-gear state. (input)
Tool unclamping When this relay is valid, it indicates that the tool is in
43 M42
detection unclamping state. (input)
Spindle return to When this relay is valid, it indicates that the spindle is in the
44 M43
zero state of completed return to zero. (input)
When this relay is valid, it indicates that machine cooling
45 M44 Cooling overload
motor is in the overload alarm state. (input)
Shortage of When this relay is valid, it indicates that the machine cooling
46 M45
cooling liquid liquid is the shortage alarm state (lower liquid level) (input)
Lubrication When this relay is valid, it indicates that the machine
47 M46
overload lubrication motor is in overload alarm state. (input)
When this relay is valid, it indicates that the machine
Lubricating oil
48 M47 lubricating oil is in shortage alarm state (lower oil level)
shortage alarm
(input)
When this relay is valid, the system executes cooling action.
49 M48 Cooling (output; command M08/M09 can be used to control that it is
valid/invalid)
Tool When this relay is valid, the system executes tool unclamping
50 M49 unclamping/clam action. (output, command M10/M11 can be used to control
ping that it is valid/invalid)
When this relay is valid, the system executes blowing action.
51 M50 Blowing (output, command M24/M25 can be used to control that it is
valid/invalid)
When this relay is valid, the system executes lubricating
52 M51 Lubricating action. (output, command M32/M33 can be used to control
that it is valid/invalid )
When this relay is valid, the system executes corresponding
53 M52 Custom action according to PLC (output, command M57/ M58 can be
used to control that it is valid/invalid )
When this relay is valid, the system executes spindle forward
Spindle forward
54 M53 rotation action. (output, command M03/M04, M05 can be
rotation
When this relay is valid, the system executes spindle CCW
Spindle CCW
55 M54 rotation action. (output, command M04/M03, M05 can be
rotation

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 216
User Manual
When this relay is valid, the system executes spindle CCW
56 M55 Spindle stop rotation action. (output, command M05/M03, M04 can be
action according to PLC (output; M41/ M42 can be used to
control it is valid/invalid; when there is magazine control
57 M56 Custom
available, tool rest moving forward (bamboo hat style
magazine)/tool case falling down (turntable style magazine)
control is default in system PLC)
action according to PLC (output; M43/ M44 can be used to
control it is valid/invalid; when there is magazine control
58 M57 Custom
available, tool rest moving backward (bamboo hat style
magazine)/tool case lifting up (turntable style magazine)
control is default in system PLC)
59 M58 Custom action according to PLC (output; command M45/ M46 can be
used to control it is valid/invalid)
60 M59 Custom action according to PLC (output; command M47/M48 can be
When this relay is valid, the system executes spindle shift to
65 M64 Spindle high-gear
high-gear. (output)
Spindle When this relay is valid, the system executes spindle shift to
66 M65
low-gear low-gear. (output)
When this relay is valid, the system executes spindle
67 M66 Spindle servo switching to position servo control mode (position control).
(output)
When this relay is valid, the system controls the spindle
68 M67 Spindle locking driver to make the spindle motor in energized locking state.
(output)
Spindle return to When this relay is valid, the system executes spindle returns
69 M68
zero to zero. (output)
When this relay is valid, it indicates that acutal speed of the
70 M69 Speed in-place
spindle reaches the command speed. (input)
71 M70-M79 Standby
action according to PLC (input/output)
When this relay is valid, the system gives corresponding
No. 0-15 custom alarm information according to PLC; if you want to limit some
72 M80-M95
alarms actions, you will need to edit PLC programs to realize them.
(input)
73 M100 Tool number 0 Tool coding (5-bit binary code, 0-63) relay; the system
generates the coding value based on the current tool number,
74 M101 Tool number 1
and detects the coding output of the external magazine
75 M102 Tool number 2 controller.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual

Remote moving
78 M105
forward
Remote tool
79 M106
change
80 M107-M109 Standby
81 M110 Spindle 3rd gear
3rd gear. (output)
82 M111 Spindle 4th gear
4th gear. (output)
When this relay is valid, it indicates that the spindle is in the
83 M112 3rd gear detection
3rd gear state. (input)
When this relay is valid, it indicates that the spindle is in the
84 M113 4th gear detection
4th gear state. (input)
The program runs when this relay is valid, (input) use
85 M114 Remote running
external running button.
The program stops when this relay is valid. (input) use the
86 M115 Remote stop
external stop button.
Magazine forward When this relay is valid, the system executes magazine
87 M120
rotation forward rotation. (output)
Magazine CCW When this relay is valid, the system executes magazine CCW
88 M121
rotation rotation. (output)
Program State relay; when this relay is valid, it indicates the system is
89 M122
running in the state of program auto running.
State relay; when this relay is valid, it indicates the system is
90 M123 Program pause
in the state of program pause.
Spindle speed 0
91 M124
bit
Spindle speed 1
92 M125
bit Spindle gear 4-bit binary code output, corresponding to the
Spindle speed 2 commands S0-S15.
93 M126
bit
Spindle speed 3
94 M127
bit
When this relay is valid, X axis is prevented from movement.
95 M128 Prevent X axis
(input)
When this relay is valid, Y axis is prevented from movement.
96 M129 Prevent Y axis
(input)
When this relay is valid, Z axis is prevented from movement.
97 M130 Prevent Z axis
(input)
When this relay is valid, A axis is prevented from movement.
98 M131 Prevent A axis
(input)
When this relay is valid, B axis is prevented from movement.
99 M132 Prevent B axis
(input)
100 M133 Standby (input)
101 M134 Standby When this relay is valid, the system executes corresponding
102 M135 Standby
103 M151-M198 Standby The relay to save the previous states of X151-X198 relays.
104 M200 Running state X axis forward running
105 M201 Running state X axis negative running

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 218
User Manual
106 M202 Running state Y axis forward running
107 M203 Running state Y axis negative running
108 M204 Running state Z axis forward running
109 M205 Running state Z axis negative running
110 M206 Running state A axis forward running
111 M207 Running state A axis negative running
112 M208 Running state B axis forward running
113 M209 Running state B axis negative running
114 M210 Standby
115 M211 Standby
116 M212 Zero return state X axis has returned to zero.
117 M213 Zero return state Y axis has returned to zero.
118 M214 Zero return state Z axis has returned to zero.
119 M215 Zero return state A axis has returned to zero.
120 M218 System interior Used with M219.

It is valid when the machine chuck clamping command M10 is
121 M219 System interior
executed; it is invalid when the machine chuck unclamping
command M11 is executed.
Dry running; The program does not run at the programmed
speed, but runs at the dry running speed set by the parameter.
Auxiliary locked; the machine moves normally but the
123 M221 System interior auxiliary function MST is locked and can not be executed;
used for program verification.
124 M222 System interior System + 5V power supply is lower.
125 M223 System interior System + 24V power supply is lower.

Machine locked, the machine does not move but the position
coordinate displayed is identical to that when the machine is
running; and the MST command is executed normally for
program verification.
127 M225 System interior System is executing G04 pause command.
128 M226 System interior Magazine forward moving output for special arm magazine.
129 M227 System interior Magazine backward moving output for special arm magazine.
System interior Magazine moving forward in place detection for special arm
130 M228
magazine.
System interior Magazine moving backward in place detection for special arm
131 M229
magazine.
System interior Completed Z-axis return to tool change position in machining
132 M230
center (only for the 600i system)
133 M231-M233 Standby
134 M234 System interior Spindle 5th gear detection

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
138 M238 System interior Spindle 5th gear output
System interior Machining center servo magazine unclamping/clamping

142 M242
output.
System interior Machining center servo magazine unclamping/clamping
143 M243
in-place output.
System interior Spindle torque is too large and feed override will be
144 M244
automatically controlled within 50%
System interior
145 M245--M249
standby
System
146 M250 For use in chuck M10M11 short signal timing.
occupation
System
147 M251 For use in center M51M53 short signal timing.
occupation
System
148 M252 Feed axis intervention switch input signal.
occupation
System
149 M253 Spindle intervention switch input signal.
occupation
M254-M255 System
150 Feed axis override band switch.
-M256-M257 occupation
M258-M259 System
151 Spindle override band switch.
-M260-M261 occupation
System It is valid when the system is in the state of feed axis return to
152 M262
occupation zero; otherwise, it is invalid.
System
153 M263 Spindle mode switching auxiliary relay at Y-axis rigid tapping.
occupation
System
154 M264 Spindle mode switching auxiliary relay at X-axis rigid tapping.
occupation
When it is valid, it indicates the reset key is just pressed, with
System
155 M265 transfer from the NC layer to the PLC layer. The auxiliary relay
occupation
needs to be reset by the PLC.
Equivalent to
156 M266 Milling machine -X key
X182
Equivalent to
157 M267 Milling machine +X key
X180
Equivalent to
158 M268 Milling machine -Y key
X179
Equivalent to
159 M269 Milling machine +Z key
X178
Equivalent to
160 M270 Milling machine + key
X177
Equivalent to
161 M271 Milling machine +Y key
X183
Equivalent to
162 M272 Milling machine -Z key
X184
Equivalent to
163 M273 Milling machine -4 key
X185
Equivalent to
164 M274 Quick superposition key of milling machine
X181
165 M275 System To solve the problem of the spindle transmission ratio- two to

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 220
User Manual
occupation one at rigid tapping.
System
166 M276 Indicating it is currently in the following trapping state.
occupation
When it is valid, it indicates executing the custom control
167 M277 System
program.
occupation
System
168 M278 When it is valid, it indicates executing Z axis drop function.
occupation
System
169 M279 Used for external manual 5th forward motion input signal.
occupation
System
170 M280 Used for external manual 5th negative motion input signal.
occupation
System
171 M281 It id valid at rigid tapping retract under pulse control.
occupation
172 M282--M297 Custom
action according to PLC. The state of auxiliary relay can be
173 M298--M313 Custom
kept after power failure (for the system with ferroelectricity).
(input/output)
System 5th axis return to zero
174 M800
occupation
System Home
175 M801
occupation
System Single stage mode (automatic - automatic single-stage state;
176 M802
occupation manual - manual increment or manual pulse state)
System Simulation run mode
177 M803
occupation
System Manual increment 0.1
178 M804
occupation
179 M805
occupation
180 M806
occupation
System Manual mode
181 M807
occupation
System Handwheel mode
182 M808
occupation
System Auto mode
183 M809
occupation
System MDI mode
184 M810
occupation
System Diagnosis mode
185 M811
occupation
System Parameter mode
186 M812
occupation
System Program mode
187 M813
occupation
System It is valid when there are 5 days or less from the system
188 M814
occupation expiration date.
System It is valid when system expires
189 M815
occupation
System
190 M816 Handwheel current axis D0 bit
occupation
System
occupation

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
System
occupation
System
193 M819 Executing program return to zero
occupation
System
194 M820--M831 System standby
occupation
M1001-M112 System
195 Sub-panel key auxiliary relay
7 occupation
M1047-M105 System
3 occupation
M1056-M107
7
M1081-M108
196 The used subpanel key auxiliary relay is not defined
7
M1089-M110
7
M1109-M112
5
197 M1078 Subpanel key Automatic (not switching to the main interface).
198 M1079 Subpanel key Manual (not switching to the main interface)
199 M1080 Subpanel key Handwheel (not switching to the main interface)
200 M1029 Subpanel key Single-stage/ continuous (valid for manual and automatic).
201 M1054 Subpanel key Program selected stop.
202 M1055 Subpanel key Program skip.
203 M1032 Subpanel key Started from the actual line.
204 M1033 Subpanel key Started from the marked line.
205 M1034 Subpanel key Started from the tool line.
206 M1035 Subpanel key X1 gear.
209 M1026 Subpanel key Quick override rise.
210 M1027 Subpanel key Quick override 100%.
211 M1028 Subpanel key Quick override fall.
212 M1021 Subpanel key Feed override rise.
213 M1022 Subpanel key Feed override 100%.
214 M1020 Subpanel key Feed override fall.
215 M1025 Subpanel key Spindle override rise.
216 M1023 Subpanel key Spindle override 100%.
217 M1024 Subpanel key Spindle override fall.
218 M1019 Subpanel key Current tool case number setting for machining center.
219 M1042 Subpanel key Switch drive power state.
220 M1043 Subpanel key Going to MDI state.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 222
User Manual
221 M1044 Subpanel key Machine locked.
222 M1045 Subpanel key Auxiliary locked.
223 M1046 Subpanel key Dry running
224 M1030 Subpanel key Spindle shift to high-gear (1st gear).
225 M1038 Subpanel key Spindle shift to low-gear (2nd gear).
226 M1039 Subpanel key Spindle shift to 3rd gear.
227 M1040 Subpanel key Spindle shift to 4th gear.
228 M1003 Subpanel key Spindle forward rotation.
229 M1031 Subpanel key Spindle forward rotation jog.
230 M1006 Subpanel key Spindle stop.
231 M1004 Subpanel key Spindle CCW rotation.
232 M1041 Subpanel key Spindle CCW rotation jog.
233 M1015 Subpanel key Spindle orientation.
234 M1016 Subpanel key Feed axis return to tool change point.
Machining center tool disk forward rotation or lathe tool
235 M1017 Subpanel key
change.
236 M1018 Subpanel key Machining center tool disk CCW rotation.
237 M1126 Subpanel key Unclamping/clamping tool or chuck.
238 M1013 Subpanel key Zero return.
239 M1009 Subpanel key Cooling
240 M1008 Subpanel key Enable lubrication.
241 M1108 Subpanel key Disable lubrication.
242 M1007 Subpanel key Blowing.
243 M1127 Subpanel key Tailstock.
244 M1002 Subpanel key Clear spindle jog
245 M1005 Subpanel key Program run.
246 M1001 Subpanel key Program stop.
247 M1014 Subpanel key Reset.
248 M1088 Subpanel key Exist from the system.
249 M1010 Subpanel key Old incremental switching (X1, X10, X100 scroll switching).
Old single-stage/continuous switching (only valid for
250 M1011 Subpanel key
automatic)
251 M1012 Subpanel key Graphic/coordinate switching.
Note: 1. Normally open and normally closed points of all the auxiliary relays in the table above can be used in the PLC ladder
diagrams.
2. The "input" in the description column in the above table indicates that the signal of the current relay coil comes from
the contact input of other relays; "output" means the current relay contact outputs the signal to the coil of other relays.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
6.10 PLC programming examples and commands

Here are some examples on PLC programming methods.
1.Boundary between high-speed level PLC and low-speed level PLC:
Figure 6.55
High-speed level PLC is before this line and low-speed level PLC is after this line.
High-speed level PLC scan cycle is 8ms, while low-speed PLC scan cycle is 100ms.
2.In the high-speed level PLC ladder diagram, edit a line below as the boundary between manual
and automatic modes:
Figure 6.56
High-speed level PLC before this line is executed in both manual and automatic modes; High-speed level
PLC after this line is only executed in the manual mode; in the automatic mode, scan is made as per
low-speed level PLC, i.e. 100ms. This method is used to reduce the system load during automatic run.
3.Emergency stop:
Figure 6.57
Description: As it is shown in the figure above, after the input relay X151 is invalid (using the normally
closed contact), the system internal auxiliary relay M04 is valid, so that the system detects the external
switch action and executes the corresponding prompt and action.
4. X-axis forward hard limit:
Figure 6.58
Description: As it is shown above,after the input relay X50 is valid, the system internal auxiliary relay
M16 is valid, so that the system detects the X axis reaches the limit in the forward direction and executes
the corresponding prompt and action.
Note: The two examples above are under the situation where external signal is sent to the system internal auxiliary relay
of and the system executes the corresponding action at the same time after the corresponding auxiliary relay is
valid.
5. Spindle forward rotation:
Figure 6.59
Description: As it is shown in the figure above, when the normally open contact of the system internal
auxiliary relay M53 (forward rotation auxiliary relay)is connected with the output relay Y05 and the
system executes the spindle forward rotation command, the M53 relay is valid and the Y05 output is valid
as well. The external circuit is controlled to execute spindle forward rotation action.
6.Lighting auto run command lamp up:
Figure 6.60
Description: As it is shown in the figure above, when the normally open contact of the system internal
state auxiliary relay M08 (the relay is valid at the system axis feed ) is connected with the output relay Y15

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 224
User Manual
and the system automatically runs (coordinate feed), M08 relay is valid and Y15 output is valid as well. The
external circuit is controlled to light the indicator lamp up.
Note: The two examples above are under the situation where the system internal command/state is sent to the output
relay through the system internal auxiliary relay and at the same time, the output relay circuit drives the external
circuit to execute the corresponding action.
7.External manual spindle forward rotation button:
Figure 6.61
Description: As it is shown in the figure above, X20 is the input relay of the external button switch,
M01- the manual state relay, M53- the spindle forward rotation control relay, M54 - the spindle CCW
rotation control relay, M55 - the spindle stop control relay and Y05- the signal output relay When the
system is in the manual state, M01 relay is valid; if the external button action signal is input and valid by the
X20 input relay at this time, the spindle forward rotation control relay M53 setting will be valid while the
spindle CCW rotation control relay M54 and spindle stop control relay M55 reset will be invalid. After M53
is valid, its contact is on so that Y05 output is valid. The external circuit is controlled to execute spindle
forward rotation action.
Note: The above example is under the situation where the external signal is sent to the system internal auxiliary relay by
which the external signal is then sent to the output relay and at the same time the output relay circuit drives the
external circuit to execute the corresponding action. Also, the interlocking relation between signals of the same
type (at forward rotation, reverse and stop will be set as invalid) shall be considered.
8.In manual state, sub-panel K1 reciprocating key controls Y17 output; also, command
M53/M54 control its output; and K1 key command lamp lights up:
Figure 6.62
Description: As it is shown in the figure above, X166 is the input relay of sub-panel K1 key, M01 - the
manual state relay, M166- last state relay for the sub-panel K1 key input relay, M62 - the custom system
internal auxiliary relay, which is valid / invalid, depending on the command M53 / M54 control, Y71 - the
sub-panel K1 key command lamp output relay and Y17 - the signal output relay.
Execution principle:
Press K1 key to make lamp ON - When the system is in the manual state, M01 relay is valid. If the
sub-panel K1 key is pressed, signal will be input via the X166 input relay. As K1 is in OFF state before being
pressed, M166 normally closed contact is valid; as the Y71 relay is initially invalid, its normally closed
contact is valid; thus, the M62 relay is set and remains valid; also, the Y17 and Y71 outputs are valid. That
Y17 controls the external circuit to execute the corresponding action is valid; Y71 lights K1 indicator lamp
up.
Press K1 key to make lamp OFF - When the system is in the manual state, M01 relay is valid. If the
sub-panel K1 key is pressed, signal will be input via the X166 input relay. As K1 is in OFF state before being
pressed, M166 normally closed contact is valid; as the Y71 relay is valid (it is valid under K1 control at the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
last time), its normally open contact is valid; thus, the M62 relay is reset and remains invalid; also, the Y17
and Y71 outputs are invalid. That Y17 controls the external circuit to execute the corresponding action is
invalid; Y71 is invalid and K1 indicator lamp is off.
command control for ON/OFF-When the system executes the command M53, the system internal
auxiliary relay M62 is valid and also Y17 and Y71 outputs are valid. That Y17 controls the external circuit to
execute the corresponding action is valid and Y71 lights K1 indicator lamp; when the system executes the
command M54, the system internal auxiliary relay M62 is invalid and also the Y17 and Y71 outputs are
invalid. That Y17 controls the external circuit to execute the corresponding action is invalid; Y71 is invalid
and K1 indicator lamp is off.
The example above is mainly a reciprocating process. The M166 relay is used to store the last state of
the X166 relay to realize the reciprocating. The last state saving function is only available for all input relays
on the sub-panel, so the other input relays can not be used as the reciprocating buttons.
9.In manual state, K1/K2 key on the sub-panel controls valid/invalid Y17 output; also,
command M53/M54 controls its output; and K1/K2 key command lamp lights up:
Figure 6.63
Description: As it is shown in the figure above, X166 is the input relay of the sub-panel K1 key, X167 -
the input relay of the sub-panel K2 key, M01 - the manual state relay, M62 - the custom internal auxiliary
relay of the system, which is valid / invalid, depending on the command M53/M54, Y71- sub-panel K1 key
command light output relay, Y72 - sub-panel K2 key command light output relay and Y17 - signal output
relay.
Execution principle: Press K1 for ON - When the system is in the manual state, M01 relay is valid; if
the sub-panel K1 key is pressed, the signal will be input and valid via the X166 relay. As the K2 key is not
pressed, its normally closed contact is valid and M62 relay is valid (as M62 contact is connected with X166
in parallel, M62 self-locking remains valid); also, Y17 and Y71 outputs are valid. That Y17 controls the
external circuit to execute the corresponding action is valid; Y71 lights the K1 indicator lamp; Y72 is
connected to the normally closed contact of M62, so Y72 output is invalid and K2 indicator lamp is off.
Press K1 for OFF - When the sub-panel K2 key is pressed, the signal is input and valid via the X167
input relay; however, as its contact is connected to M62 self-locking circuit in series, when X167 is valid,
M62 self-locking is released; thus, M62 is invalid and Y17 and Y71 outputs are invalid as well. That Y17
controls the external circuit to execute the corresponding action is invalid; Y71 is invalid and K1 indicator
lamp is off. Y72 is connected to the normally closed contact of M62, so Y72 output is invalid and Y72 lights
K2 indicator lamp up.
command control for ON/OFF-When the system executes the command M53, the system internal
auxiliary relay M62 is valid and Y17 and Y71 outputs are valid as well. That Y17 controls the external
circuit to execute the corresponding action is valid; Y71 lights the K1 indicator lamp up; Y72 is connected to
the normally closed contact of M62, so Y72 output is invalid and K2 indicator lamp is off. When the system
executes the command M54, the system internal auxiliary relay M62 is invalid and Y17 and Y71 outputs are
invalid as well. That Y17 controls the external circuit to execute the corresponding action is invalid; Y71 is
invalid and K1 indicator lamp is off. Y72 is connected to the normally closed contact of M62, so Y72 output
is invalid and Y72 lights K2 indicator lamp up.
The above example mainly takes advantages of the most common start and stop control circuits in the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 226
User Manual
relay circuit system, to connect in parallel the normally open contact of output relay with the normally open
contact of input start control relay, in order to realize self-locking, as well as to connect in series the
normally closed contact of input stop control relay to the circuit, in order to realize release of self-locking.
In addition to this method, the setting/reset method can also be used to realize the PLC function in the
example above:
Figure 6.64
X166 makes setting for M62; X167 makes reset for M62.
10.Spindle braking (spindle stop signal is canceled after a period of output )
Figure 6.65
Description: As it is shown in the figure above, M53 is the system spindle forward rotation relay, M55 -
system spindle CCW rotation relay, M55 - system spindle stop relay, M107 and M108 - the custom system
internal auxiliary relays, T03-10ms general timer and Y07 - signal output relay.
Execution principle: As it is shown above, Lines 1 and 2 in the ladder diagram always make the internal
auxiliary relay M107 setting valid when the system executes spindle forward rotation (M53) or CCW
rotation (M54) ; lines 3 and 4 in the ladder diagram make M55 valid when the system executes spindle stop;
also, when the previous system execution M107 setting is valid, the system internal auxiliary relay M108
setting is valid and the internal auxiliary relay M107 reset is invalid (clear forward and CCW rotation
states); for line 5 in the ladder diagram, when M108 is valid, its 10ms general timer T03 (set constant K is
150; that is, the timing time is 1.5 seconds) starts counting; for line 6 in ladder diagram, whenT03 timing
time is reached, T03 relay is valid and the system internal auxiliary relay M108 reset is invalid; for line 7 in
the ladder diagram, when the system executes the spindle stop (M55 valid) and M108 is valid, the signal
output relay Y07 output is valid and controlling the external circuit to execute the braking action is valid;
line 6 in the ladder diagram is linked; when T03 timing time is reached, M108 is invalid and the signal
output relay Y07 output is invalid and controlling the external circuit to execute the braking action is
invalid. Thus, when the spindle stops, Y07 output is valid for 1.5s and then be canceled, to achieve the
braking effect.
The above example mainly takes advantage of timing relays to achieve that the output signal is kept for
a period of time and then be canceled.
6.11 Edit relay name

In this system, names of system internal relays M80-M95 (custom alarm), input relays X00-X47 and

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
output relays Y00-Y63 can be edited and can be displayed in the diagnosis interface and status bar in order
to make you intuitively understand the system PLC configuration and states. They can be edited on not only
the system panel but also the PC; the specific method is as follows:
6.11.1 Edit relay name on the system panel
Enter the system diagnosis interface and press "Edit Configuration" to enter the relay name editing
interface, as shown below:
Figure 6.66
Use the Up and Down keys to move the cursor to the element you want to edit; press "Enter" key and the
system will show a dialog box in Fig. 6.67; enter the name you want in the dialog box.
Figure 6.67
After editing, enter the "input relay" under diagnostic "I/O" interface and you will see there are
corresponding names under the X03 relay; as shown below:
Figure 6.68
6.11.2 Edit relay name on PC machine

Export the system parameter file to the PC and delete all the files except those named IO.TXT on the PC.
Use "Notepad" to open the IO.TXT file, as shown in Figure 6.69:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 228
User Manual
Figure 6.69
Save the file after the completion of editing, and then import the IO.TXT file into the system as per the
method in section 5.6; after system restart, enter the "input relay"under the diagnostic "I/O" interface and
you will see there are corresponding names under X04 relay; as shown below:
Figure 6.71
6.11.3 Example on use of custom alarms for internal relays M80-M95.
System internal relays M80-M95 are for custom alarms. For example, when the relay is valid, the
system status prompt bar will give the corresponding name according to the information, as shown in the
following example:
Example: For checking material preparation situation of the machine automatic feeding device,
connect an external metal proximity switch (input signal to X16; when there is no material, the switch is
valid) to detect the material preparation situation; when the material prepared is insufficient, the system is
required to display "inadequate material" words, but this does not affect other actions of the system and
only reminds the operator to feed material.
1.Edit a PLC ladder diagram as shown below
Figure 6.72
Edit relay name (edit IO.TXT file)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.73 Edit input relay name
Figure 6.74 Edit custom alarm relay name

3.For IO.TXT file system, the diagnosis interface will show the following.
Figure 6.75
In the "input relay" under the diagnostic "I/O" interface, you will see there are corresponding names
under the X16 relay
Figure 6.76.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 230
User Manual
In the "auxiliary relay 2" under the diagnostic "I/O" interface , you will see there are corresponding
names under M81 relay
Note: If it is needed to prohibit some of the corresponding actions after the alarm is given, you will need to add another
PLC programs.
6.12 Preset function definition for programmable I/O port

Depending on the system requirements and some of the necessary conditions, there are some input /
output relays that have been preset for some one purpose at the factory. Normally, no further editing or
changing of the PLC program is required.
6.12.1 Sub-panel
Figure 6.78 350IM-S
Figure 6.79 350IM-H

Input relay: (as shown in Figure 6.78 and Figure 6.79)
X151：Sub-panel emergency stop button;
X152：Sub-panel run button;
X153：Sub-panel pause button;
X154：Sub-panel spindle forward rotation key;
X155：Sub-panel spindle stop key;
X156：Sub-panel spindle CCW rotation key;

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
X157：Sub-panel took disk forward rotation key;
X158：Sub-panel spindle forward rotation jog key;
X159：Sub-panel spindle CCW rotation jog key;
X160：Sub-panel took disk CCW rotation key;
X161：Sub-panel machine lubrication key;
X162：Sub-panel cooling key;
X163：Sub-panel exit from system key;
X164：Sub-panel spindle tool unclamping key;
X165：Sub-panel MDI key;
X166：Sub-panel K1 key;
X170：Sub-panel K5 key/Z axis return to the second reference point;
X171：Sub-panel K6 key/setting tool case number;
X174：Sub-panel incremental switching key;
X175：Sub-panel run mode (single-stage/continuous) switching key;
X176：Sub-panel manual/automatic key;
X177：Sub-panel “+4” key;
X178：Sub-panel “+Z” key;
X179：Sub-panel “-Y” key;
X180：Sub-panel “+X” key;
X181：Sub-panel quick superposition key;
X182：Sub-panel “-X” key;
X183：Sub-panel“+Y” key;
X184：Sub-panel “-Z” key;
X185：Sub-panel “-4 ” key;
X186-X189：Sub-panel feed axis speed override switch;
X190-X192：Sub-panel spindle override key;
Output relay: (as shown in Fig. 6.78 and Fig. 6.79)
Y71orY100：K1；
Y72 orY101：K2；
Y73 or Y102：K3；
Y74 or Y103：K4；
Y75 orY104：K5；
Y76 or Y105：K6；
Y77 or Y106：K7；
Y78 or Y107：K8；
Y79 or Y108：K9；
Y80 or Y109：K10；
Y110：Spindle forward rotation;
Y111：Spindle stop;
Y112：Spindle CCW rotation;
Y113：Program run (solidified in the software; PLC does not need to make editing)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 232
User Manual
Y114：Program pause (cured in the software; PLC does not need to make editing)
Y115：Lubrication;
Y116：Cooling;
Y117：Single-stage/continuous
Y118：Manual/automatic
Y119：Quick superposition
Y120：Chuck
Y122：MDI；
Note: The remaining sub-keyboard indicator lamps are not controlled by FPGA, but controlled by the
corresponding buttons directly; press the button to make it on and release the button to make it off .
6.12.2 Manual pulse generator:
X198：Handwheel emergency stop;
X200：Manual pulse COM;
X201：Manual pulse 0FF;
X202：Manual pulse X;
X203：Manual pulse Y;
X204：Manual pulse Z;
X205：Manual pulse A;
X206：Manual pulse x1;
6.12.3 General I/O plug board:
General I/O plug board I / O function pre-conditions vary with configured PLC programs and
parameters. In the bundled CD of system, there are three sets of PLC programs and parameters -"Bamboo
hat style magazine machining center with CTB-GA spindle", "arm magazine machining center with CTB-GA
spindle "and "plain milling machine"; the user can import the set of parameter package needed into the
system. Normally, the system is provided with set of parameters "Bamboo hat style magazine machining
center with CTB-GA spindle" from factory.
1. Initial I/O configuration of PLC for "umbrella style magazine machining center with CTB-GA servo
spindle"
Input relay:
X0：Spindle orientation completion/zero return in-place detection;
X01：Spindle driver alarm;
X02：Cooling motor overload detection;
X03：Magazine motor overload detection;
X04：Spindle tool unclamping detection;
X05：Lubricating oil level detection;
X06：Spindle remote tool unclamping button;
X07：Spindle tool tension detection;
X08：Magazine forward moving detection;
X09：Magazine backward moving detection;
X10：Tool detection;
X14：Magazine count;
X15：Automatic tool setting
Output relay:
Y00：Cooling control output;
Y01：Tool unclamping/clamping control output;
Y02：Magazine backward moving control output;

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Y03：Lubrication control output;
Y03：Spindle locking control output;
Y05：Spindle forward rotation control output;
Y06：Spindle CCW rotation control output;
Y08：Spindle control mode switching output;
Y09：Spindle zero return output;
Y10：Magazine CW rotation control output;
Y11：Magazine CCW rotation control output;
Y12：Magazine forward moving control output;
Y13：Red indicator lamp (fault indicator lamp);
Y14：Yellow indicator lamp (stop indicator lamp);
Y15：Green indicator lamp (run indicator lamp);
Y16：Spindle driver power control output;
Y17：Feed axis driver power control output;
2. Initial I/O configuration of PLC for "arm magazine machining center with CTB servo spindle"
Input relay:
X01： Spindle driver alarm;
X08：Magazine positioning detection;
X09：Magazine arm stop detection;
X10：Magazine arm origin detection;
X11：Tool case lifting detection;
X12：Tool case falling detection;
X13：Magazine arm tool holding detection;
X16： Machine door opening/closing detection;
X17： Compressed air pressure detection alarm;
X18： Cooling liquid shortage detection;
X19： Chip removal motor overload detection alarm
X20：Spindle fan overload detection;
Output relay:
Y02：Tool case lifting control output;
Y05：Spindle CW rotation control output;
Y07：Magazine manipuator motorl control output

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 234
User Manual
Y12：Tool case falling control output;
Y18：Chip removal motor CW rotation control output;
Y19：Chip removal CCW rotation control output;
Note: Machining center "sets the current tool case number" and put it under tool case table interface.
3.General I/O initial configuration for PLC with "ordinary milling machine"
Input relay:
X01： Spindle driver alarm;
Output relay:
Y07：Spindle braking control center;
Note: 1. Usually, the above initial definition can not be modified in order to ensure real-time capability with relevant I/O
ports of the magazine.
2. Input/output relays not mentioned above are not defined, with which users can make programming.
6.13 PLC and relevant commands/parameters definitions for machine with
tool magazine:
6.13.1 Description on machining center with Umbrellay style magazine

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.80
Before debugging, import the file of "parameters and PLC for bamboo hat style magazine machining
center" in the bundled CD into the system
Custom K keys have the following definitions:
K3 for setting the number for the current tool case;
K4 for spindle orientation ( K4 indicator lamp is on when the spindle orientation is completed)
K5 for Z axis return to tool change point (K5 indicator lamp is on when return to tool change
point )
Definitions of M commands:
M41 for magazine moving forward
M43 for magazine moving backward
Tool change operation at magazine
Txx ：To return the tool on the spindle to the magazine and then to make the Txx in the command onto
the spindle.
M36 Txx：To make the Txx in the command onto the spindle in the single-stage mode according to the
tool change steps. After the completion of a step, pause state is available; press the run button to continue
to execute the next step; mainly used for debugging. The main tool change steps are as follows (the tool
change step has been solidified by the software, the user can only modify part of I/O configuration):
Tool change process in magazine
1. Execute preparation action for tool change or tool selection: Spindle orientation and Z axis return
to tool change point.
2.Tool rest moving forward
3.Spindle tool unclasping
4. Lifting Z axis
5. Magazine turning, selecting No. Txx tool
6. Z axis falling
7. Spindle tool clamping
8. Tool rest moving backword
Definition of external I/O of magazine (This I/O has been solidified by the software and must not used
for other functions)
1. Magazine counter： X14.
2. Magazine CW rotation：Y10.
3. Magazine CCW rotation ：Y11.
Note: It is needed to set the corresponding general parameters for this solidification signal
61.Magazine tool count signal [Rising edge "1000 + number", falling edge "2000+ number"] .Setting: 1
62.Tool magazine positioning signal [1000+ number]. Setting: 1
63. Magazine CW rotation output point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1
64. Magazine CCW rotation output point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 236
User Manual
65. Manipuator braking input point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1
66. Arm rotation output point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1
All I/O definitions
Input signal:
X08：Magazine forward moving detection;
X09：Magazine backward moving detection;
X10：Tool detection;
Output signal:
Y12：Magazine forward moving control output;
Special Attention: 1.When tool mess in magazine occurs during tool change due to a sudden power failure
or emergency stop, etc. , manually rotate the magazine by several tool locations first and
then use the K3 key to set the current tool case number.
2. When using M41 magazine moving forward, pay attention to checking the Z axis position
to avoid accidents.
3. There shall not be any tool available for No. T0; otherwise, an accident will occur.
4. For initial tool installation , there must be tool on the spindle (usually, there shall be No.
T01 tool on the spindle after the table of tool cases is initialized).
6.13.2 Description on machining center of arm magazine

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Figure 6.81
Before debugging, import the file of "parameters and PLC for arm magazine machining center" in the
bundled CD into the system
Custom K keys have the following definitions:
K3 for setting the number for the current tool case;
K4 for spindle orientation ( K4 indicator lamp is on when the spindle orientation is completed)
K5 for Z axis return to tool change point (K5 indicator lamp is on when return to tool change point )
Definitions of M commands:
M41 for tool case falling down, used for debugging
M43 for tool case lifting up, used for debugging
M57 for the arm unconditional rotation by one step, used for debugging
Tool change operation at magazine
M06：Make the tool of the current tool case onto the spindle.
Txx ：Turn the Txx in the command to the tool change position
M06 Txx ：Make the tool of the current tool case onto the spindle, and turn the Txx in the command to
the tool change position to prepare for the next tool change. (first tool change and then tool selection)
M16 Txx ： Turn the Txx in the command to the tool change position and then make the tool of the
current tool case onto the spindle.（ (first tool selection and then tool change; that is, making the Txx tool in
the command onto the spindle)
M36： To make the tool of the current tool case onto the spindle in the single-stage mode according to
the tool change steps. After the completion of a step, pause state is available; press the run button to
continue to execute the next step; mainly used for debugging. The main tool change steps are as follows
(the tool change step has been solidified by the software, the user can only modify part of I/O
configuration):
Tool change process in magazine
1.Execute preparation action for tool change or tool selection:Spindle orientation and Z axis return to
tool change point.
2. Tool case falling
3. Arm tool clasping
4.Spindle tool unclamping
5.Arm tool change
6.Spindle tool clamping
7.Arm homing
8. Lifting tool case
Definition of external I/O of magazine (This I/O has been solidified by the software and must not used
for other functions)
Magazine counter: X14.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 238
User Manual
Magazine rotation positioning signal： X08
Arm stop signal detection: X09.
Magazine CW rotation: Y10.
Magazine CCW rotation: Y11.
Arm motor operation: Y07.
Note: It is needed to set the corresponding general parameters for this solidification signal:
61.Magazine tool count signal [Rising edge "1000+number", falling edge "2000+ number"]. Setting:
1014.
62. Tool magazine positioning signal [1000+ number]. Setting: 1008.
63. Magazine CW rotation output point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1010.
64.Magazine CCW rotation output point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1011.
65.Manipuator braking input point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1009.
66. Arm rotation output point [1000+ number]. Setting: 1007.
All I/O definitions:
Input relay:
X08：Magazine positioning detection;
X09：Magazine arm stop detection;
X10：Magazine arm origin detection;
X11：Tool case lifting detection;
X12：Tool case falling detection;
X13：Magazine arm tool holding detection;
X16： Machine door opening/closing detection;
X17： Compressed air pressure detection alarm;
X18： Cooling liquid shortage detection;
X19： Chip removal motor overload detection alarm
X20：Spindle fan overload detection;
Output relay:
Y07：Magazine arm motor control output;

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Y12：Tool case falling control output;
Y18：Chip removal motor CW rotation control output;
Y19：Chip removal CCW rotation control output;
Special Attention: 1.When tool mess in magazine occurs during tool change due to a sudden power failure
or emergency stop, etc. , manually rotate the magazine by several tool locations first and
then use the K3 key to set the current tool case number.
2.For this type of magazine, you can the maximum tool number at the fixed tool area in
NO.27 parameter of "Comprehensive ;Parameters"; after setting the parameter, you had
better initialize the tool case table. For example, when it is set to 8, it means that in tool case
table from 1 to 8, you can only install tool with the corresponding number; that is, No.1-8
tools are not randomly selected, but installed in a fixed manner. This function can be used to
install tools for large diameter tool disk.
3. There shall not be any tool available for No. T0; otherwise, an accident will occur.
4. M57 command does not check the conditions; pay special attention when it is used;
otherwise, it will cause a safety accident.
5. Spindle tool unclamping/clamping is set to reciprocating mode; press once for unclamping
and press again for clamping.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 240
User Manual
Chapter 7 System Installation and Connection
7.1 GENERAL
In this chapter mainly introduce the installation methods of system and related cautions.
CNC system must be assembled firmly in system cabinet. Certain space should be remained around it to
assure air ventilation. The assembled location of panel should be easy to operate and avoid damaged by
chips and etc.
Strong power should be divided from weak current，CNC system and drive power supply should be divided
from the strong power for machine, all kinds of digital wires should be far away from AC contacts to
decrease interference, limitation, base point signal should be directly connected with CNC system and not
through strong power box; power line should be strictly and correctly grounded.
Put the plug into the socket firmly, tighten mounting screws. Pull out and insert plugs of driver, motor and
all kinds of signal wire with power on are prohibited.
When assemble system, protect the panel is damaged by edge tools and hard substance，if need painting the
controller should be unload to avoid make the panel to be dirty.
There should not be source of strong magnet and power, furthest away from tinder and explosive materials
and all of danger.
7.2 SYSTERM CONFIGURATION

7.2.1 System Assemblies and Function
Fig7.1 350iM-H Front and rear view

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig7.2 350iM-V Front and rear view

7.2.2 System Subpanel
Fig7.3 350iM-H Subpanel and rear view

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 242
User Manual
Fig7.4 350iM-V Subpanel and rear view
Fig 7.5 wiring diagram of subpanel rear

Instructions:
1.As it is shown in the rear side of the horizontal and vertical sub-panels: There are "sub-panel" socket,
"remote I/O" socket, "band switch (ABDEF), stop running (5v, stop lamp, run light, stop, run, GND),
three-position knob (GND, emergency stop, right , left) "and other signals. Among other things, the
"sub-panel" socket RS485 is connected with the system host and the "remote I / O" socket transmits the I/O
signal through RS485. The "band switch, running stop and three-position knob" socket is connected with
the sub-panel through the cable.
2.On the sub-panel "power on/off button" socket is to lead the power on/off button contact out; the
wiring principle is shown above, the user can use it to control the contactor for power supply to the system
and driver. The maximum withstand voltage for the contact is AC250V/DC30V and the maximum withstand
current is 1A. Indicator lamp voltage is 24V and AC and DC can be interoperable; when using DC voltage,
note the polarity indicated in the schematic diagram; when the voltage used in the indicator is higher than
24V, connect the corresponding resistance in series to ensure that the current is about 12mA.
2.The machine must be reliably earthed by using grounding studs.
7.3 System Integrated Connection Diagram

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig 7.6 Integrated connection diagram
7.4 Main Parts Dimension

7.4.1 Operation Panel Dimension

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 244
User Manual
350iM-H

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
350iM-V
Fig7.7 System installation size
7.4.2 Subpanel Dimension
350iM-H Subpanel

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 246
User Manual
350iM-V Subpanel
Fig 7.8 Subpanel Dimension
7.4.3 RIO Installation Size
Fig 7.9 RIO Installation Size

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
7.4.4 Input Signal Board Dimension(RIO-IN16)
Fig 7.10 Input signal Board

7.4.5 Output Signal Board Dimension
7.4.5.1 Output Signal Board (RIO-OUT16-A) Dimension
Fig 7.11 Output Signal Board(RIO-OUT16-A)Size

7.4.5.2 Output Signal Board (RIO-OUT16-B) Dimension
Fig 7.12 Output Signal Board(RIO-OUT16-B)Size
7.5 System Installation Environment

CNC system must be assembled firmly in system cabinet. Certain space (more than 100mm) should be
remained around it to assure air ventilation. The assembled location of panel should be easy to operate and
avoid damaged by chips and etc.
Around the CNC system should not have strong magnetism, strong electrical noise source, far away from
flammable, high explosive, and all dangerous objects.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 248
User Manual
Running 0 ℃ ~ +45 ℃
Temperature
Storing -20 ℃ ~ +60 ℃
Humidity 10 ~ 90 RH
Vibration ≤ 0.5 G
Environment Avoids dust, oil and corrosive gas, ventilated well.
7.5.1 Power capacity
This CNC system power includes the operator power(DC5V/5A) and remote I/O power module (DC24V/2A)
with AC220V input voltage, capacity requirement details are as follow:
Voltage Capacity Remark

CNC Must apply isolating transformer,
Operator+Remote AC220V 75W The transformer input voltage
IO module power request AC380V
7.6 CNC System Connected with Surrounding Equipments

7.6.1. CNC communication port
Fig 7.13 communication port
J1 (RS232) pin table (DB-9P female)

1 pin: Null
2 pin: RXD receive data
3 pin: TXD transmission data
4 pin: Null
5 pin: GND internal power grounding
6 pin: Null
7 pin: Null
8 pin: Null
9 pin: Null
J2 (USB) pin table
1 pin: VCC USB-A power supply (+5V)
2 pin: USB-A-D- USB-A negative port
3 pin: USB-A-D+ USB-A positive port
4 pin: GND internal power grounding
For this system, the RS232 and USB connectors are in the front of the main panel, move the cover on the left
side of the main panel and you will see them, the below one is reboot key for the system. (Do not press the
reboot key when the system being in normal running, otherwise lead to unexpected result)
The RS232 port mainly used for transmitting of system parameter, program, system software etc. to
connect with PC, please refer to Fig7.14:

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig 7.14
NOTE:
To aviod damage of the RS232 port, must use the communication shield. When using communication
shield the RS232 baud rate can not be more than 38.4Kbps.
2)the RS232 wire length can not be longer than 10 meters.
The USB connector is mainly used for connecting with U disk, transmission system parameter, program,
CNC software and etc.
7.6.2 CN1 Voltage Interface Connection
Fig7.15 CN1 Interface

7.6.3 Handy handwheel Interface

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 250
User Manual
Figure 7.16 Diagram on CN31 interface

Pin Signal Description Active level
Pin 1 A+ A pulse negative signal Differential signal (input)
Pin 2 A- A pulse postive signal Differential signal (input)
Pin 3 B+ MPG B pulse postive signal Differential signal (input)
Pin 4 B- MPG B pulse negative signal Differential signal (input)
Pin 5 X100(X208) Override X100 positive signal GND valid (input)
Pin 8 DX(X202) Axis selective X axis signal GND valid (input)
Pin 9 DY(X203) Axis selective Y axis signal GND valid (input)
Pin 10 +5V Internal + 5V power supply
Pin 1 +5V Internal + 5V power supply
Pin 12-Pin 13 GND Internal power supply grounding
Pin 14 XS Standby GND valid (input)
Pin 15 YS Standby GND valid (input)
Pin 16 GND Internal power supply grounding
Pin 17-18 +5V Internal power supply grounding
Pin 19 DZ(X204) Axis selective Z axis signal GND valid (input)
Pin 20 DA(X205) Axis selective A axis signal GND valid (input)
Pin 21 STOP1(X79) Emergency stop signal input 5V valid (output)
Pin 22 OFF(X201) MPG OFF GND valid (input)
Pin 23 COM1(X200) Standby GND valid (input)
Pin 24 DB(X210) Axis selective B axis signal GND valid (input)
Pin 25 DC(X211) Axis selective C axis signal GND valid (input)
Pin 26 Null
7.6.3.1 Handy Pulsor Internal Connection Diagram

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig 7.17
7.6.4 CN16 Spindle Interface wiring table
Figure 7.18 Diagram on CN16 interface

Pin Signal Description
Pin 1 CA+ Encoder A pulse positive signal
Pin 2 CA- Encoder A pulse negative signal
Pin 3 CB+ Encoder B pulse positive signal
Pin 4 C B- Encoder B pulse negative signal
Pin 5 CDIR+ C direction signal positive
Pin 6 CDIR- C directionsignal negative
Pin 7 CCP+ C pulse signal positive
Pin 8 CCP- C pulse signal negative
Pin 9 IPE 24V power supply ground
Pin 10 Y52 Output signal IPE valid
Pin 16 X66 Intput signal 24V valid
Pin 18 +24V 24V power supply
Pin 19 CZ+ Encoder Z pulse positive signal
Pin 20 CZ- Encoder Z pulse negative signal

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 252
User Manual
Pin 22 Null Intput signal 24V valid
Pin 25 Y50 Servo enable signal IPE valid
Pin 26 Y51 Servo alarm clear IPE valid
7.6.4.2 Spindle Encoder Interface
J6 (spindle encoder connection) table (DB-9P female)
Fig 7.19 CN21 interface
Pins Signal Explanation

1pin +5V Internal +5V power
2pin Null
3pin S A+ A pulse positive signal
4pin S B+ B pulse positive signal
5pin S Z+ Z pulse positive signal
6pin GND Internal power grounding
7pin S A- A pulse negative signal
8pin S B- B pulse negative signal
9pin S Z- Z pulse negative signal
NOTE: Encoder line length should be not too long, normally not longer than 5 meters. If longer than
this value, must increase the section area and must use double twist shielded wire.
7.6.5 CN51 485 Communication port connected with Drivers
Fig 7.20 CN51 Interface

Communication interface explanation
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
pins Signal Explanation
1pin +5V Internal +5Vpower
2pin 485-A 485-A
3pin 485-B 485-B
4pin-5pin Null
6pin GND Internal power grounding
7pin-9pin Null
7.6.6 Communication interface for CN52 and sub-panel
Figure 7.21 Sub-panel interface diagram

Pin 1 +5V Internal +5V power supply
Pin 2 D422+ System sending
Pin 3 D422- System receiving
Pin 4 Null Retention
Pin 7 R422+ Remote I/O sending
Pin 8 R422- Remote I/O receiving
Pin 9 OUT EN Sub-panel enable
7.6.7 Connection with Feeding Axis
7.6.7.1CN11 X-axis servo driver interface
Pin Signal Explanation

1pin X A+ Encoder A pulse positive signal
2pin X A- Encoder A pulse negative signal
3pin X B+ Encoder B pulse positive signal
4pin X B- Encoder B pulse negative signal
5pin XDIR+ X direction signal positive
6pin XDIR- X direction signal negative
7pin XCP+ X pulse signal positive
8pin XCP- X pulse signal negative
Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 254
User Manual
9pin IPE 24V power grounding
10pin-17pin Null
18pin +24V 24V power
19pin XZ+ Encoder Z pulse positive signal
20pin XZ- Encoder Z pulse negative signal
21pin XALM+(X74) Servo alarm signal positive
22pin XALM-(X74) Servo alarm signal negative
23pin XR+(X69) Servo ready signal positive
24pin XR-(X69) Servo ready signal negative
25pin Y50 Servo enable signal IPE valid
26pin Y51 Servo alarm clearence IPE valid
7.6.7.2 CN12 Y-axis servo driver interface

1pin Y A+ Encoder A pulse positive signal
2pin Y A- Encoder A pulse negative signal
3pin YB+ Encoder B pulse positive signal
4pin YB- Encoder B pulse negative signal
5pin YDIR+ Y direction signal positive
6pin YDIR- Y direction signal negative
7pin YCP+ Y pulse signal positive
8pin YCP- Y pulse signal negative
10pin-17pin Null
19pin YZ+ Encoder Z pulse positive signal
20pin YZ- Encoder Z pulse negative signal
21pin YALM+(X75) Servo alarm signal positive
22pin YALM-(X75) Servo alarm signal negative
23pin YR+(X70) Servo ready signal positive
24pin YR-(X70) Servo ready signal negative
7.6.7.3 CN13 Z-axis servo driver interface

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig7.24 CN13 interface

1pin ZA+ Encoder A pulse positive signal
2pin ZA- Encoder A pulse negative signal
3pin ZB+ Encoder B pulse positive signal
4pin ZB- Encoder B pulse negative signal
5pin ZDIR+ Z direction signal positive
6pin ZDIR- Z direction signal negative
7pin ZCP+ Z pulse signal positive
8pin ZCP- Z pulse signal negative
10pin-17pin Null
19pin ZZ+ Encoder Z pulse positive signal
20pin ZZ- Encoder Z pulse negative signal
21pin ZALM+(X76) Servo alarm signal positive
22pin ZALM-(X76) Servo alarm signal negative
23pin ZR+(X71) Servo ready signal positive
24pin ZR-(X71) Servo ready signal negative
7.6.7.4 CN14 A-axis servo driver interface

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 256
User Manual
1pin AA+ Encoder A pulse positive signal
2pin AA- Encoder A pulse negative signal
3pin AB+ Encoder B pulse positive signal
4pin AB- Encoder B pulse negative signal
5pin ADIR+ A direction signal positive
6pin ADIR- A direction signal negative
7pin ACP+ A pulse signal positive
8pin ACP- A pulse signal negative
10pin-17pin Null
19pin AZ+ Encoder Z pulse positive signal
20pin AZ- Encoder Z pulse negative signal
21pin AALM+(X77) Servo alarm signal positive
22pin AALM-(X77) Servo alarm signal negative
23pin AR+(X72) Servo ready signal positive
24pin AR-(X72) Servo ready signal negative
7.6.7.5 CN15 B-axis servo driver interface

1pin BA+ Encoder A pulse positive signal
2pin BA- Encoder A pulse negative signal
3pin BB+ Encoder B pulse positive signal
4pin BB- Encoder B pulse negative signal
5pin BDIR+ B direction signal positive
6pin BDIR- B direction signal negative
7pin BCP+ B pulse signal positive
8pin BCP- B pulse signal negative
10pin-17pin Null
19pin BZ+ Encoder Z pulse positive signal
20pin BZ- Encoder Z pulse negative signal
21pin BALM+(X78) Servo alarm signal positive
22pin BALM-(X78) Servo alarm signal negative
23pin BR+(X73) Servo ready signal positive
24pin BR-(X73) Servo ready signal negative

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
7.6.8 RIO Interface:
Fig 7.27 RIO interface

7.6.8.1 RIO Interface Explanation
Explanation: remote I/O is the communication medium between subpanel and I/O signals.
Pin 1 +5V Internal +5V power supply
Pin 2 D422+ System sending
Pin 3 D422- System receiving
Pin 7 R422+ Remote I/O sending
Pin 8 R422- Remote I/O receiving
Pin 9 OUT EN IO Enable
7.6.8.2 Input 1 (IN1) interface (DP26 female )
Pin Interface Signal Valid level
1pin IN1 X1
2pin IN3 X3 If COM1 connected on 24V,
X0~X7 are IPE valid ; if COM1
3pin IN5 X5

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 258
User Manual
4pin IN7 X7 connected on IPE, X0~X7 are
5pin IN8 X8 24Vvalid;
6pin IN10 X10
7pin IN12 X12
8pin IN14 X14
9pin COM2 C0M2
10pin IN0 X0
11pin IN2 X2
12pin IN4 X4
13pin IN6 X6
14pin COM1 COM1 If COM2 connected on 24V,
15pin IN9 X9 X08~X18 are IPE valid; if
COM2 connected on IPE,
16pin IN11 X11 X08~X18 are 24Vvalid;
17pin IN13 X13
18pin IN15 X15
19pin-22pin Null Null
23pin-24pin GND GND
25pin-26pin +24V +24V +24V power
7.6.8.3 Input 2(IN2) interface (DP26 female)
1pin IN17 X17
2pin IN19 X19 If COM3 connected on 24V;
4pin IN23 X23 COM1 connected on IPE,
X16~X23 are 24V valid;
5pin IN24 X24
6pin IN26 X26
7pin IN28 X28
8pin IN30 X30
9pin COM4 COM4 If COM4 connected on 24V,
10pin IN16 X16 X24~X31 are IPEvalid; if
X24~X31 are 24V valid.
12pin IN20 X20
13pin IN22 X22
14pin COM3 COM3
15pin IN25 X25
16pin IN27 X27
17pin IN29 X29
18pin IN31 X31
23pin-24pin GND GND IPE
7.6.8.4 Input 3(IN3) Interface (DP26 female)
1pin IN33 X51
5pin IN40 X58 X50~X57 are 24V valid
6pin IN42 X60
7pin IN44 X62
8pin IN46 X64

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
9pin COM6 COM6
10pin IN32 X50
11pin IN34 X52
12pin IN36 X54
X58~X65 are IPEvalid; if
14pin COM5 COM5
COM4 connected on IPE,
15pin IN41 X59
X58~X65 are 24V valid;
16pin IN43 X61
17pin IN45 X63
18pin IN47 X65
23pin-24pin GND GND IPE
7.6.8.5 Output 1 (OUT1) Interface (DP26 female)
1pin OUT1 Y1 IPE valid (output)
9pin Null Null IPE valid (output)
14pin Null Null
15pin OUT9 Y9 +24V power
16pin OUT11 Y11
17pin OUT13 Y13 0-10 Vanalog voltage ground
18pin OUT15 Y15 IPEvalid (output)
21pin +10VB DA2 0-10V analog voltage 2
22pin +10VA DA1 0-10V analog voltage 1
23pin-24pin GND GND GND
25pin-26pin +24V +24V +24V
7.6.8.6 Output 2(OUT2) Interface(DP26 female)
9pin Null Null
14pin 空 Null

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 260
User Manual
21pin +10VB DA2 0-10V analog voltage 2
22pin +10VA DA1 0-10V analog voltage 1
23pin-24pin GND GND
25pin-26pin +24V +24V
7.6.9 Input and output signal converter board
7.6.9.1 Input signal board
Fig 7.28 input signal board

Note: if this board connect with IN1 interface of RIO, will output signal X0-X15
if this board connect with IN2 interface of RIO, will output signal X16～X31
if this board connect with IN3 interface of RIO, will output signal X50～X65
7.6.9.2 Output signal board
7.6.9.2.1 Output signal board (with relays)
Fig 7.29 output signal board (with relays)

Note: if this board connect with OUT1 of RIO, will output signal Y0-Y15
if this board connect with OUT2 of RIO, will output signal Y16～Y31
7.6.9.2.2 Output signal board (without relays)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig 7.30 Output signal board (without relays)
Note: if this board connect with OUT1 of RIO, will output signal Y0-Y15
if this board connect with OUT2 of RIO, will output signal Y16～Y31
7.7 CNC System Connect with Spindle Driver

7.7.1 CNC System connect with inverter
Fig 7.31
As showed above, the spindle frequency inverter speed change is controlled by velocity of 0 - +10V, driving
motor to achieve a continuously variable transmission. And the spindle frequency inverter has the
corresponding signal, to realize start, stop, CW, CCW, as well as failure detection.
7.7.2 CNC Connect with Spindle Servo Driver CTB-GS1

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 262
User Manual
Fig 7.32
As showed above, the control principle for CTB-GS1 spindle servo drive as below:
1. Speed control
The servo spindle stays in speed mode when “running mode” is invalid, system output 0--+10V analog
voltage with corresponding signal(CW/CCW), realize control of start, stop, CW, CCW, continuously variable
and failure detection.
2. Interpolation control
The servo spindle running in position mode when “running mode” is valid, the spindle speed and direction
are determined by the signal of CP,DIR.
3. the spindle orientation
Spindle driver will automatic do orientation operation according to its parameter setting when
ORIENTATION signal is valid. Orientation completed output signal make contacts M0C and M0A connected
on.
4. Motor power on and off
Motor power on and locking when ZERO SERVO signal is valid. Otherwise, power off and release.
7.8 Connect with DO Series Absolute Servo Driver

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig 7.33
Explanation: corresponding axis parameter setting relavant to absolute encoder :
411, feeding axis absolute encoder (X4,Y8,Z16,A32,B64)
412, absolute encoder multiple circle low 16bits storage address: DO driver set as “92”
413, absolute encoder single circle high 16bits storage address : DO driver set as “91”
414, absolute encoder single circle low 16bits storage address : DO driver set as “90”
415,X-axis absolute encoder pulse number per circle: DO 17bits driver set as 131072
416,Y-axis absolute encoder pulse number per circle: DO 17bits driver set as 131072
417,Z-axis absolute encoder pulse number per circle: DO 17bits driver set as 131072
418,4th-axis absolute encoder pulse number per circle: DO 17bits driver set as 131072
419,5th-axis absolute encoder pulse number per circle: DO 17bits driver set as 131072
420,X-axis displacement value of one encoder revolution (nm)
421,Y-axis displacement value of one encoder revolution (nm)
422,Z-axis displacement value of one encoder revolution (nm)
423,4th-axis displacement value of one encoder revolution (nm)
424, 5th-axis displacement value of one encoder revolution (nm)
Note: parameter No.420-No.424 unit is Nanometre(one in thousand micron), if the setting value is
Negative number,means the coordinates direction reverse .
425,X-axis absolute encoder multi-turn offset
426,Y-axis absolute encoder multi-turn offset
427,Z-axis absolute encoder multi-turn offset
428,4th-axis absolute encoder multi-turn offset
429,5th-axis absolute encoder multi-turn offset
Note: if input “E” for parameter No.425-No.429, will clear muti-turn and current machine

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 264
User Manual
coordinates value and solve coordinate overflow problem for too big multi-turn value.
430, X-axis displacement value numerator of one encoder revolution
431,Y-axis displacement value numerator of one encoder revolution
432,Z-axis displacement value numerator of one encoder revolution
433,4th-axis displacement value numerator of one encoder revolution
434,5th-axis displacement value numerator of one encoder revolution
Note:
1)485 communication drive station address : 1—X-axis; 2-Y-axis; 3—Z-axis; 4—4th axis, 5—5th axis
2)485 communication baud rate is fixed as 19200, data area fixed as 8bits; Stop area fixed as 1bit;
format fixed as RTU format.
3)485 communication parity fixed as : Odd
4)absolute encoder single circle offset will be saved in parameters of all feeding axis “reference return
offset ” , offset value unit is um
5) Parameter“displacement value numerator of one encoder revolution” is always positive number, means
the “actual displacement value of one encoder revolution” value result equal to parameter “displacement
value of one encoder revolution” divide “displacement value numerator of one encoder revolution”
The CNC will read driver coordinates value once power on; successful data reading shows “zero return
completed” is effective.
If Press “R” reset button under “Alarm Diagnosis” interface, will read and fresh current coordinates
value in the driver as well.
Another, our DO series 17bits encoder driver will feedback pulse by 2500 pulse number (Quadrature
sent through A, B signal).
7.9 MACHINE ELECTRIC INSTALLATION PRINCIPLE

7.9.1 Interface DC Power Supply Explanation :
Fig 7.34
As above shows, this CNC system have two groups of direct-current power, including internal power and
external power.. "+5V" is internal power supply for “GND”, which supply signal power to CNC system and
some signals power directly connect with CNC System(no need be isolated), another group "+24V" and
"IPE" constitute an external power supply of +24V, which is supplied by system main power
module(DC24V/2A) .this power supply is completed isolated from CNC internal ,mainly supply power for
external connectors (I/O, limit, reference point), electricity(control relays , magnetic brake)
7.9.2 I/O Interface
7.9.2.1 I/O Interface Classification and Configuration
I/O in our CNC :
Code# Type Valid level Remark
X00-X31 Remote I/O input IPE/+24V Remote I/O input
X50-X65 Remote I/O input IPE/+24V Remote I/O input
X66-X68
CN16 spindle input +24V CNC preset function
X79-X81

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Differential Servo alarm , Servo ready
X69- X78 CN11-CN15 input
level signal
X151-X197 Subpanel I/O input GND Subpanel keypads
X198、 Axis selection, override
MPG I/O GND
X200-X208 switch
Y00-Y31 Remote I/O output IPE Remote I/O output
Y71-Y80
Subpanel I/O output +5V K1-K10 indicator
(Y100-Y109)
Subpanel function
Y110-Y122 Subpanel I/O output +5V
keypads indicator
Servo enable, servo alarm
Y50-Y51 CN11-CN15 output IPE
clearence
Y52-Y57 CN16 spindle output IPE CNC preset function
7.9.2.2 General I/O input “IPE” Valid Interface Principle
In this CNC system, input signals X00-X31,X50-X65 are “IPE” valid, and COM1-COM6 will all
connect with 24V. and its wiring principle diagram refer to fig 7.35(take X00 as example):
Fig 7.35
7.9.2.3 General I/O input “+24V” valid interface principle
In this CNC System, input signals X00-X31,X50-X65 are “+24V”valid, and COM1~COM6 are all connect with
IPE, the wiring principle diagram as bellow (take X00 as example)
Fig 7.36
7.9.2.4 Spindle Interface CN16 General I/O input “+24V” valid interface principle
In this CNC System, input signals X66-X68, X79-X81 are “+24V” valid, and its wiring principle diagram as
bellow (take X66 as example).

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 266
User Manual
Fig 7.37
7.9.2.5 General, Movement Control I/O output “IPE” valid interface principle
In this CNC System, general I/O Y00-Y31 and movement control I/O Y50-Y57 are all output control signals
and valid level are IPE. The wiring diagram as bellow show the principle (take Y00 control relay as
example) :
Fig 7.38
Special attention: the output signals come with 50mA Resettable Fuse, so the accessed
current load can’t be greater than 50mA.
7.9.2.6 Servo Alarm , Servo Ready (X69-X78) interface principle:
Fig 7.39
7.9.2.7 Homing interface principle
Take X-axis as example (other axes are same )

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Fig 7.40
Fig7.41
As above diagram shows , in this CNC System include two homing methods(set via parameters) :
A, Homing Method One Principle : Only do wiring of fig 7.40
During homing process, when move to switch SQ, X0 signal will connected on with 24V,
X0 feedback to CNC System, CNC System control motor to decrease to stop, and slowly
move in reverse until disengage switch SQ, and this point is homing point.
B, Homing Method Two Principle: do wiring of both fig7.40 and fig7.41
During homing process, when move to switch SQ, X0 signal will connected on with 24V, X0
feedback to CNC System, CNC System control motor to decrease to stop, and slowly move
in reverse until disengage switch SQ until checked XZ signals within a certain stock (set via
parameter), and this point is homing point.
Note: 1, homing direction must be positive , so please pay attention during installation of
homing switch .
2, we suggest using metal proximity switch to avoid rebound failure phenomenon
during reference return , arising into reference return abnormal fault .

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 268
User Manual
Chapter 8 Maintenance
In order to give full play to the function and efficiency of the CNC system, it is important to use the
system correctly, make daily maintenance work of the system, make the system run under normal
environment and reduce the system failure( i.e. improve its mean free error time (MTBF)). Now detailed
description is made on maintenance for normal use of the system:
8.1 System operation and maintenance

1. The system must be operated in the normal environment.
2.Operators, programmers and maintenance personnel must be familiar with the CNC machining
process, correctly and reasonably use it in strict accordance with CNC system Operation commands, as well
as try to avoid failure caused by improper operation.
3.Each day clean the CNC cabinet before and after startup, especially the operation panel, to greasy
panel corrosion caused by oil and panel damage caused by metal sundries.
4. According to requirements of the CNC system, open the cabinet to clean the CNC cabinet once per six
months of use, to prevent oil mist, dust and metal powder from accumulation on PCB and electronic
elements in the CNC cabinet, which can affect the normal work of circuits.
5. If the system is not used for a long term, energize the CNC system once every two weeks; the
energization time is not less than 1 hour for each.
6.When the system is starting or is being shut down, do not forcibly cut off the power; otherwise, it will
cause adverse effect on the operating system. Before shutdown, you must press the exit from system run; if
abnormal shutdown is made, an accident will occur at the next start.
7. After using U disk, press "Remove U disk" under "Program" before removing the U disk; when the
system program interface is shown, remove the U disk. Otherwise, data loss will occur. Pay attention to
preventing the computer virus .
8. In the use of the manual pulse generator, when the driver alarm occurs or the speed can not be
increased frequently, check the settings of two parameters in "speed" parameters: the " the maximum
speed (mm/min) when Z axis uses manual pulse generator", "the maximum speed (mm/min) when X, Y
and the fourth axis use the manual pulse generator.
8.2 Common troubleshooting

8.2.1 The system can not be energized
1) Check whether the power supply is normal.
2) Check whether the power switch is in ON position.
3)Check the fuse.
8.2.2 No display after Start-up
1)Make a restart or reset check.
2)Check whether switching power supply voltage is normal.
3)Check whether the transformer is damaged.
4)Check whether the computer motherboard is normal.
8.2.3 Switching power supply is normal, but the system sometimes can start and
sometimes can’t
1.The motherboard button battery voltage is not normal, or button battery power supply circuit fails.
Replace it a 3V-voltage button battery and check power supply circuit beside the battery.
8.2.4 The system crashes or disorderly acts during use
1）Improper operation.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
2）Switching power supply anti-interference ability is reduced.
3)System work environment changes, such as too strong static electricity, electromagnetic coupling,
electromagnetic radiation, leakage coupling and other interference.
4 ） System host power supply is not provided by isolation transformer or the isolated transformer
primary wiring is wrong
5） The machine or system and parts are poorly grounded.
8.2.5 Poor machining precision
1) After a period of using CNC machine tool, its backlash may change and needs to be regularly
corrected.
2) It is advisable to calibrate the benchmark point before machining workpiece to ensure accurate
positioning of the starting point for machining.
Improper machining speed or allowance for machining.
4) Reducer connection sleeve taper pins completely fall off.
5) The tool is not clamped tightly.
6)The workpiece is not well clamped or the clamping positioning consistency is poor.
7)Different sizes of blanks lead to uneven tool back-off.
8)Mechanical problems occur to machine tool.
8.2.6 RS232 communication failure
1) Check whether the communication port selected is consistent with the that connected.
2)Check whether the system baud rate is consistent with the PC baud rate.
3)Check whether baud rate is set as too high; after the RS232 communication isolation board is used,
the baud rate can not be higher than 38400Kbps.
4)Check whether the cable is too long; it can not be more than 10 meters.
5)Check whether the cable shield is grounded (plug housing).
8.3 Common information

During the user's operation and programming, the system has a very powerful diagnostic function and
reminds the operator in Chinese. Now, its main error messages are described as follows:
1).Emergency stop: When the operator presses the emergency stop button, the system immediately shuts
down the spindle, cooling and motor and conducts safety diagnosis work. Waiting for the operator to
release the emergency stop button.
2).Opening the program file failed!
3).The program file can not be opened!
4).CNC program containing the subprogram or G22 code is too long (it shall not exceed 3000 lines; the large
program more than 3000 lines shall not conduct sub-program call or use G22 cycle command)!
5).The expression after code x in line n of the program has a syntax error!
6).Program line n code x reading data error!
7).Program line n code G00 and command F can not share a segment!
8).Program line n code x contradiction!
9).Program line n code x error!
10).Data after program line n code T shall not be zero!
11).Data after program line n code T shall not be 00!
12).Error of data after line n code H in the current macro of program!
13).There is any unrecognized code in line n of the program!
14).Line n of the program has conflicting or repeated G code!
15).Line n of the program has repeated commands!
16).Subprogram xxxxxx does not exist or can not be opened!0
17).End of subprogram xxxxxx shall have M99 command code!

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 270
User Manual
18).The file can not be opened; please select the CNC program!
19).The macro-program can not be opened (the macro-program may not exist)!
20).There is an error near Line n of macro-program (there may be any wrong program block)!
21).Warning: Macro program may have an endless loop!
22).Fixed cycle command Q value near the line n is wrong!
23).Line n G74 / G84 thread cycle shall specify K or E value!
24).Line n G33 thread machining shall specify the K value!
25).There is an error near the line n; there shall not be reference point return command in the tool radius
compensation area !
26).There is an error near the line n; there shall not be tool radius offset command in the tool radius
compensation area !
27).Program line n X axis soft limit!
28).I or J or K shall be entered near the line n of the program !
29). I or J or K or R shall be entered near the line n of the program !
30).Circular I or J or K near the program line n conflicts with end point coordinates!
31).There is an error on the arc radius near line n of the program (too small)!
32).Please cancel the manual mode and then run the program!
33).Please close the protective door and then run the program!
34).Tool seat is not lift!
35).Please make the Z-axis return to reference point!
36).Move the Z axis forward and then perform the operation!
37).The main arm clasping tool signal is valid; do not run Z axis!
38).X-axis driver alarm!
39).Spindle alarm!
40).X-axis forward hard limit! Please manually clear
41).X-axis negative hard limit! Please manually clear!
43).Y-axis driver alarm!
43).Y-axis forward hard limit! Please manually clear
44).Y-axis negative hard limit! Please manually clear!
45).Z-axis driver alarm!
46).Z-axis forward hard limit! Please manually clear
47).Z-axis negative hard limit! Please manually clear!
48).The fourth axis driver alarm!
49).The fourth axis forward hard limit! Please manually clear
50).The fourth axis negative hard limit! Please manually clear!
51).Custom alarm 0: xxxxxx
60).Custom alarm 9 xxxxxx

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
67).Cooling overload alarm!
68).Cooling liquid shortage alarm!
69).Lubrication overload alarm!
70).Lubricating oil shortage alarm!
71).Machine soft limit!
72).Tool selection action in progress!
73). Tool selection action in progress: spindle return to zero
74). Tool selection action in progress:Z axis return to the first reference point!
75). Tool selection action in progress: spindle orientation
76). Tool selection action in progress: Z axis return to tool change point!
77). Tool selection action in progress:waiting for the tool rest to move forward in place
78). Tool selection action in progress: waiting for in-place tool unclamping
79). Tool selection action in progress: lifting Z axis!
80). Tool selection action in progress: lowering Z axis!
81). Tool selection action in progress: waiting for in-place tool clamping!
82). Tool selection action in progress: waiting for the tool rest moving back in place!
83). Tool selection action in progress!
84).The magazine is returning to zero!
85).The spindle is returning to zero!
86).Preparation for tool change or selection in progress!
87).OK, machine is normal!
88).Sorry, please stop the running program and then compile programs!
89).The folder/file name shall not contain any space!
90).There is the same target folder name. Is it covered?
91).No USB flash drive is found. Please insert it!
92).USB flash drive has been removed. Please re-insert it!
93).Mounting USB flash drive failed. It can not be opened!
94).Read the macro file failed!
95).Divisor in the expression shall not be 0!
96).The natural logarithmic independent variable shall not be less than 0!
97).The expression function ASIN is wrong!
98).The expression function ACOS is wrong!
99).The expression function SQRT is wrong!
100).The expression operator is incorrect!
101).Macro variable number in line n of the macro is wrong!
102).The line n can not call the macro!
103).Return to the reference point failed and no zero signal is caught!
104).There is an error near the program. The tool radius compensation is wrong!
105).There is an error near line n of program. Tool nose R compensation building is not correct!
106).There is an error near line n of program. Tool nose R compensation cancellation is wrong!
107).Program line n machining over-cutting. Stop machining.
108).There is an error near the line n; there shall not be plane change in the tool radius compensation area !
109).There is an error near the line n; there shall not be reference point return command in the tool radius
compensation area !
120).There is an error near the line n; there shall not be thread command in the tool radius compensation

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 272
User Manual
area!
121).Sorry, the password input is not correct.
The "I/O state" and "ladder diagram" under "Diagnosis" can be used to check faults occurring on
electrical appliances of the machine. In the I/O state, real-time monitoring is on the current states of all
input relays, output relays and auxiliary relays, with red light-invalid and green light-valid; Ladder diagram
is used to make real-time monitoring on the current PLC running state, with red light indicating
corresponding contact or coil is invalid and green light indicating the corresponding contact or coil is valid.
The "Axis State" monitors axis limit, return to reference point, driver state and servo enable. In light of the
actual situation, through the foregoing information, you can determine where is the problem.
The input point X, the output point Y and the custom alarms M80-M95 can be described in the
"Configuration Description". Such description is limited to eight characters. The corresponding
configuration description will be displayed in "I/O State" and "Ladder diagram", to facilitate debugging and
operator's observation.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Appendix
Appendix 1 Use of Fourth Axis and Fifth Axis
1.1Use of the fourth axis
1.1.1Setting of the corresponding parameters
The system can expand functions of the fourth axis. It is needed to set the following parameters in use:
Speed parameters:
4,The fourth axis G00 speed (mm/min)
11,The fourth axis acceleration and deceleration acceleration((mm/min)/s)
20,The fourth axis return to the reference point forward speed(mm/min)
25, The fourth axis return to the reference point reverse speed (mm/min)
122,Maximum speed of 4th axis manual pulse (mm/min) [>=50, valid]
Axis parameters:
7,The fourth axis negative maximum stroke(mm)
8,The fourth axis forward maximum stroke (mm)
14,The fourth axis backlash compensation (micron)
30,The fourth axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-forward)
38,Detection zero maximum length for the fourth axis return to reference point (0.1mm)
43,Offset after the fourth axis return to the reference point(0.01mm)
51,The fourth axis function setting (0-rotary axis, 1-linear axis)
54,Calculation when the fourth axis is the rotary axis (workpiece coordinates display calculation +1;
machine coordinate calculation +2)
1.1.2 Clamping function settings
This function can be realized by the auxiliary relay or programmable I / O when the clamping function
is required for use as a rotary axis. As shown in the following example:
Example: sub-panel K7 key is the clamping/unclamping control button; auxiliary relay- M61/ M79;
X25 for in-place unclamping detection, X24 for in-place clamping detection, and Y20 for the output control
signal.
As shown in the figure above: In manual state, press K7 key to realize unclamping/clamping of the
fourth axis; in automatic machining, M51 is used to control the unclamping and M52 to control the
clamping; A axis can only move when unclamping is made in place. Make M1079 (waiting command) in the

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 274
User Manual
program to detect the in-place clamping.
1.1.3 commands for use of the fourth axis
1,When the fourth axis is used as the rotary axis and G90 absolute programming is used, calculation is
made according to 360 degrees, to run to the programming point with the shortest path;
2,when the fourth axis is used as the rotary axis and G91 incremental programming is used, like the
linear axis, non-calculation is made.
3,When NO.54 parameter is set to 1 in "Axis parameter", it indicates the fourth axis workpiece
coordinates will be displayed after calculation (0-360 degrees); otherwise, accumulation display will be
made; the accumulation display is always made for machine coordinates.
4,When the fourth axis is used as the rotary axis, the workpiece coordinate systems G54-G59 can be
used.
5,When the fourth axis is used as the rotary axis, positive and negative soft limits are still valid
(processed as per machine coordinates).
2.1Use of the fifth axis
2.1.1Setting of the corresponding parameters
The system can expand functions of the fourth axis. It is needed to set the following
parameters in use:
Speed parameters:
5,The fifth axis G00 speed (mm/min)
12,The fifth axis acceleration and deceleration acceleration((mm/min)/s)
21,The fifth axis return to reference point forward speed(mm/min)
26,The fifth axis return to reference point reverse speed(mm/min)
123,Maximum speed of 5th axis handwheel (mm/min) [>=50, valid]
Axis parameters:
9,The fifth axis negative maximum stroke(mm)
10,The fifth axis forward maximum stroke(mm)
15,The fifth axis backlash compensation (micron)
31,The fifth axis direction signal (0-reverse, 1-forward)
39,Detection zero maximum length for the fifth axis return to reference point (0.1mm)
44,Offset after the fiftth axis return to the reference point(0.01mm)
52,The fifth axis function setting (0-rotary axis, 1-linear axis)
55,Calculation when the fifth axis is the rotary axis (workpiece coordinates display
calculation +1; machine coordinate calculation +2)NO.54
2.1.2 commands for use of the fifth axis as the rotary axis
1,When the fifth axis is used as the rotary axis and G90 absolute programming is used, calculation is
made according to 360 degrees, to run to the programming point with the shortest path;
2,When the fifth axis is used as the rotary axis and G91 incremental programming is used, like the
linear axis, non-calculation is made.
3,When NO.55 parameter is set to 1 in Axis parameter, it indicates the fifth axis workpiece coordinates
will be displayed after calculation (0-360 degrees); Otherwise, accumulation display will be made.
4,The accumulation display is always made for machine coordinates.
5,When the fifth axis is used as the rotary axis, the workpiece coordinate systems G54-G59 can be
used.
6,When the fifth axis is used as the rotary axis, positive and negative soft limits are still valid
(processed as per machine coordinates).
2.1.3 Display of the fifth axis
The axis parameter 49 is used to set whether the system uses C axis: When set to 0, the system displays B
axis; when set to 1, the system display C axis.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Appendix 2 Magazine control parameter

The system has magazine control function (auto tool selection and tool change), with bamboo hat style
magazine and turntable style magazine available. The specific configuration can be set through parameters.
1.1 Enable parameters involved in magazine control function (comprehensive
parameters):
NO.10 Whether to start tool selection and tool change function.
NO.11 Tool management mode. (0-using M06/ non-0 indicates direct tool change by T command) Used
to select turntable style or bamboo hat style magazine.
NO.12 Tool selection mode/tool count signal.
NO .13,Return to tool change point axis (3-ZX; 4-ZY; 5-ZXY; others-Z)
NO.14 The reference point that the Z axis will return to at tool change
NO.15 Whether to detect spindle orientation and the Z axis tool change point.
NO.16 Whether the spindle is oriented when the tool is changed
NO.17 The spindle orientation stop angle at tool change (0.1 degree)
NO.18 Magazine type
19, Special magazine (0: standard, 2: spindle stop after tool change; 4: shielding K5 key; 8:
Synchronous tool holding, 16: special bamboo hat style, 32: servo magazine, 64: special ARM)
24, Delay time after tool unclamping at tool change (0.1 s)
25,Whether Z axis motion and main arm tool holding/bamboo style magazine are interlocked (0-Yes,
0-No)
27, Maximum tool number at the fixed tool location zone (After setting this parameter, initialize tool
seat table)
61, Magazine tool count signal [rising edge” 1000+ number”, falling edge “2000+number”]
62, Magazine location signal [1000+number]
63, Magazine CW rotation output point [1000+number]
64, Magazine CCW rotation output point [1000+number]
209, Gear shift prior to spindle orientation (11-18 represent 1st-8th gears respectively)
1.2 Parameters for bamboo hat style magazine (comprehensive parameters):
20,Z axis lifting height at tool change for bamboo hat style magazine (mm)
21,Z axis lifting speed at tool change for bamboo hat style magazine(mm/min)
22, Quick lifting distance of Z axis for bamboo hat style magazine mm
23,Tool back-off delay (turntable style tool case falling/tool clamping ) for bamboo hat style
magazine (0.1s)
26,Whether magazine moving forward M41 checks Z axis position (0-Yes, 1-No)
210,The longest waiting time for forward and backward motion of bamboo hat style
magazine [>5] (0.1s)
1.3 Parameters for arm magazine (comprehensive parameters):
65, Arm brake input point [1000+number]
66, Arm rotation output point [1000+number]
207,Time delay after tool seat lifting (ms)
208,The time from the arm’s detecting stop signal to output stop (ms)

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 276
User Manual
Appendix 3
1.1 The use of spindle encoder signal
After the encoder signal synchronized with the spindle will be introduced into the system from the
system CN21 (spindle encoder interface) socket and the relevant parameters are set, it can be used for
spindle speed and angle detection (e.g. displaying the actual spindle speed, detecting whether the spindle
orientation angle is correct in the orientation function, to prevent machine failure, etc.).
A.Wiring description:
1.For the system spindle encoder interface signal distribution, see section 7.6.4. in the manual.
2.The encoder signal must be differential signal; the connection cable must be twisted shielded cable;
signals with the opposite polarity are twisted (A + and A-; B + and B-; C + and C -; +5 V and GND twisted T);
and the shield is for well machine grounding.
3. For connection with a passive signal (such as an encoder), the 8 wires are all connected; the + 5V
signal can not be connected (to prevent power supply collision) for connection with the active (spindle
driver output) signal.
B.Parameter settings
1.Displaying the spindle speed and angle: When the following parameters are set, you can observe the
actual spindle speed and angle under the multi-coordinate system interface in the system.
（1）The NO.101 parameter in the axis parameter is set to 1, to detect the spindle position (encoder
signal) feedback.
（2）NO.100 in the axis parameter, the value of which is the product of number of encoder lines × 4.
Setting the number of pulses per revolution of the spindle encoder.
2.Used to determine whether the orientation angle is correct: Namely, the spindle executes orientation
function and then determine whether the orientation angle is correct through the encoder signal, to
prevent machine failure (e.g. wrong spindle orientation angle will cause collision at tool change and
will cause damage to tool at retract for boring).
（1）Set parameters according to the previous step (set the NO.101 parameter in the axis parameter to
1; set the parameter value of NO.100 in the axis parameter, which is the product of number of
encoder lines × 4).
（ 2 ） NO.102 parameter among axis parameters, the angle of the spindle stop position after the
orientation is completed.
（3）NO.103 parameter among axis parameters, the allowable positive and negative deviation range
for the orientation angle judgment. This parameter value depends on the accuracy
requirements.
1.2 Power supply control for spindle and feed axis
In this system, I/O output port can be used to control power supply for spindle and feed shaft drivers.
Specifically, settings are made in NO.28 parameter among "Comprehensive parameters" (power state of
each axis at start-up) .
When it is set to automatic power-on mode at start, the sub-panel K8 key is the control button; after
power-on, the K8 indicator light is on. Also, the PLC programming can be used to control external I / O to
achieve power control on the spindle and feed axis drivers; as shown below:
Note: Y78 is the K8 indicator light; M04 is for the emergency stop (indicating power cut-off when emergency stop is valid);
Yxx indicates one output signal of general I/O.
Note: When the power supply of the axis driver is not controlled by the system, the No. 14 parameter for driver shall be set to
"1".
1.3 System clock

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
The system has a clock function and the clock power supply is 3V button battery. Due to the limited
battery power level, replace the battery immediately when the clock is out of order.
Note: The battery is on the motherboard.
Appendix 4 Description on commands G808 and M114

1.1Special command G808 on wafer grinding by grinding wheel
Special command G808 on wafer grinding by grinding wheel:
Programming in the following format:
N1 G90 G54 G01 X_ Y_ F_ Positioning
N2 G808 I_ J_ K_ F_ Machining straight edge
N3 G91 G01 Y-0.1 F1000 Auxiliary program block
N4 G90 G54 G01 X_ Y_ F_ Return to Line N1 positioning point
In the command G808:
I: Grinding wheel diameter (mm)
J: Wafer diameter(mm)
K: Wafer straight-side length(mm)
F: Rotation speed of wafer (degree per minute)(mm)
The X-axis for linear motion of the grinding wheel (the direction leaving from the wafter is the forward
direction )
The Y-axis for rotary motion of the wafer (accuracy of 0.001 degree)
1.2 Planing Command M114 for Shaper Planer
Command format: M114 Lxx (or Qxx) Fxx; Planing modal setting
command.
M115; Planing modal cancel command.
Explanation:
1).In the planing modal, the G00/G01/G02/G03 command will run for L time (or Q distance)
and then pause to automatically execute the M886 custom command (i.e., executing the
ProgramUser6 file).
2).L specifies the running time at the programmed F speed before pause (Unit: millisecond).
Q specifies the running distance at the programmed F speed before pause (unit: mm).
3).F specifies the feed rate (unit: mm/min).
Attention:
1. Under the same L running time, the greater the F value, the longer the distance; under the
same F speed, the greater the L value, the longer the distance.
2. Q running distance is related to the acceleration and deceleration of each axis; the greater
the acceleration and deceleration is, the closer to set Q value the running distance Q is.
3. M886 is the command to be executed after pause.
For example:
1.As shown in the figure below: 0 is the machining origin.
G54G17G0X10Y40Z0 (Designated coordinate system G54, machining plane G17, fast

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 278
User Manual
positioning to coordinate point X0Y0Z0)
G01X0Y0F600
M114L30F500(Running at 30mm / min for 30 milliseconds, and then executing the program
in M886)
G01X-20Y25 (Planing A plane)
X-70 (Planing B plane)
X-100Y0 (Planing C plane)
M115 (Cancel the planing command)
G0Y40
X10
M30
Or
G54G17G0X10Y40Z0 (Designated coordinate system G54, machining plane G17, fast
positioning to coordinate point X0Y0Z0)
G01X0Y0F600
M114Q1.50F500 (Running at 500mm/min for 1.5mm, and then executing the program in
M886)
G01X-20Y25 (Planing A plane)
X-70 (Planing B plane)
X-100Y0 (Planing C plane)
M115 (Cancel the Planing command)
G0Y40
X10
M30
2.As shown below: 0 is the machining origin; segment A-B is symmetrical to segment D-E.
G54G17G0X-200Y50Z0 (Designated coordinate system G54, machining plane G17, fast positioning to
coordinate point X0Y0Z0)
G01X-198Y-11F600
M114L30F400 (Running at 30mm / min for 30 milliseconds, and then executing the program in
M886)
G01X-185Y-11.5 (positioning machining start point)
X-130Y25 (Planing A plane)
G02X-38.73Y-10R60(Planing B plane)
G03X38.73Y-10R40(Planing C plane)
G02X130Y25R60 (Planing D plane)
G01X185Y-11.5 (Planing E plane)
G0Y50
M30

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586
User Manual
Or
G54G18G0X-200Y50Z0 (Designated coordinate system G54, machining plane G18, fast positioning to
coordinate point X0Y0Z0)
G01X-198Y-11F600
M114Q0.5F2000 (Running at 2000mm/min for 0.5mm, and then executing the program in
M886)
G01X-185Y-11.5 (positioning machining start point)
X-130Y25 (Planing A plane)
G02X-38.73Y-10R60(Planing B plane)
G03X38.73Y-10R40(Planing C plane)
G02X130Y25R60 (Planing D plane)
G01X185Y-11.5 (Planing E plane)
G0Y50
M30
Note: Your correction will be cordially invited if there are any omissions, improper expressions and other places
needing to be improved occurring for a variety of reasons in this manual. The Company will be dedicated to
providing each of our customers with quality service and technical support.

Tel: 0086-13551010933 Fax: 0086-28-86623586 280

350im English (Revised2) - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

350im English (Revised2) - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 1

Chapter 2 System Technical Features

2.1 System Structure

2.2 Technical Parameters

2.3 System Functions

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

2.4 System Operating Conditions

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 3

Chapter 3 Operating commands

3.1 Distribution of Panel and Switch

Figure 3.1 Distribution of Panel

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

" " program interface. Under the program interface, the

" "tool compensation interface. Under tool compensation

" "Alarm history interface. In alarm interface, I/O, ladder

“ ”parameters interface. In the parameters interface, there are

“ ”diagnosis interface. In diagnosis interface, I/O, ladder

" " are used for controlling the positive

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 5

3.2 Operating Interface

Figure 3.2 Operating Interface

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Figure 3.3 Menu Distribution

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 7

Figure 3.4 Data Input Dialogue

Figure 3.3 Menu Distribution

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

3.6 Setting of Tool Length Compensation

Figure 3.7 Wear Setting

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 9

Figure 3.8 Setting of Length Compensation

Figure 3.9 Settings of Tool Seat Table

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Figure 3.10 Setting the Number of Tools

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 11

Figure 3.11 Selection of Program

Figure 3.12 New/Search

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Figure 3.13 Copy

Figure 3.15 Rename

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 13

Figure 3.17 Information

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 15

Figure 3.24 Import Parameter

Figure 3.25 Export Parameter

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 17

Figure 3.31 Edit

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Figure 3.32 Graphic Processing command Selection Dialogue

Figure 3.33 G84 Right-handed Tapping Commands Dialog

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 19

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 21

Figure 3.42 Manual Mode

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Figure 3.45 Set up any incremental value

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 23

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 25

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106 27

Press to start the spindle in clockwise rotation, displaying M03.

Press to start the spindle in counterclockwise rotation, displaying M04.

Press to jog the spindle in clockwise rotation, displaying M03.

Press to jog the spindle in counterclockwise rotation, displaying M04.

Address:Chengdu,Sichuan,P.R.China Postcode: 610106

7）Spindle speed adjustment control:

Figure 3.60 Modify the Manual Feed Speed

Figure 3.61 Modify Manual Spindle Rotation Speed